The URL can be used to link to this page

RES 1997-3327 - Contract with Hawkins Construction Co for Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 clubhouse/restroom renovation 1 Parks, Recreation & F 0tAAHA,n,4,/ Public Property Department ,'° ��'s�0, IV P rt3r P 6 .,i�� Omaha/Douglas Civic Center ® r�'�.'1ler n 97 DEC �. 1 DM !: 1 9 1819 Farnam Street,Suite 701 _ � i 11 i Omaha,Nebraska 68183-0701 o ,t .M • (402)444-5900 °o� ��ti �, ,f, CLERK FAX(402)444-4921 'TFo FEaR°t ( �1 i' ;1, C w i1;aa l James P.Cleary City of Omaha Director Hal Daub,Mayor Honorable President and Members of the City Council, The attached Resolution approves the contract with Hawkins Construction Company for the renovation of the existing home and visitor clubhouses at Rosenblatt Stadium. In addition, the women's and men's restrooms on the third base side in the original grandstand will be completely reconstructed. The existing clubhouses and third base restrooms are in very poor condition and this renovation project will completely rebuild these three areas. The following bids were received on November 19, 1997. The engineer's Estimate for this project is $1,200,000. CONTRACTOR BID Hawkins Construction Company $1,118,000.00 (LOW BID) Prairie Construction Co. $1,289,500.00 Charles Vrana and Son Construction Co. $1,475,000.00 The Finance Department is authorized to pay the cost of S.P. 97-20, Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovation, 13th and Bert Murphy Drive in the amount of$1,118,000.00 from the Rosenblatt Stadium Expansion Fund No. 307. The last review by the Human Relations Director showed the contractor is in compliance with Ordinance No. 28885 and that the contractor has on file a current Annual Contract Compliance Report Form(CC-1). As is City policy, the Human Relations Director will continue to review the 1 Contractor to ensure compliance with the Contract Compliance Ordinance. The Parks and Finance Departments recommend acceptance of the low bid from Hawkins Construction Co. in the amount of$1,118,000.00 for S.P. 97-20, being the lowest and best bid received, and request your consideration and approval of this Resolution. esp ctfully submitted, pproved: (1/4 6/77 e L. a is Jr. Director a e J es P. Cleary, Director / Date Georg6.q arks, Recreation& Publi ,Property Human Reel tions Department ' pprrved as toFunding: Referred'to C'ty Council for Co eration: `s 1 f`-7/f7 r iI Loui , ,,g,' / /I/ s . D Ercole, Director-- J Date +_.- ayor s 0 ffice/ tle Date Finance Department P:\PLN2\5760.SAP CR:€14*L. 'J^J.�"l!%✓liCr./JYl-ll-lllJJ' Jl�" 1A The full amount of the deposit CITYfor up to.two sets of plans and ` specifications will be refunded to each and every plan holder - �� upon return in good condition of all plcns andspecifications OMAHAviit hin seven (7) working days following the bid date. 1 I / . PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT 1 i . CONTRACT DOCUMENTS i _ AND 1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS . i t .. , ,..,.. . • '0 . Special Project No . 91 — 2 I `A. /K .:° ' I 11 t K:› 16(...tarn -1,-Wot 64,-1-- _-- • I i 1 - . 1 Bids received utp 11:00 o'clock A.M. j 1 19 li-- Iry Contract Awa i_ 19 -esolution No. 32)21' Contractor; 711-.0c7t.po G,.. _ ti. 972 S • Y _ rG.G - J I —- -1 r : r Specifications for S.P. 97-20 Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovations 13th Street & Bert Murphy Drive Omaha, Nebraska 68130 ' Owner City of Omaha 1819 Farnam Street Omaha/Douglas Civic Center Omaha, Nebraska 68183 1 Architects Bahr Vermeer& Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1209 Hamey Street Omaha, Nebraska 68102 Telephone: 402-345-3060 FAX: 402-345-7871 ' Civil Engineers/Surveyors Lamp, Rynearson &Associates 14747 California Street Omaha, Nebraska 68154 ' Telephone: 402-496-2498 FAX: 402-496-2730 1 Structural Engineers HNTB Howard Needles Tammen & Bergendoff 1201 Walnut Suite 700 Kansas City, Missouri 64106 Telephone: 816-472-1201 FAX: 816-472-4060 1 Mechanical/Electrical Engineer Alvine &Associates, Inc. 1102 Douglas on the Mall Omaha, Nebraska 68102 Telephone: 402-346-7007 FAX: 402-346-9576 LRA Project No. 90053 BVH Project No. L97098 Date 27 October 1997 10-27-97 00001-1 BVH#97098 Bahr Vermeer& Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 I I TABLE OF CONTENTS I S.P. 97-20 Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovations I 13th Street& Bert Murphy Drive Omaha, NE 68130 LRA Project No.90053 BVH Project No.L97098 I INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 1 Document 00001 -Title Page 00001-1 Document 00010-Table of Contents 00010-1 - 3 Document 00015- List of Drawings 00015-1 I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS I Document Notice to Bidders NB-la to NB-3 Document Proposal Form P-1 to P-5 • (P2= 1 page) I Document Certificate 02/92/5343S Document 00250- Pre-Bid Meeting 00250-1 Document 00320- Geotechnical Data......... 00320-1 -24 CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document Contract C-1 to C-4 I Document Performance, Payment, &Guarantee Bond B-1 to B-4 Document Special Provisions SP-2 Document General and Supplemental Conditions 00800-1 - 5 I SPECIFICATIONS IDIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01110-Summary of Work 01110-1 -2 I Section 01310-Project Management and Coordination 01310-1 - 3 Section 01330-Submittal Procedures 01330-1 -4 Section 01400-Quality Requirements 01400-1 - 3 Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-1 -3 I Section 01600- Product Requirements 01600-1 -2 Section 01730-Cutting and Patching 01730-1 -2 Section 01770-Closeout Procedures 01770-1 -3 IDIVISION 2-SITE WORK Section 02220- Demolition - 02220-1 -2 I Section 02300-Earthwork 02300-1 - 5 Section 02620—Foundation Drainage System 02620-1 -2 I 10-27-97 00010-1 BVH#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 I . I DIVISION 3-CONCRETE I Section 03100-Concrete Formwork 03100-1 -3 Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement 03200-1 -2 Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-1 -8 DIVISION 4-MASONRY Section 04060- Mortar 04060-1 -2 I Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies 04800-1 -6 DIVISION 5- METALS I Section 05120- Structural Steel 05120-1 - 5 Section 05500-Metal Fabrications 05500-1 -3 DIVISION 6-CARPENTRY . Section 06100- Rough Carpentry 06100-1 - 3 Section 06200-Finish Carpentry 06200-1 - 3 I Section 06410-Custom Cabinets 06410-1 -4 DIVISION 7- MOISTURE PROTECTION • . ISection 07130-Sheet Membrane Waterproofing 07130-1 -2 Section 07200-Thermal Protection 07200-1 - 3 Section 07530- Membrane Roofing- EPDM 07530-1 -4 I Section 07710-Gutters and Downspouts 07710-1 -2 Section 07840- Firestopping ..............................:...... 07840-1 -3 Section 07900-Joint Sealers 07900-1 -3 I DIVISION 8-DOORS, WINDOWS,AND GLASS Section 08000- Door Schedule 08000-1 - 1 I Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 -4 Section 08310—Access Doors 08310-1 -2 Section 08330—Overhead Coiling Doors 08330-1 Section 08700-Hardware 08700-1 -4 ISection 08800—Glazing 08800-1 -4 DIVISION 9-FINISHES. I Section 09000- Room Finish Schedule 09000-1 -2 Section 09220- Portland Cement Plaster Finish 09220-1 -3 Section 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260-1 -4 I Section 09300-Tile 09300-1 -4 Section 09510-Acoustical Ceilings 09510-1 -3 Section 09650-Resilient Floorings 09650-1 -2 Section 09680-Carpet-Glue Down 09680-1 -3 I Section 09900- Paints and Coatings 09900-1 -7 I 1 10-27-97 00010-2 BVH#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. I DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES 1 Section 10100-Visual Display Boards 10100-1 —2 Section 10160-Metal Toilet Compartments 10160-1 —3 Section 10170- Filled Acrylic Toilet Compartments 10170-1 -4 I Section 10400- Identification Devices 10400-1 -2 Section 10520- Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10520-1 -2 Section 10800-Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 10800-1 -5 I DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT—Not Used. DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS- Not Used IDIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION-Not Used DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS-Not Used IDIVISION 15- MECHANICAL Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 15010-1 -9 I Section 15050- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15050-1 - 14 Section 15055- Basic Piping Materials and Methods 15055-1 - 13 Section 15250- Mechanical Insulation 15250-1 -6 I Section 15300- Fire Protection 15300-1 -6 Section 15400-Plumbing 15400-1 - 11 Section 15440-Plumbing Fixtures 15440-1 - 10 Section 15458-Water Heaters 15458-1 -3 I Section 15600-Furnaces(MAU'S) 15600-1 -2 Section 15650—Direct Expansion Refrigeration Systems 15650-1 -5 Section 15800-Heat Transfer Equipment 15800-1 - 3 I Section 15845- Energy Recovery Units 15845-1 - 3 Section 15850-Air Handling Units and Fans 15850-1 -4 Section 15880—Air Distribution (Sheet metal) 15880-1 - 11 Section 15950—Energy Management Control System &Temperature Controls 15950-1 -7 ISection 15990-Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 -7 DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL I Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 16010-1 -9 Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-1 -8 Section 16110-Conduit Raceways 16110-1 -4 I Section 16120-Conductors(600 Volt) 16120-1 -2 Section 16130- Boxes and Fittings 16130-1 -3 Section 16140-Wiring Devices 16140-1 -3 Section 16155- Motor Control 16155-1 -2 I Section 16160- Lighting Panelboards 16160-1 -3 Section 16170- Equipment Connection 16170-1 -2 Section 16181 - Fuses 16181-1 -2 ISection 16360-Safety Switches 16360-1 -2 Section 16450-Grounding 16450-1 -2 Section 16510-Lighting Fixtures 16510-1 -4 Section 16726—Automatic Fan Shutdown System 16726-1 5 I Section 16740-Voice and Data Cabling Pathways 16740-1 -2 Section 16749-Voice and Data and Fiber Optic Cable and Outlet Systems 16749-1 —3 IEnd of Document 10-27-97 00010-3 BVH#97098 1 I Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 DOCUMENT 00015 LIST OF DRAWINGS IDENTIFICATION Cover Sheet ARCHITECTURAL IA-1.1 Demolition Plans A-1.2 Floor Plans- 1/8" =1'-0" A-2.1 Elevations IA-3.1 Building Sections- Royals A-3.2 Building Sections-Visitors A-3.3 Building Sections and Details-Restrooms A-4.1 Reflected Ceiling Plans I A-5.1 Wall Sections A-5.2 Wall Sections A-5.3 Details I A-6.1 Interior Elevations A-6.2 Interior Elevations A-6.3 Interior Elevations, Door/Frame Types and Details ISTRUCTURAL S-1.1 Structural General Notes S-2.1 Stadium Plan I S-2.2 Enlarged Structural Plans S-3.1 Details S-3.2 Details - S-3.3 Details IMECHANICAL M-1.1 Clubhouse Plan-Royals-Plumbing IM-1.2 Clubhouse Plan-Visitors-Plumbing M-1.3 Men and Women Restroom-North-Plumbing M-1.4 Waste and Vent Riser Diagram IM-2.1 Clubhouse Plan-Royals-HVAC M-2.2 Clubhouse Plan-Visitors-HVAC M-2.3 Men and Women Restroom-North-HVAC M-3.1 Mechanical Details IM-4.1 Mechanical Schedules ELECTRICAL E-1.1 Clubhouse Plan-Royals-Power E-1.2 Clubhouse Plan-Visitors-Power E-1.3 Men and Women Restroom-North-Power E-2.1 Clubhouse Plan-Royals-Lighting IE-2.2 Clubhouse Plan-Visitors-Lighting M-2.3 Men and Women Restroom-North-Lighting M-3.1 Riser Diagrams and Schedules M-4.1 Concourse Plan- Electrical END OF DOCUMENT 10-27-97 00015-1 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed Proposals will be received by the City of Omaha, at the Office of Mary Galligan Cornett, City Clerk, L/C 1 , Omaha/Douglas Civic Center, until 11:00 a.m. on the 9day of \16,\I 1 n- for the construction of being - I42- C-1��'j • 442Uk - /gfOei PeAtw-N .1 .4:1WCS\i/lka irs 13;114' # -7 IA 1 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' PROPOSALS Each Proposal shall be legibly written or printed in ink on the form provided in this bound copy of proposed contract documents. Alterations in the Proposal by interlineation, by interpolation, or otherwise, will not be acceptable. Alteration of the bid by erasure must be signed or initialed by the bidder; if initialed, the City may require the bidder to identify any alteration so • initialed. No alteration in any Proposal shall be made after the Proposal has been submitted. The bidder must bid on each item. If an item is bid at no cost, the words, "No Charge"shall be written 1 in the appropriate space. All addenda to the contract documents shall be acknowledged in the Proposal, properly signed by the bidder and attached to the Proposal when submitted. Each Proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope or wrapping, addressed to the "City Council, City ofOmah Nebraska"and identified on the outside with the words "Proposal for the Construc- tion of .SF q'1- Zo the bidder's name and the bidder's address; and filed with the City Clerk at the Office of Mary Galligan Cornett, L/C 1 , Omaha/Douglas Civic Center 68183. Proposals must be based upon the Plans and Specifications for the work bid upon as prepared by the City Engineer and filed in his office. Bidders should familiarize themselves with the work herein contemplated by personally visiting the location of the work, in order that the true spirit and intent of the Plans and Specifications may be fulfilled. No bidder may submit more than one Proposal, multiple Proposals under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE Each Proposal shall be accompanied by a cashier's check, a certified check, United States Government Bond (negotiable), or a bidder's bond, for five (5) percent of the total amount bid, but in no case be less than One Hundred Dollars ($100.00). The Proposal Guarantee shall be made payable without condition to the City of Omaha, Nebraska, hereinafter referred to as City.The Proposal Guarantee may be retained by and shall be forfeited to the City as liquidated damages if the Proposal is accepted and a contract based thereon is awarded and the bidder should fail to enter into a contract in the form prescribed, with legally responsible sureties, within ten (10) days after such award is made by the City. NB-la 9/86 1 ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION OF BIDS Bids will be compared on the basis of unit bid prices and the schedule of prices on file in the Office of the City Engineer. The lowest bid will be deter- mined on the basis of the total cost. The City reserves the right to accept the lowest base bid;to consider deductive alternatives;to reject any or all bids; and to waive irregularities or informalities in any bid. Bids received after the specified time of closing will be returned unopened.** AWARD OF CONTRACT The City Council will award the contract as early as practicable after the tabulation of said bids to the lowest responsible bidder, whereupon all other bids will stand rejected, and the Proposal Guarantee of all bidders not successful will be returned. The Proposal Guarantee of the successful bidder will be returned upon approval of the contract and bond by the City Council. SIGNATURE OF BIDDER Each bidder shall sign his Proposal using his usual signature and giving his full business address. Bids by partnerships shall be signed with the partnership name followed by 111 the signature and designation of one of the partners or other authorized representative. Bids by corporations shall be signed with the name of the corporation followed by the signature and desig- nation of the president, secretary or other person authorized to bind the corporation. Anyone signing a Proposal as agent for another, or otherwise, must file with the Proposal, evidence acceptable to the City of his authority to do so. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS If any person who contemplates submitting a bid is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the plans, specifications or other proposed contract documerrts, he may submit to the City Engineer a written request for an interpretation thereof. The person submitting the request shall be responsible for its prompt delivery. Interpreta- tion of the proposed contract documents will be made only by addendum. A copy of each adden- dum will be mailed or delivered to each person obtaining a set of contract documents from the City Enginr. The City will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed contract documents. LOCAL CONDITIONS AFFECTING WORK Each bidder shall visit the site of the work and shall completely inform himself relative to construction hazards and procedure, labor and all other con- ditions and factors, local and otherwise, which would affect prosecution and completion of the work and its cost.Such considerations shall include the arrangement and condition of existing struc- tures and facilities, the availability and cost of labor, and facilities for transportation, handling and storage of materia€s and equipment. All such factors shall be properly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bidder's proposal. There will be no subsequent financial adjustment for lack of such prior information. TIME OF COMPLETION The time of completion is an essential part of the contract and it will be necessary for each bidder to satisfy the City of his ability to complete the work within the allow- able time set forth in the Proposal. In this connection, attention is directed to the Special Provisions and the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 1989 Edition, of the City of Omaha relative to delays, extensions of time and liquidated damages. I 1 1 NB-2a 10/89 1 1 STATE SALES TAX The City of Omaha will furnish the successful contractor with a "Purchasing Agent Appointment and Exempt Sale Certificate" Form No. 92, for all items which are considered by the State of Nebraska to be exempt from the State Sales Tax. NEBRASKA LEGAL REQUIREMENTS Only the bids of contractors qualified to do business in the State of Nebraska will be considered; all as required by Nebraska State Statutes and amend- ments thereto. PERFORMANCE BOND The successful bidder shall furnish within ten (10) days after the award, a Contract and a Performance, Payment and Guarantee Bond on forms required by the City, in the full amount of the contract as security for the faithful performance of the contract and the pay- ment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection with the contract. This security shall also cover the guarantee required by the contract for the period of guarantee stated in the Proposal (See Section 103.05). SURETY The surety on the Contract and the Performance, Payment and Guarantee Bond shall be a duly authorized surety company, licensed to do business in the State of Nebraska, satisfactory to the City of Omaha. No surety company will be acceptable as bondsman that has no permanent agent or representative in the City of Omaha, Nebraska, upon whom notices may be served; service of said notice on said agent or representative in the City of Omaha shall be equal to service of notice on the president or such other officer of the surety company as may be concerned. Should the surety company acting as bondsman remove its permanent agent or representative from the City of Omaha, the contractor shall then furnish the City of Omaha with a new surety bond conforming to the above described requirements. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENT The Proposal or other bidding forms shall not be removed from the bound copy of contract documents. The copy of contract documents filed with each bid shall be complete and shall include all items listed in the Table of Contents and all addenda. COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Copies of the plans and specifications for use in preparing bids may be obtained from the Public Works Department, Room 631, Omaha/Douglas Civic Center 68183. The contractor to whom a contract is awarded will be furnished, without cost to him, seven (7) copies of the plans and specifications, together with all addenda thereto. Additional plans and specifications may be obtained from the City Engineer at cost. **THE CITY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ANY OR ALL BIDS IN THEIR ENTIRETY; BIDDERS HAVE THE RIGHT TO APPEAL ANY REJECTION DECISION TO THE CITY COUNCIL. I I I I NB-3 2-86 Ink PROPOSAL for Omaha,Nebraska s% &1. 1 ct �9 1 19_ 'Mayor and City Council City of Omaha Omaha, Nebraska The undersigned, having carefully examined the plans, specifications and all addenda thereto,and other contract documents,for the construction of \ctlt). Zi—L3a-kkontr ateM)14-1 k'7;rja‘ - — «� and having carefully examined the site of work and become familiar with all local conditions including labor affecting the cost thereof, do thereby propose to furnish all labor, mechanics, superintendence, tools, material, equipment and all utilities, transportation and services necessary to perform and complete said work, and work incidental thereto, in a workmanlike manner, as described in said plans, specifications and other contract documents, including Addenda Numbers 1 issued thereto for the base bid sum of • j. f�ods42 DOLLARS and /% CENTS (S / //7 The undersigned further certifies that he has personally inspected the actual location of the work, together with the local sources of supply, and that he understands the conditions under which the work is to be performed, or that if he has not so inspected the site and conditions of the work, that he waives all right to plead any misunderstanding regarding the work required or conditions peculiar to the same. The undersigned understands that the "QUANTITY" called for in the "SCHEDULE OF PRICES" is subject to increase or decrease, and hereby proposes to perform all quantities of work, as increased or decreased, in accordance with the plans and the provisions of the specifications at the unit price bid. • • The following is the itemized proposal: • • • P-1 2/72 SCHEDULE OF PRICES PROJECT: S.P. 97-20 DESCRIPTION: Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovations 13Th Street & Bert Murphy Drive Omaha, Nebraska 68107 Item Approx. Unit No. Description Quantity Price Amount A. Clubhouse and Restroom Construction 1. Architectural 1 LS '/41 oe e> 477613 emoe> 2. Mechanical 1 LS 34:2 71. ,ot> >,.976',00a 3. Electrical 1 LS '"5?3 i Total Bid (Items 1 through 3) Total Bid - Items 1 through 3 inclusive $ • :, nh�i�ilii i s Lu . OPENED BY CCCAMiTTEE AS FER OM 025445 Eteterr—' ^•.__._ ._ mien' NOV 1 91991 P-2 (1 of 1) 1 • • The City of Omaha will furnish the successful contractor with Form No. 92, PURCHASING AGENT APPOINTMENT AND EXEMPT SALE CERTIFICATE, for all material items required in the construction of this project, which the State of Nebraska considers to be exempt from the State Sales Tax. For each bid item, the bidder shall quote a TOTAL UNIT PRICE. The UNIT PRICE shall include all costs, including material, necessary to complete the UNIT item of work. Failure to quote a TOTAL UNIT PRICE may be cause for rejection of the proposal. In the event of discrepancy between the product of QUANTITY and TOTAL UNIT PRICE with the TOTAL PRICE quoted in the proposal, the product of the QUANTITY and the TOTAL UNIT PRICE shall control. The undersigned hereby agrees to furnish the required bonds and to sign the contract within ten (10) calendar days from and after the acceptance of this proposal, and further agrees to begin and complete all work covered by the plans and specifications within the time limits set forth herein. Accompanying this proposal, as a guaranty that the undersigned will execute the contract agree- ment and furnish a satisfactory bond in accordance with the terms and requirements of the specifi- cations, is a cashier's check, a certified check, United States Government Bond (negotiable) or a `...:� bidder's bond for S BIDDER BOND FOR 5% OF TOTAL AMOUNT OF BID It is hereby agreed that in case of failure of the undersigned either to execute the contract agree- ment or to furnish satisfactory contract bond within ten (10) days after receipt of NOTICE TO AWARD, the amount of this proposal guaranty will be retained by the City of Omaha, Nebraska, as liquidated damages arising out of the failure of the undersigned either to execute the contract agreement or to furnish bonds as proposed. It is understood that in case the undersigned is not awarded the work, the proposal guaranty will be returned as provided in the specifications. The undersigned agrees to accomplish the work i ' s entirety J' el .and shall be prepared to begin no later than 3 `I I— •.and to forfeit liquidated damages as set forth in Section 108.08 of thte Specifications in the event of over-run of time. The undersigned also agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish bonds as required by the specifi- cations for the faithful performance of the work and guarantee workmanship and material under Contract for a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance of the work. • • • P-3 1/82 If awarded the Contract, our Surety will be FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE CO. (name of Surety Company) of NOVATO, CA • Respectfully submitted, Signature of Bidder: • (a) If an individual doing business as: • • (b) If a Partnership: Member of Firm Member of Firm . (c) If a Corporation: HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Name of Corporation % 4ROff2i PRESIDENT Title • 19242.e. a eij-derl Business Address and Telephone No.: 2512 DEER PARK BLVD. OMAHA, NE 68105 402-342-1607 0,,toh� 1,0` FE °P2115E�0Goo yJ#!'t5445r. r.neflt N P-4 7/88 • "CERTIFICATE" A Corporate Contractor, in submitting this Proposal, hereby represents that the Corporation has complied with all Nebraska Statutory requirements, which are prerequisite to its being qualified to do business in the State of Nebraska, or that it will take all steps necessary to so qualify,if the successful bidder. • HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Name o Corporation i r FRED H W(KINS, JR. • PRESIDENT Title N/A If Foreign Corporation: Nebraska Resident Agent • p.5 2/72 r' • TO THE CITY OF OMAHA: CERTIFICATE Undersigned hereby certifies that all equipment to be used by undersigned in the performance of the contract pertaining to the project for: ' .?). -2.C.:) .►n / •=1&? AVI2f)%11 • -- and pursuant to Contract between undersigned and the City of Omaha has been assessed for taxation for the current year, except as to equipment acquired since the assessment date. Said equipment has been assessed in DOUGLAS County NEBRASKA . The Certificate above is submitted pursuant to the requirements of Section 77-1323, Reissue Revised Statutes of Nebraska, 1943, as amended. - The Contractor further certifies that all non-salvaged material removed • from the project will be disposed of at the following approved and permitted location(s): AN APPROVED LANDFILL ii- The City must be informed of any additions or changes in such location(s). HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY A CORPORATION i Contractor's. Name (Specify: Corporation, Partnership, or Individual) -By: f.,° it e, sp President 2 • "Partner; o Owner) F H HAWKINS JR. . RESID€NT Atte Se etary rporation ARRY B NCHI STATE OF NEBRASKA ) ss. COUNTY OF DOUGLAS ) • FRED H HAWKINS, JR. and HARRY BIANCHI being first duly sworn on oath, depose and say that they are President and Secretary, respectively, of HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY a CORPORATION ; that they have read the foregoing Certificate, - - know its contents, and the same are true. SUBSCRIBED and sworn to before me this 19TH ER A. D., 191L. day of OCTOB , a My Commission Expires 5-26-00 (?r'72Notary P c GENERAL ttOTARY-Stato of PtoSras w 02/91/53435 • JANE A.HOPPER , L. MyComm.Exp.May 26,MO I ICONTRACT I THIS CONTRACT is made and entered into in TRIPLICATE by and between the City of Omaha, a Municipal Corporation of the Metropolitan Class in Nebraska, hereinafter called City, and 1 i---LIWIAQS Z....c)ki Ihereinafter called Contractor. In consideration of the following mutual agreements and covenants, it is understood and agreed by I the Parties hereto that: 1. Contractor does hereby agree and undertake to construct I 0.e 9'1-- ` w 1 VIcl, '6 Z-Li_sa„3. 00---,m /.° 1-- -- ) .e,eT; --, V-410•1=4P4-71,04 lam" // ul n y- i . . also referred to hereinafter as work, in accordance with the terms and provisions hereof and subject to the quantity provisions in the accepted Proposal of Contractor for the sum of LjN).1 . /'i`.1(t_t OK) ONJE P tt te-ieO - —1' Iit. - pew " cs /1 ( I 1 000.aq under penalty of Performance, Payment and Guarantee Bond. 2. Contractor shall conform with the applicable Plans and Specifications,applicable Special Provisions and any applicable Change Order or Addenda pertaining thereto or to this Contract, all of which by reference thereto are made a part hereof. Applicable Notice to Bidders, Instruction to 1 Bidders, Bid or Proposal of Contractor, Resolution awarding this Contract, the Performance, Payment and Guarantee Bond, and all proceedings by the governing body of the City relating to the aforesaid work are made a part hereof by reference thereto. I 3. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, labor, mechanics for labor, equipment and materials to construct said work in accordance with the provisions of this Contract and all applicable Plans, Specifications and Provisions herein referred to. 111 4. The City agrees to pay the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the Plans and Specifications, the accepted Proposal of the Contractor, and the Provisions of this Contract. I 5. All provisions of each document and item referred to in Paragraph 2 above shall be strictly complied with the same as if rewritten herein, and no substitution or change shall be made except upon written direction, the form of which shall be by written "Change Order" of the City; and substitution or change shall in no manner be construed to release either party from any I specified or implied obligation of this Contract except as specifically provided for in the Change order. C-1 1/82 I I 6. Contractor does hereby state, warrant and covenant that he or it has not retained or employed any company, or person, other than bona fide employees working for said Contractor to solicit or secure this Contract, and that he or it has not paid or agreed to pay any company or person, other than bona fide employees working solely for the Contractor, any fee commission, percentage, brokerage fee, gifts, or any other consideration, contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Contract. For breach or violation of this statement, warrant and covenant, the City of Omaha shall have the right to annul this Contract without liability. 7. Contractor shall conform with all applicable City Ordinances, with all applicable State and Federal Laws, and with all applicable Rules and Regulations. 8. Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the City of Omaha, its officers, employees, agents and representatives from all claims, suits or actions of every kind and character made upon or brought against the said City of Omaha, its officers, employees, agents and representatives for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any party or parties by or from the acts of the said Contractor or its servants, agents, representatives, and subcontractors, in doing the work herein contracted for, or by or in consequence 11 of any negligence in guarding the same or any improper material used in its construction, or by or on account of any act or omission of said Contractor or its servants, agents, representatives, and subcontractors, and also from all 1 claims of damage for infringement of any patent in fulfilling this Contract. 9. The Contractor shall carry public liability insurance to indemnify the public for injuries sustained by reason of carrying on the work. The coverage shall provide the following minimum limits: Bodily Injury $250,000 each person I1$500,000 each occurrence $500,000 aggregate products and completed operations Property Damage $100,000 each occurrence $250,000 aggregate; and shall name the City as additional insured with the Contractor. Attention is 111 ' drawn to the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 1989 Edition, for further details. 10. Contractor shall pay to the Unemployment Compensation Fund of the State of Nebraska, unemployment contributions and interest due under the laws of the State of Nebraska on wages paid to individuals employed in the performance of this Contract, and shall submit to the City of Omaha a written clearance from the Commissioner of Labor of the State of Nebraska certifying that all payment due of contributions and interest which may have arisen under this Contract have been paid by the Contractor, or his subcontractor, to the State of Nebraska Unemployment Compensation Fund. Payment of the final three percent (3%) of the 11 total amount of the Contract shall be withheld until this provision has been complied with as required by Section 48-657 R.R.S. 1943, as amended. 11. The Contractor shall not, in the performance of this Contract I/ discriminate or permit discrimination against any person because of race, sex, age, or political or religious opinions or affiliations or disability in violation of Federal or State Statutes or Local Ordinances and further the Contractor shall comply with City of Omaha Ordinance 28885 pertaining to Civil Rights and Human Relations. C-2 8/93 11 1 I 12. Contractor shall procure a policy, or policies, or insurance which shall guarantee pay- I ment of compensation according to the Workmen's Compensation Laws of Nebraska for all work- men injured in the scope of employment; and further agrees to keep said policy, or policies, in full force and effect throughout the terms of this Contract. In addition, all other insurance in any way required of Contractor shall be procured by the Contractor and kept in force by Contractor throughout the term of this Contract. Certificate or certificates of insurance, or copies of policies, if required by any Department of the City, shall be filed by the Contractor with the Public Works IDepartment of the City of Omaha. 13. Except as may otherwise be required by applicable law, payment of any balance due Contractor under this Contract shall be made by the City to the Contractor upon completion of IContractor's work and obligations in accordance with the Contract, upon acceptance thereof by the City, and upon submission of certificate by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11 above. No payment by City shall in any way constitute any waiver of any rights of City. 1 14. Pursuant to Section 8.05 of the Home Rule Charter of the City of Omaha, no elected official or any officer or employee of the City shall have a financial interest, direct or indirect, in any City contract. A violation of that section with the knowledge of the Contractor, in addition to Iconstituting employee malfeasance, shall be cause for the City to unilaterally terminate or void this Agreement. - 15. The parties hereto acknowledge that, as of the date of the execution of this Agreement, Section 10-142 of the Omaha Municipal Code provides as follows: Any amendment to contracts or purchases which taken alone increases the original bid price as awarded (a) by ten percent, if the original bid price is one hundred fifty thousand dollars (S150,000) or more, or (b)_by-seventy-five thousand dollars (S75,000) or more, shall be approved by the City Council in advance of the acceptance of any purchase in excess of.such limits or the authorization of any additional work in excess of such limits. However, neither contract nor purchase amendments will be split to avoid itadvance approval of the City Council. The originally approved scope and primary features of a contract or purchase will not be significantly revised as a result of amendments not approved in advance by the City Council. The provisions of this Section will be quoted in all future City contracts. Nothing in this Section is intended to alter the authority of the Mayor under Section 5.16 of the City Charter to approve immediate purchases. I ill I . I - I - - C-3 1/86 I • I Dated at Omaha, Nebraska this /c7 day of O. , 199e. ATTEST: C Y OF OMA, MUNICIPAL CORPORATION Ok.�7 � � By L / -��`--- it erk -Q►�.1��. Or in ce/Resolution No. 2—q-Passed on SEAL OF THE CITY OF OMAHA: t , 191 I HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY I Contractor • 2512 DEER PARK BLVD. Street Addresss OMAHA, NE 68105 ATTEST: City State Zip Code S etary of rporate) Contractor • HARRY AN FR . AWKINS, J . SECRE ARY)TREASURER CORPORATE SEAL: Title: PRESIDENT STIPULATIONS: CORPORATE CONTRACTOR: (1) Attach certified copy of resolution authorizing execution of this Contract;. (2) Submit certificate showing corporation is qual- ified to do business in Nebraska. NON-CORPORATE CONTRACTOR: State Identity: Sole Owner(s);Partnership. If a Partnership, state names and addresses of all partners and a "general partner" must execute. I I C-4 1/86 ' PERFOR MANCE,PAYMENT AND GUARANTEE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 1 hereinafter called Principal,and FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound to the City of Omaha and hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, executors, administrators, personal representative, successors, and assigns to the City of Omaha, a Municipal Corporation of the Metropolitan Class in the State of Nebraska, hereinafter called City, in the penal sum of ' ONE MILLION ONE HUNDRED EIGHTEEN THOUSAND & NO/100 Dollars (S 1,118,000.00 )lawful money of the United States of America,to be paid to ' the City for the payment whereof the Principal and Surety hold themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, personal representatives, successors and assigns .jointly and ' severally by these presents. ' WHEREAS, The Principal is about to enter, or has entered, into a written Contract with the City for the construction by the Principal of c30.uwx • cB V i also referred to as Project No. 2r CH' , which Contract is made a part hereof by reference thereto the same as though fully set forth herein; ' NOW,THEREFORE,the conditions of this obligation are such that: FIRST: If the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract on his or its part, shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred for the same, shall fully indemnify and save ' harmless the City from all cost and damage which said City may suffer by reason of failure so to do,and shall fully reinburse and repay said City all outlay and expense which said Citymayincur in makinggood anysuch default; and, ' B-1 4/73 1 I SECOND: The Principal shall indemnify and save harmless the City of Omaha, its 1 officers, employees, and agents from all claims, suits, or actions of every kind and character made upon or brought against the said City of Omaha, its officers, employees I and agents, for or on account of any injuries and damages received or sustained by any party or parties by or from the acts or omissions of the said Contractor or his or its I servants, agents, and subcontractors, in performing under said Contract, or by or in consequence, or by or on account of any act or omission of said Contractor or his or its servants, agents, and subcontractors, and also from all claims of damage for infringement of any patent in fulfilling said Contract;and, THIRD: The Principal and Surety on this Bond hereby agree to pay all persons, I 1 firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal'or with subcontractors, all just claims due them for the payment of all laborers and mechanics for labor that shall 1 be performed, for the payment of all material and equipment furnished, and for the payment of material and equipment rental which is actually used or rented in the I performance of the Contract on account of which this Bond is given,when the same are . not satisfied out of the portion of the Contract Price which the City may retain until 1 completion of the construction;and, FOURTH: Principal and Surety are jointly and severally liable under the I provisions hereof and action against either or both may proceed without prior action against the other,and both may be joined in one action;and, • I FIFTH: Work constructed for the City of Omaha under the specifications of the Contract of which this is a part hereof, shall be guaranteed as hereinafter more 1 specifically set forth for the full number of years specified as set forth below. The term of guarantee shall be dated from the date of acceptance and as regards the respective projects shall be no less than the following: S a. Permanent Paving Projects 2 years I b. Sewer Projects 2 years c. Street Resurfacing Projects 2 years d. Seal Coating Application Projects 1 year e. Sidewalk Projects 2 years I f. Traffic Signals 2 years g. Bridges & Structures 2 years h. Seeding & Sodding 1 year I I B-2 9/83 1 IThe Principal hereby binds himself and his heirs and assigns for the entire expense of the guarantee and for all repairs or reconstruction which may, from any imperfection 1 in the said work or material, become necessary within the term of guarantee. The Principal further agrees to correct and repair promptly during that time all failures of whatsoever description and all settlements and irregularities of trenches, sidewalks, I paving, other surfacing, sewers, drains or other structures caused by any imperf ection in Ihis workmanship or material and shall deliver the work in all respects in good condition at the end of that time; I If, at any time within the period of guarantee after the completion and acceptance of the work contract for, the work shall, in the judgment of the Engineer, require such repairs of reconstruction as above set out, he shall notify the Principal by I. certified mail and, should-the Principal refuse or neglect to begin to make such repairs a within twenty (20) days from the date of the service of such notice, then the City Engineer shall have the right to cause such repairs or reconstruction to be made in such manner as lie_shall deem best; and the cost thereof shall be paid by the Principal or his sureties; • this` obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force • IThen and effect. Any Surety on this Bond shall be deemed and held, any Contract to the contrary notwithstanding,to consent without notice; 1. To any extension of time to the Principal in which to perform the I Contract. 2. To,any change in the Plans, Specifications or Contract,when such change does:not involve an increase of more than twenty percent (20%) of the I total Contract Price, and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this Bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than five years from time of acceptance of the work I the right to sue on this Bond for defects in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the obligee at the time such work was accepted. I I . I B-3 9/83 I I SIGNED AND SEALED THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER A.D., 19 97 IN PRESENCE OF: HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Principal „?i,er./ Name* JANE A HOPPE 12142 SANDRA LN. OMAHA, NE 68137 • Address ` Ti '. PR IDENT COUNTERSIGNED: (Attach Corporate Resolution of Principal Authorizing Execution) Re Harry D. I FIREMAN''S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY Surety HARRY A. KOCH CO. 111 Company Name 2121 S 44TH ST. Address By �Aome act)* Harry Koch OMAHA NE 68105 City State Zip APPROVED AS TO FORM: I *Instruction: Type names of persons under signature of each. yy Attorney 1 i B-4 4/73 111 NEBRASKA STATUTORY RIDER The State of Nebraska Code, Section 44-4040 requires the name of the soliciting agent and the name and address of the agency to be shown on each bond issued by a Nebraska Agent or for any bond issued to a Principal or Insured residing in Nebraska. This rider is to comply with the statutory requirements of the State of Nebraska. Name of Soliciting Agent: Harry D. Koch Name of Insurance Agency represented by the Soliciting Agent: Harry A. Koch Co. Address of Agency: 2121 So. 44th St. , Omaha, Ne. 68105 A copy of this rider should be attached to the original and all copies of any bond issued. ......... „ PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE The Harry A. Koch Co. DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE P.O. Box 6215 POLICIES BELOW, Omaha NE 68106-0215 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A TRAVELERS PROPERTY CASUALTY INSURED COMPANY Hawkins Construction Co. COMPANY 2512 Deer Park Blvd. . P.O. Box 9008 Station C COMPANY Omaha NE 68109 ....... ................ 064iiiibmibmgegmimmummomummgmmomaammaugumummomumemmummaRmummumaau THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED,NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO POLICY EFT. POLICY EXP. LIMITS TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER LTR DATE(MM/DD/YY) DATE(MM/DD/YY) GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE 2000000 A ),L.COMM.GENERAL LIABILTTY 346J806-5 9/01/97 9/01/98 PROD-COMP/OP AGG. 2000000 1 CLMMS MADE 1=I OCCUR PERS.&ADV.INJURY 1000000 OWNER'S&CONTRACT'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE 1000000 FIRE DAM AC E(One Flre) 1(10000 MED EXP(Any one person) 5000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE A X ANY AUTO 346J807-7 9/01/97 9/01/98 LIMIT 1000000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT AGGREGATE EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE 5000000 A lUMBIFIELLA FORM 346J809-0 9/01/97 9/01/98 AGGREGATE 5000000 OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORICERS COMPENSATION AND 'STATUTORY LIMITS EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY A 102L4910 9/01/97 9/01/98 EACH ACCIDENT 500000 PROLRZOcEtirr R INCL DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT 500000 OFFICERS ARE: EXCL DISEASE-EACH EMPL. 500000 OTHER A 140D810-2 9/01/97 9/01/98 BLDRS R\ISK $10,000,000 JOB SITE $2,500 DEDUCT. $500,000 TEMP STORITRAN DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE: ROSENBLATT STADIUM PROJECT#97-20- 1998 CLUBHOUSE/RESTROOM RENOVATIONS CITY OF OMAHA IS ADDED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED WITH REGARDS TO LIABILITY FOR THIS PROJECT SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE TIIE CITY OF OMAHA EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR DOUGLAS CIVIC CENTER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY,ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OMAHA, NE 68102 e_ThIL •COMMERCIAL 7 •INDUSTRIAL _' •TRANSPORTATION DECEMBER 12, 1997 i'W �%V •UTILITIES CONSTRUCTIONOMPANY AS SECRETARY, I CERTIFY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY ON DECEMBER 1, 1997, AUTHORIZED FRED H HAWKINS, JR. AS PRESIDENT TO EXECUTE THE CONTRACT AND OTHER RELATED LEGAL DOCUMENTS FOR PROJECT Sc"P. 97-20 BEING ROSENBLATT STADIUM, PROJECT 1998 CLUBHOUSE/RESTROOM RENOVATIONS WITH THE CITY OF OMAHA. HARRY BI CH SECRETARY/TREASURER 46/-2 2512 DEER PARK BOULEVARD MAILING ADDRESS: 41CL, OMAHA,NEBRASKA P.O.BOX 9008,STATION C � ` 110 ,1 6 ,1 (402)342-1607 OMAHA,NEBRASKA 68109 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER FAX(402)342-3221 STATE OF ;,, NEBRASKA `ii/�rll��i.__Ur_`_ if kt.4404, 1 i ii—li'''' i :0 413111*, a. , k `. -I ra, .4-1'.• t United States of America v - -' Department of State State of Nebraska } �' �rr1i��UJrr[f�,i t Lincoln, Nebraska I, Scott Moore, Secretary of State of the State of Nebraska do hereby certify; HAWKINS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY was duly incorporated under the laws of this state on August 31, 1960, and do further certify that no occupation taxes assessed are unpaid and no annual reports are delinquent; articles of dissolution have not been filed; and said corporation is in existence as of the date of this certificate. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the Great Seal of the State of Nebraska on December 15 in the year of our Lord, one thousand "��,_ ` -, nine hundred and ninety-seven. .01E STD ��, II Li 0 H• air fh' -11"-- :? % SECRETARY OF STATE GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY FTREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY,a Corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California,and having its principal office in the County of Mann,State of California,has made,constituted and appointed,and does by these presents make,constitute and appoint &.9RRY A. KOCH, JR. , DOUGLAS G. DURBIN, HARRY D. KOCH, PEGGY SAPIENZA, STEPHANIE SCHROEDER and DAVID G. JESSE, jointly or severally OMAHA N- its true and with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,place and stead,to execute,seal,acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds,undertaking,recognizances or other written obligations in the nature thereof and to bind the Corporation thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the Corporation and duly attested by its Secretary,hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. This power of attorney is granted pursuant to Article VII,Sections 45 and 46 of By-laws of FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY now in full force and effect. "Article YII.Appointment and Authority of Resident Secretaries,Attorney-in-Fact and Agents to accept Legal Process and Make Appearances. Section 45.Appointment.The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President, any Vice-President or any other person authorized by the Board of Directors,the Chairman of the Board of Directors,the President or any Vice-President may,from time to time, appoint Resident Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Corporation and Agents to accept legal process and make appearances for and on behalf of the Corporation. Section 46.Authority.The authority of such Resident Assistant Secretaries.Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents shall be as prescribed in the instrument evidencing their appointment.Any such appointment and all authority granted thereby may be revoked at any time by the Board of Directors or by any person empowered to make such appointment." This power of attorney is signed and sealed under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 7th day of August,1984,and said Resolution has not been amended or repealed: "RESOLVED, that the signature of any Vice-President, Assistant Secretary, and Resident Assistant Secretary of this Corporation. and the seal of this Corporation may be affixed or printed on any power of attorney,on any revocation of any power of attorney,or on any certificate relating thereto,by facsimile. and any power of attorney,any revocation of any power of attorney,or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Corporation:" IN WITNESS WHEREOF,FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice-President,and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed this 3rd day of May . 19 94 -.t.'" .'c. FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY ''.Y '-'i-Coil'' By VitrPtesideat STATE OF CALIFORNIA ss. COUNTY OF MARIN 3rd May 94 M.A. Mallonee On this day of . 19 ,before me personally came to me known,who,being by me duly sworn,did depose and say:that he is Vice-President of FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY,the Corporation described in and which executed the above instrument;that he knows the seal of said Corporation:that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal;that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. IN WITNESS WHEREOF.I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal,the day and year herein first above written. OFFICIAL NOTARY SEAL t } A.KRIEGEA ( a► -e Notary Public—California A;(---Q-"4"t)Notarf Public i\-, "is, ' MARIN COUNTY My Comm.Exp. MAR 20.1995 CERTIFICATE STATE OF CALIFORNIA ss. COUNTY OF fvtARIN • I.the undersigned,Resident Assistant Secretary of FIREMAN'S FUND INSURANCE COMPANY,a CALIFORNIA Corporation.DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked;and furthermore that Article VII.Sections 45 and 46 of the By-laws of the Corporation,and the Resolution of the Board of Directors;set forth in the Power of Attorney,are now in force. Signed and sealed at the County of Mann.Dated the 11 th day of December . 1997 fi s�,`'� Cr,j ;. fir + ' , r .-.45 ' Resident Asuu sat Seeetary r0 i I DOCUMENT 00250 PRE-BID MEETING 1. GENERAL 1.1 PRE-BID MEETING A. A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held at 10:00 a. m. local time on the 12th day of November, 1997, at the site (Meet at the west side main entrance gate) Space will be open from 10:00 a.m. to 12:00 a.m. for contractor site visits to familiarize themselves with existing conditions that affect the work. Attendance is strongly suggested by all General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, and Electrical Contractor bidders. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 I 1 111 10-27-97 00250-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD 1 f ENT 0 1 GEOTECHNICADOCUM 0L DATA i 1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Subsurface soil investigations have been made at the project site,the results of which are to be found in the reports prepared by Thompson, Dreessen & Domer, Inc., No. 445-122.2 dated March 28, 1995, and No. 445-129.2 dated October 22, 1997, and by Nebraska Testing Corporation, Reports No. NTC 6200-91-150, NTC 6200-87-535, NTC 6200-87-535 Supplement, dated January 11, 1991, July 15, 1987, and September 2, 1987, respectively. A copy of the TD2 file No. 445-129.1 Proposed Clubhouse Improvements Report dated October 22, 1997 is included for information purposes only in this project manual. A copy of the other reports may be examined at the City of Omaha and the Architect/Engineer's office. The information was I obtained for use in preparing the foundation design; however, it is also made available for the general information of the bidders. B. Bidders are urged to examine soils investigation data and to make their own investigation of the site before bidding. C. Interpretation 1. Soil investigation data is provided only for information and convenience of bidders. The Owner and Architect and Engineer disclaim any responsibility for accuracy, true location and extent of soils investigation that has been prepared by Others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that data by bidders; as in projecting soil-bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability, and presence, level and extent of underground water. Soil investigation data are not part of the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION I I I I 1 II 0-30-97 00320-1 BV8H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD 1 • 1 • 1 111 REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION ROSENBLATT STADIUM PROPOSED CLUBHOUSE IMPROVEMENTS 13TH STREET AND BERT MURPHY BLVD. OMAHA, NEBRASKA . t v • OCTOBER 22, . 1997 • I I 1 TD2 File No. 445-129.2 THOMPSON, DREESSEN & DORNER, INC. Consulting Engineers & Land Surveyors 10836 OLD MILL ROAD,OMAHA,NEBRASKA(402) 330-8860 1 I:1)2 THOMPSON, DREESSEN & DORNER, INC. Consulting Engineers & Land Surveyors ROBERT E.DREESSEN.P.E. WILLIAM P.DORNER L.S. October 22, 1997 NELSON J.HYMANS.P.E. JAMES D.WARNER L.S. CHARLES E.RIGGS.P.E. KA"KIP"P.SQUIRE III.P.E. JOHN M.KOTTMANN.P.E. ARTHUR D.BECCARD.P.E. Mr. Gregory A. Peterson JOSEPH G.KOSINOVSKY.P.E. Assistant Plannin Director DOUGLAS S.DREESSEN.P.E. g BRADLEY K.BLAKEMAN.P.E. City of Omaha, Planning Department RICHA AN ARD M BROYLES.L.S. Omaha/Douglas Civic Center, Room 1110 DAVID H.NEEF.L.S. ROBERT E.NOVOTNY.P.E. 1819 Famam Street RONALD M.KOENIG.L.S. Omaha, NE 68183 CCHRIE D.BELONGIA.RIS E.DORNER L.S.E LORAS A.KLOSTERMANN.P.E. _ RE: Report of Geotechnical Exploration Rosenblatt Stadium Clubhouse Improvements Omaha, Nebraska TD2 File No. 445-129.1 Dear Mr. Peterson: Thompson, Dreessen& Domer, Inc. has conducted a subsurface exploration program, reviewed previous soil data from past stadium projects, and prepared foundation recommendations for the referenced project. We are forwarding three copies of this Report to you in addition to the copies listed below. This work was performed in accordance with your authorization. I The opinions expressed in this Report are based upon our understanding of the proposed project and the data obtained from our subsurface exploration. Should there be any changes as the project develops, we should be requested to review such new conditions. IThank you for this opportunity to work with you on this project. Should you have any questions, please contact us. Sincerely, THOMPSON, DREESSEN & DORNER, INC.guVL4 . 41J:=L-- Loras A. Klostermann, P.E. Geotechnical Engineer LAK:mc Copies to: (1) Mr. Michael W. Shelton, HNTB Corp. (1) Mr. Mike Daily, BVH, Lincoln (2) Mr. Tony Hazuka, BVH, Omaha 10836 OLD MILL ROAD • OMAHA, NEBRASKA 68154-2685 • 402-330-8860 • FAX 402-330-5866 I i 1 1 I I EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Proposed renovation of the Rosenblatt Stadium clubhouses will include the expansion of both clubhouses into unexcavated area below the existing structure. This exploration was done ' to determine the locations of existing footings and structural members and to confirm the near surface soil conditions in the area of proposed expansion. Locations and sizes of the structural and footing members are provided in the Appendix with the results of an unconsolidated undrained triaxial compression test completed from samples of soil retrieved from the proposed home clubhouse expansion area. Soil parameters are provided for design of new foundations and soil retaining walls. I . 1 TD2 File No. 445-129.2 1 . I REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION ' ROSENBLATT STADIUM PROPOSED CLUBHOUSE IMPROVEMENTS 13TH STREET AND BERT MURPHY BLVD. OMAHA, NEBRASKA OCTOBER 22, 1997 TD2 FILE NO. 445-129.2 1 Table of Contents Page No. 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Project Information 1 1.2 Scope of Service 1 2.0 EXPLORATION RESULTS 2 2.1 Scope of Exploration 2 2.2 Groundwater Data 2 3.0 ENGINEERING RECOMMENDATIONS 3 3.1 Project Data 3 3.2 Existing Foundation Data 3 3.3 Discussion 4 3.4 Site Excavation 5 3.5 Fill-Related Settlement 6 3.6 Shallow Building Foundation Recommendations 6 3.7 Grade-Supported Floor Slabs 8 3.8 Fill Requirements 9 3.9 Additional Items 9 4.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 10 5.0 OBSERVATION AND TESTING 10 6.0 STANDARD OF CARE 11 APPENDIX • i 1 1 I REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION ROSENBLATT STADIUM PROPOSED CLUBHOUSE IMPROVEMENTS 13TH STREET AND BERT MURPHY BLVD. OMAHA, NEBRASKA OCTOBER 22, 1997 TD2 FILE NO. 445-129.2 1.0 INTRODUCTION i 1.1 Project Information ' This Report summarizes recommendations for foundation and wall design required to complete the proposed improvements to the clubhouses at Rosenblatt stadium. Data from previous subsoil explorations was used in conjunction with data from hand samples obtained at this time. This work was authorized by Mr. Gregory A. Peterson, Assistant Planning Director ' for the Omaha City Planning Department, on October 3, 1997. 1.2 Scope of Service The scope of service for this subsoil exploration was limited to: 1. Excavate in the vicinity of existing footings to determine their size and location at the next bay towards the center of the stadium from both the home and visitors clubhouses; 2. Perform any additional soil tests to assist in the design of new foundations and soil retaining walls; and 3. Analyze results of laboratory testing from new soil samples and previous soil borings to determine site and foundation-related recommendations with regard to: a. general discussion of existing conditions and their impact on the proposed construction; b. allowable bearing pressure and recommended footing placement; c. requirements of fill materials and compaction of fill materials beneath construction areas; 1 1 I d. densification of subgrade, if required; e. recommendations for soil retaining design desi n and construction; and f. groundwater and surface water considerations. 2.0 EXPLORATION RESULTS 2.1 Scope of Exploration Shelby tube samples were retrieved from below the stadium using 3" diameter thin-walled 1 tubes between the footings at the home clubhouse addition area. We attempted to use a jack to advance the tubes into the natural loess below the fill that wasplaced over the existingseating g supports, but jacking was not successful. The tubes were then driven into the soil with a large mallet. The hammer action caused the soils to become disturbed in several of the shelby tubes. Sampling had to be done twice in order to obtain three relatively undisturbed samples for unconsolidated, unchained triaxial compression testing. i The results of the single triaxial test and test data from previous explorations was used to determine soil-related design parameters. 2.2 Groundwater Data 1 Groundwater levels should be expected to fluctuate seasonally and yearly from groundwater readings noted. The soils below the stadium changed from wet alongthe front wall g to rather dry along the concourse wall. No groundwater level was noted. However, water !, condensation was noted at the base of seat support plating at that portion of the area nearest to the field. • 1 TD2 File No. 445-129.2 Page 2 1 I 3.0 ENGINEERING RECOMMENDATIONS 3.1 Project Data The engineering recommendations made in this Report are based on our understanding g P rof the project as discussed in the following paragraphs. The recommendations are valid for a specific set of project conditions. If the characteristics of the project should change from those indicated in this Section, it is important that we be informed so that we can determine whether I the new conditions affect our recommendations. The home and visitor clubhouses exist within the hollow area beneath the yellow and blue seating section, between the field and the concourse u b area. Proposed renovations include the reconstruction of the two clubhouses and the expansion of both clubhouses one bay towards the center of the stadium. Much of the proposed renovations do not change any footing or other structural components of the stadium. However, the proposed expansions will require that soil retaining walls be extended. Also, we know that the footings below the support columns and 1 concrete pedestals that support the stadium seating and the clubhouse exist at elevations higher than the finished clubhouse floor elevation, and will need to be replaced at lower elevations. Axial loads will not be changed on the columns or pedestals. I understand that the home clubhouse has a finished floor level elevation of 172.51' and the visitor clubhouse has a finished ' floor level elevation of 172.45'. 0 3.2 Existing Foundation Data ' We attempted to expose the footings at the next bay towards the center of the stadium at both the home and visitor clubhouses. Observations of the site conditions and of a picture ' taken during construction and dated August, 1997, provide some indication of the procedure TDB File No. 445-129.2 Page 3 r I used during the foundation construction. It appears that the foundations, pedestals and lateral support beams were installed in the area between the field and the concourse prior to the PP construction of support members in the concourse area. I estimate that the footings were placed a consistent level below natural grade. Soil fill was then pushed into this area below the future 111 seats toprovide additional foundation cover and to place soil to the base of the concourse wall prior to construction in the concourse area. I estimate that footing excavation levels were i dependent upon the natural grade prior to filling of the concourse level and this may be the reason that the footing levels vary across the site. Our current exploration data indicate that the top of footing levels vary from about 1.5' to greater than 10' below existing soil grade below the seating area. Measured foundations support dimensions and footing depths are provided on the sketches enclosed in the Appendix. We attempted to excavate the footing area to determine the foundation depth at each support, 1 but were able to obtain complete data at only 5 of the 8 footings. III 3.3 Discussion Soil conditions vary below the seats of the stadium. Near the concourse, the soils consist 1 of a hard, dry crust of soil over some dry dusty soil, with moist loess below. Near the field, the soil exists in a moist to very moist condition. Water condensation was observed on the metal plating of the seating area between the first and second foundation lines nearest the playing field. , After two sampling attempts, sufficient undisturbed sample was obtained from natural soils near the home clubhouse to perform an undrained, unconsolidated triaxial compression test. The test data report is enclosed in the Appendix. The data indicate an angle of internal friction 1 of 13.1 degrees and a cohesion of 1,080 psf (7.5 psi) for the moist Peoria loess soils exposed 1 TV File No. 445-129.2 Page 4 1 I I near the center of the exploration area at the home clubhouse. Moisture contents varied from I12% to 16% and dry density varied from 80 to 87 pcf. These values are consistent with the Iboring sample data obtained previously outside the stadium. Observations of the soil indicate that the strength of near surface soils is consistent near both the home and visitor clubhouses. 1 Most of the structure appears to have soil within a few feet below the steel seating 1 supports. No large excavations were found near the visitor clubhouse. However, a large excavation exists along the south wall of the home clubhouse. This excavation is about 2' to 3' I deep and is parallel to the south wall of the home clubhouse. It has allowed soil to fall from Ibelow the concourse area at this corner of the clubhouse. 3.4 Site Excavation ISoil will need to be excavated from the adjacent bay adjoining both clubhouses to allow Ithe expansions to be done. Excavation depth will vary from about 4' at the field wall to about 18' at the concourse. Soil excavation will expose the existing footings. Measurements of the III footing depths indicate that the tops of the footings exist at elevations of 177' or less. Considering an estimated footing thickness of 1', the excavations are estimated to extend up to 4' below the existing footings. IThe only footing that we do not have any information on and which may exist at a 1 shallower depth than elevation 177' is the concourse footing (south footing) near the visitors clubhouse. The excavation of this footing will need to proceed with caution, since the footing I level might be higher than observed at the home clubhouse side. g g IAvailable data indicates that vast majority of the soil excavation can be completed without effecting the support of the adjoining seat support footings. Although the soils will stay on a ITD2 File No. 445-129.2 Page 5 I r 1 vertical face up to several feet high without caving for a short period of time, we do not recommend that deep vertical cuts be made without suitable side slopes or sheeting to support the vertical slopes. We estimate that sloping the long retaining wall side of the excavation will 111 be possible, with soil replaced behind the retaining wall after the wall is built. However, sloping of the excavation will not be possible for the short extension of the tall retaining wall along the concourse area. Sheeting or soil nailing is recommended along these tall wall sections ' to temporarily support the soils until the final soil retaining wall can be installed. 3.5 Fill-Related Settlement We understand that no fills above existing grades will be placed for this work. I 3.6 Shallow Building Foundation Recommendations 3.6.1 Footing Depth, Frost Considerations. Exterior footings and interior footings not heated on all sides should be placed at a depth of at least 42" below the lowest adjacent I unheated grade to inhibit damage from frost action. All interior footings within this structure should be considered unheated. 3.6.2 Allowable Bearing Pressure. If the recommendations of this Report are followed, a net allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf may be used in the design of footings bearing upon natural soils at a depth of 3.5' below finished floor grade. If a greater net 111 allowable bearing pressure is required, a net allowable soil pressure of 3,500 psf is available at a depth of 5' below the floor slab. A factor of safety of 3 against general shear failure was utilized when calculating the soil bearing pressure. 3.6.3 Lateral Earth Pressure. The soil retaining wall will support lateral earth pressures. An unbalanced soil height of up to 9' is estimated. Footings supporting lateral loads TD2 File No. 445-129.2 Page 6 1 I i must be poured in firm contact with the sides of the footing excavation. No forms should be used on the sides of these footings. The following lateral earth pressures, expressed as Iequivalent fluid pressures, are recommended in design of soil retaining walls at this site assuming retained earth heights of no more than 9': Passive Resistance 1.59(7,,,)d + 3,425 pcf Active Pressure 35 pcf ' At-Rest Pressure 50 pcf where'yn, is the moist soil unit weight and "d" is the depth embedment. A moist soil unit weight of 114 pcf is recommended in the equation. ' Please note that any loads placed upon the soils above a retaining wall will produce an additional lateral load against the wall. We recommend the use of a lateral load coefficient of ' not less than 0.3 be used to determine the added lateral pressure from loads placed upon the soil above a soil retaining wall. These values do not include water loads. Proper drainage of rainfall must be provided. Maintenance of the seat support plating will keep rainfall from the site. No groundwater level has been found to exist within the limits of proposed construction. ' 3.6.4 Excavation Stability. The near surface site soils consist of silty clay deposits. No special difficulties are anticipated concerning excavation stability at this site. Water infiltration into soil backfill may decrease adjoining excavation stability. Deep excavations, ' more than 4' deep in all soils, will need to be shored, or the sides of the excavation should be sloped. ' In any case, conform to the regulations provided by the U.S. Government and OSHA Iconcerning excavation safety. We estimate that the prepared site soils may classify as Type B with some disturbed surface soil areas of Type C, per 29 CFR Part 1926, Occupational Safety TD2 File No. 445-129.2 Page 7 1 and Health Standards - Excavations. The actual soil condition should be determined by a qualified geotechnical professional in the field during site excavation. 3.6.5 Foundation Settlements. Foundation settlements of only very small values are expected to occur due to the reconstruction of the seating support footings if the new footings are designed with use of the parameters provided. Care must be taken to support the beam system during footing replacement so that the concrete members are not displaced. Temporary ' supports are recommended. 3.7 Grade-Supported Floor Slabs All new fill and at least the top 12" of soil beneath grade-supported floor slabs should I be mechanically densified to at least 98% of the maximum dry density of the soil, as determined by ASTM D-698, standard Proctor test. The moisture content of clay and silt soil being compacted should be within +3% and -3% of the optimum moisture content, also determined I by ASTM D-698. We suggest that final subgrade compaction be completed immediately prior to concrete I placement. Weather and construction traffic can loosen soils; any subgrade that is damaged prior to placing concrete or pavement should be reconditioned through scarification and moisture content manipulation prior to being recompacted. Control of the moisture content of clayey or silty soil being compacted for subgrades is very important in order to reduce the potential for floor slab cracking. Pavement and floor subgrades should be compacted at a moisture content within +3% and -3% of the optimum moisture content. Although it is sometimes possible to achieve the recommended soil density I when compaction is performed at moisture contents outside of the recommended moisture TV File No. 445-129.2 Page 8 1 1 content range, the stability of the subgrade will be significantly less if the soil is compacted too ' wet or too dr y, resulting in uncontrolled cracking. ' We estimate that floor slabs supported on soil that is uniformly compacted in this manner and subjected to loads up to 100 psf, will settle less than 1/2". 3.8 Fill Requirements Material for use as site fill should be clean, inorganic, low-plasticity lean clay, silt, or a mixture of these materials. Fill soil should have a liquid limit less than 40%, a plasticity index less than 20%, and no more than 20% retained on the No. 200 sieve. We discourage the use of sand as a fill at this site except for special drainage layers. Cohesive fill soils should also be of proper moisture content, within +4% and -2% of optimum moisture, per ASTM D-698. ' All fill should be placed in nearlylevel lifts, not more than 8" loose thickness, after the ' moisture content has been manipulated to within the levels stated in the previous paragraph. Each lift must be compacted before additional soil is added. Structural fill below buildings and ' compacted to not less than 98% of the maximum drydensitydetermined floor slabs should be ' by ASTM D-698, standard Proctor test. 3.9 Additional Items The site soils have a high potential for heaving due to frost action. Depending on the ' moisture content, these soils can heave in excess of one inch during the winter season. Heaving can cause serious access problems at exterior doors. Appropriate measures should be taken to stabilize pavements and walks at doorways. The soils found at this site are typical of the area. Past experience indicates that corrosion potential of buried metallic pipes in these soils is minimal. Sulfate corrosion potential TD2 File No. 445-129.2 Page 9 1 I of Portland cement is also minimal, and Type I Portland cement is recommended for use. Exterior concrete should be air-entrained to reduce damage from frost action. , 4.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ' All excavation work should be completed in accordance with OSHA standards. Where 1 safe back-slopes cannot be provided, bracing designed by competent professionals should be 111 installed. We recommend that the geotechnical engineer review the method to be used by the contractor to provide temporary support of vertical cuts and be requested to observe all footing 1 excavations. 5.0 OBSERVATION AND TESTING Since a project of this nature requires many soil-related judgments and decisions, we recommend that TD2 be retained as part of the construction team. We strongly recommend that all footing excavations be visually inspected by the geotechnical engineer prior to placing I concrete. We also recommend that a limited number of compaction tests be performed to document the degree of compaction obtained in backfill and structural fill. We are equipped for and would be pleased to provide necessary testing of construction fills. t i i TV File No. 445-129.2 Page 10 I 1 7.0 STANDARD OF CARE This Report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client. The recommendations ' contained in this Report represent our professional opinions. These opinions were arrived at in ' accordance with currently accepted engineering procedures at this time and location. Other than this, no warranty, either expressed or implied, is intended. Prepared and submitted by: THOMPSON, DREESSEN & DORNER, INC. Loras A. Klosterman, P.E. ` ° '' Geotechnical Engineer ~ A (47 •' CJ ,'1 r�4',• oF '•r�r''.aa;bit'l 1 i 1 i TD2 File No. 445-129.2 Page 11 1 I 1 APPENDIX 1 1 1 1 t I / i I II I i N 7 I • • / I l J `� ! 0 ; v► PI I1 36 ! hi1i i I I 1.11 r fi 7 --- _11 1 l' 1 Q. N a Imo' , 4.2 111 I I ; ; o ! YzN �N ; ` N0/ - I ` N •s J I i Q i _O o ' 1 v0 -S'(1) 1 '*' d S I1 I cue } aI aLvf" o !1 !i i► � -� —I c 1 I • s 1 I r cz iT TI -) ' I �`' , < I � �9'OI I I li. !j 1. • ', � i � � 0 r+ i` I . I I . j 1 1 - I iStZ ; }_-it >j 1 I L s► _ , 1 r • . I . • I up 0 Q I . " -' z °- w �L u' v �0 O I 1 < I 1 `I I I- 2 0 ~ Q f0 I r _ . • W0 w w w i I i I j ---6 i 1 I 41 I i i N i i N i 1 i ! i �- i i i s _ , s N 1 i i I , d Iii It . . i i o45 1 i I �� - i r 1 i �1 IiI i _ j I `! J / � , L . i / i I i II i I I I I 6a I I n1 f A. If 1� ---.1 _ f 1 'ILL - I i 1 ,;4 'I L . i 1 , 17 'II g - -4 r — ! , i 1 - I I I 9 N ••A i '�' . t • 6 II I � I I I - �' �' � r I o _ _ I v I I� - o ' I . ,o i 1 ,I \P II - A I 4 1 ,-1/ Z I 'o 2 i O.- 1 / N i -Z.I i t o I I I II 1 � .. , I - i --,/ i' . 1 r / I . 402-475-0226 BAHR UERI9EER&HAECKER 268 PO4/06 OCT 13 '97 12:01 I C w I 0 Q U Z w - co '- U '' i .1 O O c < I U I 1 I . V) 0' I-- 0 rr' wU w w :Li w 1 1 I II ii , i I . / g) 1 1 1 —'d -t 1 I a. V' i j t N i I I = P I - 0 7 s i I i 3 o I 1 ( 0 V 1 III I I , I I -ae j I '$rii=i t _� ' _• • .• •. • I1 1 0: _J I y, a C'- a r _ I I z _ i j • L—.1 J I „/' I \f; } i �r I I ja 1 1 j • H • — j I II Post vlDt0.ti S4641.%J.1 1 t✓lu 6a0JsQ 9.[....oJo.4ao.s ::.; : Tt Z. A•I5-IZ9 I > �- ygg 25 _ -c= 7.5 psi +-I I _ I I 'Ig~r li - I... - . . . _ _ - .�= 13.1 deg I I L ^r 20 I I - ::w UU Strength -Pa-sametPlS (�__.__.__� I i . . _ 111 1 I( ' " tly.- :-. ..._ \..._ 1,-.-:.4 . . - i . - ---. -'.\ \\_ . . . . , i :...,-,;,..4 - . len ,,i-4 0 - ____ - _ - _ 4NR o s to 15 20 25 30 35 40 45. 50 I < ^C �-., Normal Stress,a,psi xr � ft 40.0 »C:C= 35•0 '�� Specimen No. 1-middle 2-bottom 2-middle =+aGG====10 P'i Water Content, % w, 12.0 16.3 15.3 IN � d 30A C�� -- '� .G»C_ To Dry Density, pcf yd. 80.2 87.4 80.4 - -aG--�----.15 ps, 'c Saturation, % So 29.3 47.0 37.3 -- :� _ 2s.o :C;.-C�- II ,; x --"' ND . - Void Ratio b 0 -,,•r� ' _ eo 1.117 0.941 1.111 c:,, : Water Content, % w, °'=a 15A .'---------ramemm E0 s pry Density, pcf yd. • iz B -----� m Saturation,% S.1 _Yy 0.0 r` ,. ===2C .;7.7 d0 Void Ratio ec `. s.o 'r ...- co Final Back Pressure, psi u, =- "�-GC.-; Minor Principal Stress, psi as 5 10 15 I -. 0.o Maximum Deviator Stress, psi (a,-as),,,= 21.9 32.7 26.0 0% 5% lox t5% 20% Time to(a,-ao),,,�, min. [t1 5 34 36 -_:::.~. Strom Ultimate Deviator Stress, psi J (a1-O )„k 20.3 32.5 26 I ''•" ' .: ::Y! ' Initial Diameter, in Do 2.85 2.87 2.85 f. Strain Controlled-UU Test Initial Height, in Ho 5.00 5.05 4.70 1 Description of Specimens Dark Gray Fat Clay,Trace Sand LL LPL PI G. Type of Specimen 3"Shelby Tube 'Type of Test Remarks: Project Rosenblatt Stadium,Thompson Dressen and Dorner P ;• Mohr Circle Drawn at Maximum Deviator Terracon Project No. 05975120 IStress or 15%Strain No, Sample No. u Depth/Elev. Feet Laboratory Omaha Date October 16. 1997 t= Triaxial Compression Test Report • i1- Rosc. ��a� S�,d�o. � , - y 'VD Z KYS-IZ9 c cy ' I �.- I j Will ,I j i 1 O I I I ii I I II 1 li �4 I I NIL t 111111 liii ' , ' L lllIllji•, ...,„. 11111,... Intl1 , , . , II _ N u ; I s Illiln I I j y_ is = ::„.:44illlllllllillllllllIlIlIllIllIl E I I Vi o lim 13 it T- f 1.2 llH u111 "_! H 111 1� 11 , 1 :: iuiiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiur l I Oil 1 1,1.. . . . 1;= 1111111 ' , LYillIUhlIlIllIll Ii 1 a- 11111 , _ I 11111111n11 ; _ 03 liii 1 _ 1 $!NIHhllll 1ci : ..,u Z ,_ ~ o y. - O O O 0 O O 0 0 O C I G. �3 R oo =_ pd'sseiyg Jo�uisa t r R.b«614t J W0•A (..l..%6 IN,o JSA R!N o a 0.�ose, ;_;� To 2 44c -Iv { - - I LJ \ H 0 -•';;.': \ .. —_ --Ir ,Id x= _ ---- 'r __ ..� __ - rI - r g .r i V . _� _ l — _ ? I ■ I b I � � i- c . i 41 =c v as to f `4 ..... C y 1in C d ... L11 ', - — QQ o _. EMIv - S2 E 1Ca ,..er. 8 _ a ,___ �•. C........„ D . .. 1i . ,, sfv' ! ; = I -� o I . X CD CU E F r— I��I I i I In r �. U1 1�1 1 I r_...j I I I I i ( —, •.- 1 O C O In 0 O IA O V ga Isd•o•ssa.iig Jea4S � y I— . 1 I I SECTION 01110 I SUMMARY OF WORK 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Work covered by contract documents. B. Contract method. C. Work by Owner and others. D. Contractor Use of Site and Premises. E. Owner Occupancy. IF. Sequence of work and completion schedule. G. Applications for Payment. I1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises general construction including mechanical and electrical for Rosenblatt Stadium, 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovations, located at 13th Street I and Bert Murphy Drive, Omaha, Nebraska 68130, for The City of Omaha, Owner. B. The City of Omaha Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction 1989 Edition, I Section 100 - General Requirements and Covenants shall serve as part of the General Requirements. C. The Contractor shall be required to obtain all of the necessary and required permits for this project. All city fees for the above mentioned permits shall be waived. 1.3 CONTRACT METHOD IA. Construct the Work under the lump sum prices of items as listed in the Proposal. B. Items noted "NIC" (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner, or is work Ithat has been previously constructed under another contract. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER AND OTHERS IA. Items noted "NIC' (Not In Contract) will be furnished and installed by Owner or Owner's contractor. Coordinate with Owner for this work. I1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy of adjacent existing stadium and Owner access. 2. Work by Other Contractors and Work by Owner. B. Access to Site: Coordinate with Owner. 10-27-97 01110-1 BVSH#97098 IBAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. - I I C. Construction Operations: Coordinate with Owner. 1. Contractor use of site shall be limited as required for the Owner's use for Omaha Royals' home baseball games. Omaha Royals season starts approximately April 1, 1998. 2. Contractor shall limit construction operations to the minimum area required to complete the work. Storage of materials and equipment shall be limited to areas agreed to with Owner. 3. Contractor shall secure work areas at all times to prevent unauthorized entrance to the stadium and this area. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Coordinate with Owner. I 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY I A. Owner will occupy site and existing stadium during construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. I 1.7 SEQUENCE OF WORK AND COMPLETION SCHEDULE A. Notice to Proceed is anticipated to be issued on approximately November 19, 1997. 1 B. Begin work immediately. C. Complete Clubhouses by April 1, 1998. D. Complete all work by May 1, 1998. 1.8 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit one original and three copies of each application under procedures of Section 01330 on AIA G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: That specified for Schedule of Values in Section 01330. 1 2. PRODUCTS Not used. I 3. EXECUTION Not used. I END OF SECTION I I I 10-27-97 01110-2 BV&H#97098 1 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1I 1 I SECTION 01310 IPROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION I1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Coordination. B. Field engineering. IC. Alteration project procedures. D. Preconstruction conference. 1 E. Progress meetings. I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01110- Summary of Work: Coordination with Owner. I1.3 COORDINATION A. The General Contractor shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. The General Contractor shall coordinate the location of all mechanical, electrical, or other items with the General Construction work. C. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with I building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service,such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which I are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for Irepairs. E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. IF. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. 1 G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1 I 10-27-97 - 01310-1 BV&H#97098 IBAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.. I T I 1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Provideengineering field en ineerin services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. 1.5 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES I A. Materials: As specified in Product Sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. I B. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to original specified condition. C. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain to specified condition for each material,with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. _ D. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. E. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect/Engineer. F. Where a change of plan of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect/Engineer review. G. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. H. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a conference after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: Owner,Architect/Engineer, major subcontractors, and Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Architect/Engineer. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. 7. Scheduling activities of geotechnical Engineer. 1 1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum two- I week intervals. I 10-27-97 01310-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd., I - I B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at I meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner and Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. I 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. . Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. I 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. I2. PRODUCTS Not used. I3. EXECUTION Not used. IEND OF SECTION I I I I I I 10.27-97 01310-3 BV&H#97098 ' BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd., i I I • SECTION 01330 ISUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Procedures. iB. Construction Progress Schedules. C. Schedule of Values. 1 D. Proposed Products List. E. Shop Drawings. F. Product Data. I G. Manufacturer's Instructions. 1 H. Construction Photographs. I. Samples. IJ. Field Samples. • 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1 A. Section 01110-Summary of Work: Work Sequence, Applications for Payment. B. Section 01400-Quality Requirements: Testing laboratory reports. IC. Section 01400- Quality Requirements: Manufacturer's field service reports. D. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Contractor's list of Products. IE. Section 01770- Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals. 1.3 PROCEDURES I A. Deliver submittals to Architect/Engineer at address listed on cover of Specifications. B. Transmit each item under Architect/Engineer-accepted form bound in the specifications. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier, identify pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number, and Specification Section number, as appropriate. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. IC. Submit initial progress schedule, schedule of values, and proposed Products List in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After review by Architect/Engineer revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedules with each I second Application for Payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal. D. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to Work progress. Coordinate submittal of related items. IE. After Architect/Engineer review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal. I 10-27-97 01330-1 BVH#97098 1 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd., i I F. Distribute copies of review ed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to I promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES I A. Submit horizontal. bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation, identifying first work day of each week. B. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of Work as of time of each Application for Progress Payment. C. Show submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and those under Allowances. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 1 A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703; Contractors standard form or media-driven printout will be considered on request. ' B. Format: Table of Contents of the specifications. Identify each line item with number and title of the major Specification Sections. C. Include in each line item amount of Allowances specified. I D. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractors overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list change orders, for each application for payment. III 1.6 PROPOSED PRODUCT LIST A. Submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with requirements in Article on Procedures, above. B. Contractors Review: I 1. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturers catalog numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submittal of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. 3. Apply Contractors stamp, signed or initialed for each sheet of shop drawings, and li product data certifying to review, verification of products, field dimensions and field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and coordination of III information with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. 4. Any drawings submitted without this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data; supplement manufacturers standard data to provide information unique to the Work. B. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 10-27-97 01330-2 BVH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd., I • 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS I A. When required in individual Specification Section, submit manufacturer's printed instruc- tions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for product data. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS. A. Twice monthly, take photographs and submit same to Architect/Engineer with Application for Payment. IB. Photographs:Two prints each; color, glossy, 8 x 10 inch size; mounted on 8-1/2 x 11 inch clear binders,with left edge binding margin for three hole punch. I C. Take six exterior site photographs from differing directions and six interior photographs indicating the relative progress of the Work, 7 days maximum prior to submitting. Identify photographs with date,time, orientation and project identification. ID. 1.11 SAMPLES Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/ IA. Engineer's selection. Submit samples for selection of finishes within sixty (60) days after date of Contract. B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work. C. Include identification on each sample,giving full information. ID. Submit the number specified in respective Specification section; one will be retained by Architect/Engineer. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in the Specification Section. III 1.12 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples of finishes at Project as required by individual Specifications section. Install sample complete and finished. Acceptable samples in place may be Iretained in completed Work. 2. PRODUCTS INot used. ii 111 3. EXECUTION Not used. IEND OF SECTION I I I 10-27-97 01330-3 BVH#97098 1 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd., 1 TRANSMITTAL FORM FOR SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, OR SAMPLES (One copy of this form shall be provided with each submittal.) I TO: BAHR VERMEER & HAECKER,ARCHITECTS, LTD. Transmittal No. 1209 Hamey Street, Suite 400 Omaha, NE 68102 First Submittal Resubmittal PROJECT: ROSENBLATT STADIUM Shop Drawing 1998 CLUBHOUSE/RESTROOM RENOVATIONS Product Data 13th Street&Bert Murphy Drive Sample Omaha, Nebraska Other S.P. 97-20 LRA 90053 CONTRACTOR: BVH PROJECT NO. 97098 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT: "This Submittal has been reviewed by Contractor and approved with respect 'to the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto." 111 NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR: If any submittal deviates from the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall advise the Architect of the deviations in writing accompanying the submittal, including the reasons for the deviations. CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE: DATE: SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION ACTION TAKEN COPIES TO 111 No. Quant. Ref. Mfgr./Supplier Item A BCD E O A EC ACTION TAKEN COPIES TO: A-Approved 0- Owner B- Furnish as corrected A-Architect C- Revise and submit E- Engineer D- Submit specific item C-Contractor E-Rejected INSTRUCTIONS TO ENGINEER, CONSULTANT: This transmittal with the enclosures enumerated above is being forwarded for your review. Please note the action taken on each of the submittals and complete, sign, date and return this transmittal form. Please return within seven (7)working days from date received. COMMENTS 1 _BAHR VERMEER & HAECKER, ARCHITECTS, LTD. By: Date CONSULTANT By: Date I I 10-27-97 01330-4 BVH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd., I 1 SECTION 01400 IQUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1. GENERAL 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation. IB. References. Field samples. IC. ' D. Mock-up. , IE. Inspection and testing laboratory services. F. Manufacturers'field services and reports. 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01310- Project Management and Coordination. I B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. IC. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. D. Section 02300-Earthwork. IE. Section 03300-Cast-In Place Concrete. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION I A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. IB. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. ID. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more I precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. I F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. I 111 10-27-97 01400- BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I L 1 1.4 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids. I B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for 111 review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. I C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer. 1.6 SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES A. The Owner shall employ and pay for special inspection services to perform inspections and testing as required by the 1994 Uniform Building Code Section 1701 as deemed necessary by local and state code officials. 1.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ' A. The Owner shall employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing for soils, aggregates, mortar, and concrete. The cost of tests failing to meet specification requirements shall be deducted from the Contractor's payments. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent firm for inspection and testing not provided by the Owner. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer, in duplicate, I indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, I tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer. ch arged for retestingwill be char ed to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price. 10-27-97 01400-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I I 1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS I A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to Iinitiate instructions when necessary. B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. 1 C. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review. I2. PRODUCTS Not Used 1 3. EXECUTION I Not Used END OF SECTION 1 1 I 111 I I I I I I 10-2 7-97 01400-3 BV8H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 i SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electricity,Lighting. rB. Heat,Ventilation. C. Telephone Service. ' D. Water. E. Sanitary Facilities. F. Bafflers. G. Enclosures. H. Protection of Installed Work. I. Security. J. Water Control. K. Cleaning During Construction. L. Project Identification. M. Field Offices and Sheds. ' N. Removal. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01110-Summary of Work. B. Section 01770-Closeout Procedures: final cleaning. ' 1.3 ELECTRICITY,LIGHTING A. Connect to existing service, provide branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords. Owner will pay costs of energy used. Take measures to conserve ' energy. B. Provide lighting for construction operations. 1.4 HEAT,VENTILATION A. Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations,to protect materials and finishes ' from damage due to temperature or humidity. B. Prior to operation of permanent facilities for temporary purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation,and that filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance and utilities. 1 10-27-97 01500-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 i 11 to disperse humidity, and to prevent accumulations of C. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, p ty, dust,fumes,vapors,or gases. 1.5 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide telephone service to field office. 1.6 WATER , A. Connect to existing facilities;extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by use of hoses. Owner will pay for water used. 1.7 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. B. Existing facilities shall not be used. 1.8 BARRIERS A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas to provide for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways as required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for 111 public access to existing building. C. Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials,dumping,chemically injurious materials,and puddling or continuous running water. 1.9 ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing areas and equipment. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces;paint surfaces exposed to view in Owner occupied areas. 111 1.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic,movement of heavy objects,and storage. C. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces,on lawn and landscaped areas. 1 1.11 SECURITY A. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism,and theft.Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.12 WATER CONTROL , A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment. 1.13 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION I A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish;periodically dispose of off-site. 1 1 1 0-27 s7 01500-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 1 1 B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. 1.14 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 8 x 4 foot (2.4 x 1.2 m) double-sided project identification sign of wood frame and exterior grade ' plywood construction, painted,with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter, to Owner's design and colors. List title of Project,names of Owner,Architect/Engineer,professional consultants,Contractor. B. Erect on site at location established by Architect/Engineer. ' C. Allow no other signs to be displayed. 1.15 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture. Provide,in addition,space for Project meetings,with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. ' B. Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Weather-tight, with heat and ventilation for Products requiring controlled conditions, with adequate space for organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection of stored materials. 1.16 REMOVAL A. Remove temporary materials, equipment,services,and construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground installations to a depth of 2 feet; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified,or to original, condition. 2.PRODUCTS Not used. 3.EXECUTI ON Not used. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 . 1 ' 10-27-97 01500-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 - 1 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS I1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01400-Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.3 PRODUCTS ' A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. ' B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. ' C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer,for similar components. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ' A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor storage areas shall be approved by the Owner. ' B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated products,place on sloped supports,above ground. D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. 10 27-97 01600-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 1 E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. I F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement, or damage. I H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. , 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications,no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. , 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To encourage competitive bidding among material suppliers and manufacturers, the Architect will evaluate all substitutions which are submitted at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Those substitutions which the Architect deems acceptable will be included in an Addendum and issued at least two (2) days prior to the bid date. Subsequently,substitutions will be considered only when a product becomes unavailable due to no fault of 111 Contractor. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. 1. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 111 a. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. b. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. c. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. d. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. D. Where the phrase "or approved equal" or "equal" is used, it shall be construed to mean, in the Architect/Engineer's estimation, and the Architect/Engineer will be the sole judge in determining whether a product or procedure is equal to that specified. 2. PRODUCTS-Not Used. 3. EXECUTION-Not Used. END OF SECTION 10-27-97 01600-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. • 1 1 ISECTION 01730 I CUTTING AND PATCHING ' 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES l A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS I A. Section 01110-Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors. B. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. IC. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Product Options and Substitutions. D. Individual Product Specifications Sections: 1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. l 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element. I 3. Efficiency,maintenance,or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: I 1. Identification of Project. 1 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. I 4. Description of proposed work,and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. I8. Date and time work will be executed. 2.PRODUCTS I2.1 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. I B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01600. I 3.EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. 10-27-97 01730-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I 1 B. After uncoveringexistingWork,inspect conditions affectingperformance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. C. Maintain excavations free of water. ' 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting,fitting,and patching including excavation and fill to complete Work. , B. Fit Products together,to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill timed work. 1 D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. , F. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 3.4 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work,and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. I D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work airtight to pipes,sleeves,ducts,conduit,and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire-rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-rated material,in accordance with Section 07900-Joint Sealers,to full thickness of the penetrated element. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly,refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION 1 1 10-27-97 01730-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS.Ltd. 1 1 SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. ' C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. ' E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500- Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning. 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. ' 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances,polish transparent and glossy surfaces,vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. ' C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. 1 E. Clean debris from roofs,gutters, downspouts,and drainage systems. F. Clean site;sweep paved areas. ' G. Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish,and construction facilities from the site. 1.5 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. ' 10-27-97 01770-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site,two sets of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings,product data,and samples(one set). B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. Record documents must be in good condition and not previously used. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark in red and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, 111 including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark in red each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm)text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder covers with printed title"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. , C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified. Type on 24 pound white paper. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors,and major equipment suppliers. This is to include all electrical fixtures. F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment and where purchased. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 10-27-97 01770-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates,including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. ' 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. ' H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection,with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. ' I. Submit final volumes revised,within ten days after final inspection. J. Post in the Electrical Room: a framed floor plan, by room number, indicating the various types of paints used, including all manufacturers,styles, and identification numbers and letters needed to reorder. Also include ceiling tile manufacturer and styles,by number,as well as any other specific wall covering or finish. 1.8 WARRANTIES ' A. Provide two notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers. ' C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS ' A. Provide products,spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. ' B. Deliver to Owner;obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.10 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION ' A. Prior to final inspection,demonstrate operation of each system to Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction. 2.PRODUCTS-Not used. 3.EXECUTION- Not used. END OF SECTION 1 1 ' 10-27-97 01770-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 ISECTION 02220 DEMOLITION • I1. GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolish designated structures. • IB. Remove materials from site. C. Remove foundation and floor slabs. ID. Disconnect, cap, remove and identify utilities. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 01110-Summary of Work: Owner Occupancy. B. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Barricades. IC. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Dust Control. . I D. Section 01770- Closeout Procedures: Project Record Documents. E. Section 02300- Earthwork: Excavating, Backfilling, and Grading. I1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule. I B. Submit record documents. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS IA. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures. B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private thoroughfares. Maintain Iprotected egress and access at all times. C. Do not close or obstruct roadways and sidewalks without permission from I Owner. D. Use every precaution not to damage any existing utilities. 2. PRODUCTS Not used. I3. EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION I A. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring as required. I 10.27-97 02220-1 BVBH#97098 IBAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. • 1 B. Protect existing materials, appurtenances, structures and items which are not to be demolished and are to remain. C. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility lines within demolition areas. Do not disconnect any utilities without prior notice to and approval by Owner. D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utilities and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. I E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01110. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Demolish indicated structures and appurtenances in an orderly and careful manner. I Particular care must be taken to sequence, brace and provide any temporary support necessary for safe truss and column element removal. B. Cease operations and notify Architect/Engineer immediately if adjacent structures appear to be endangered. Do not resume operations until corrective measures have been taken. C. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished material from site. D. Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect. Elements and materials to remain are to be adequately protected to prevent damage. 1 E. Remove, store, and protect for re-installation items designated. F. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered. G. Do not bum or bury materials on site. H. Remove foundation walls and footings as required to install new construction, but to a minimum of eight inches below floor line. Remove concrete slabs on grade. All cutting of concrete slabs shall be with a water type 1 concrete saw. Careful jack hammering of concrete will be allowed. J. Keep work sprinkled to minimize dust. Provide hoses and watermain or hydrant connections I for this purpose. K. Backfill areas excavated open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition. ' L. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Leave site in clean condition. 3.3 REMOVAL ITEMS TO BE TURNED OVER TO OWNER AT LOCATION DESIGNATED BY THE OWNER A. The following items: 1. Items as selected by Owner. END OF SECTION I 1 10-27-97 02220-2 BV&H_#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS.LTD. 1 SECTION 02300 ' EARTHWORK 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers all stripping and cutting, filling, compacting, excavating, backfilling, and rough and ' finish grading; below or adjacent to structural additions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02220-Demolition. B. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete. ' C. Division 15: Excavating and Backfilling for Utility Lines. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Investigation. 1. Subsurface soil investigations have been made at the project site, the results of which are to be found in the reports prepared. The reports, prepared by Thompson, Dreessen & Domer, Inc., No. 445-122.2 dated March 28, 1995, and No. 445-129.2 dated October 22, 1997, and by Nebraska ' Testing Corporation, Reports No. NTC 6200-91-150, NTC 6200-87-535, NTC 6200-87-535 Supplement, dated January 11, 1991, July 15, 1987, and September 2, 1987, respectively. A copy of these reports may be examined at the City of Omaha and the Architect/Engineer's office. The ' information was obtained for use in preparing the foundation design; however, it is also made available for the general information of bidders. B. Bidders are urged to examine soils investigation data and to make their own investigation of the site ' before bidding. C. Interpretation 1. Soil investigation data is provided only for information and convenience of bidders. The owner and ' Architect and Engineer disclaim any responsibility for accuracy, true location and extent of soils investigation that has been prepared by Others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that data by bidders; as in projecting soil-bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability, _ ' and presence, level and extent of underground water. Soil investigation data are not part of the Contract Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Moisture-density relations for materials used for fill and backfill shall be determined in accordance with the standard method of test, ASTM D698. These tests shall be conducted by an approved laboratory at the expense of the Owner, and shall be completed before any fill is placed. 10-27-97 02300-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 I B. Soil Density Tests. Inspection and frequent testing by qualified personnel shall be provided during 1 compaction of fill and preparation of subgrade to insure proper moisture content and degree of compaction. The Owner shall pay for all tests and inspection services meeting the specification I requirements. A minimum of one compaction and moisture field test shall be made for every 100 cubic yards of fill placed, but not less than one test per 1,000 square feet of overlaying structure area, nor less than three tests per structure. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as part of final landscaping. I B. Protect bench marks and existing structures, fences, roads and sidewalks against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect aerial,surface, or underground utility lines or appurtenances which are to remain. I/ D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, lagging, sheet piling, tie-backs, soil nails or other methods, as I required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations. Particular attention must be given to the restraint of soils between the clubhouse excavations and the concourse. E. Notify Architect of unexpected sub-surface conditions and discontinue work in area until Architect provides notification to resume work. This may include existing conditions, such as undermining of existing construction. F. Protect bottom of excavations and soils around and beneath foundations from frost. I G. Grade around excavation to prevent surface water runoff into excavated area. H. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by 1 settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Contractor shall use shoring and sheeting procedures as necessary to protect existing structures. Contractor shall retain a licensed professional engineer registered in the State of Nebraska to design the shoring and sheeting system to retain soils during excavation and construction of the proposed Clubhouse expansion The engineer's sealed calculations shall be submitted for file purposes. The responsibility for all the shoring and sheeting systems remains with the contractor. I I. Repair damage. 2.PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. All fill and backfill materials shall be suitable soil, free of refuse, stones or clods larger than 3 inches I maximum dimension, vegetation and other perishable matter, subject to approval by the Geotechnical Engineer. Materials shall be suitable excavated material or selected from a borrow area. Compacted fill below and adjacent to structural addition shall be constructed of clean, inorganic low-plasticity silt or lean clay having a maximum liquid limit less than 40 and a maximum plasticity index less than 20. Backfill of the foundation walls shall be constructed of inorganic silty clay or sandy clay. Frozen material shall not be included in the soil used for fill. I B. Granular fill under grade slabs shall be clean granular sand-gravel or medium-grain size sand material free from clay,silt, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. C. Fill under landscaped areas shall be free from alkali, salt and petroleum products. Use subsoil excavated from site only if conforming to specified requirements. 10-27-97 02300-2 BV&H#97098 I BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I • Iloam free from subsoil, roots, grass,Topsoil shall be friable g , excessive amount of weeds, stones and foreign matter. Use topsoil stockpiled if conforming to these requirements. E. Crushed rock fill to be 3/4"and smaller. 3.EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION AND LAYOUT ' A. The Contractor will stake out the project work and shall erect and maintain batter boards at all corners, and shall establish an exterior bench mark. B. Carefully preserve bench marks and reference points; in case of their destruction, replace them and be ' responsible for any mistake that may be caused by their loss or disturbance. 3.2 UTILITY LINES ' A. Utility lines installed by other Contractors shall be protected during excavating and backfilling operations; if damaged,they shall be repaired at the Contractors expense. ' B. When encountered in the work or as indicated, protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electric, or other utility services;where required for the proper execution of the work, relocate them as directed. C. Any existing active utility lines, the location of which are not known to the Contractor in sufficient time to avoid damage, if inadvertently damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor and extra payment will be allowed. D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug or seal lines and identify at grade. 3.3 FILL COMPACTION A. Provide and place any additional fill material required to bring the work to the designated grades. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Geotechnical Engineer when ready for filling and compacting. In no case shall fill be placed on a subgrade that is muddy, frozen or that contains frost. ' The entire area to receive fill and areas to receive slabs or paving shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches, the moisture content adjusted if necessary, and the area recompacted to a uniform condition complying moisu cotiqrmn for compact fi ll. Tbgall tested by anwith approvedthe t laboratory.reand Thempac fi onll materialreui e shalle bets wetttheed, or dried ed by aerationhesu, if reqradeuiredsh, and ' an initial lift of 8" loose thickness shall be installed. This initial lift shall be tested for degree of compaction and moisture content by an approved laboratory. After satisfactory test results have been obtained, the remaining fill shall be constructed in lifts of 8-inch maximum loose thickness to required ' grade. In the event of a rainstorm damaging the surface of a lift, all damaged material shall be removed and recompacted or left to dry to required moisture content specified and recompacted if necessary. B. When fill is to be placed on slope steeper than 4 to 1, the slope on which fill is to be placed shall be stepped to a vertical depth of at least 12 inches. C. The extent of the area compacted to receive the granular fill and slabs on grade shall be sufficient to provide equipment turn-around outside of the area within the exterior walls, and slope from that point to natural grade at not more than a 1 to 2 grade. No wall footing trenches shall be excavated until the entire area is compacted to the required elevation to receive concrete slabs and granular fill. ' D. Granular fill under grade slabs shall be placed to the designated thickness, and thoroughly compacted to a reasonable smooth, even surface. Unless otherwise indicated, granular fill under grade slabs shall be not less than 4 inches thick. 1 10-27-97 02300-3 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 at the of this requirements E. Any compacted fill, backfill, or subgrade that does not meet the re qspecification time slabs or concrete steps are to be placed shall be reworked or removed and properly replaced at the expense of the Contractor. I F. The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care during compaction so as not to damage adjacent construction. 3.4 FILL TYPES AND DEGREE OF COMPACTION A. Fill and subgrade for areas to receive slabs, concrete steps and drive, shall be compacted to at least 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698 Standard Proctor test. Soil moisture shall be kept within +3% and -3% of the optimum moisture content. B. Backfill over exterior footings or mats and next to basement or retaining walls shall be placed at approximately the density of the surrounding soils. Where backfill is to support grade slabs or pavements, it shall be compacted to at least 98% of the Standard Proctor test within +3% to -3% of the optimum moisture content. 3.5 EXCAVATING A. All excavating shall be unclassified and the Contractor shall remove whatever materials encountered in excavating to the lines and grades as indicated on the drawings. B. Excavated materials which are suitable and required for filling and backfilling shall be stockpiled at a convenient location. All material which is not suitable or which is not required shall be removed from the site and satisfactorily disposed of. C. Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from foundation walls to allow additional space as required for construction operations, for the removal of forms, installation of utilities, inspections, etc. Excavations shall be left open until the concrete work has been inspected and approved, and the work of other trades concerned completed. D. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation, new or existing, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. 1 F. Excavated surfaces will not be permitted for use as forms for placing concrete for foundation walls, mats, and area wells. Trenches for foundation footings shall be excavated to dimensions of the concrete work and the footings formed against soil. Undercutting will not be permitted. G. Maintain excavation in good order, provide adequate bracing and shoring, protect excavations against frost and freezing or excessive drying until concrete can be placed. 1 H. Maintain excavation free of water at all times. Water which has accumulated in the excavation shall be removed. Bottoms and sides of excavations affected by water shall be corrected by removal of additional material to sound surfaces. I. In the event that any part of the excavation is carried through error, or to correct water damage, below the depth shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall maintain the excavation at that level and start the footings and foundations from the excavated level or raise the excavation to the specified footing bearing elevation with lean concrete, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. No claim for extra work or material will be allowed because of careless excavating to depths beyond those shown and required. J. If suitable bearing as verified by the soils engineer is not encountered at the elevation shown, notify the Architect in writing and an appropriate change order revising depth or design of footings will be issued. The contract price will be adjusted if additional excavating and other construction is required. 10.27-97 02300-4 BVSH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I . . I 3.6 BACKFILLING A. Before placing backfill, remove all debris, trash, material subject to termite attack, rot or corrosion, and other objectionable matter. Ensure that ground surfaces are not in a frozen condition. Recompact sides and bottoms of excavations to condition required for backfill. Do not backfill over existing subgrade 1 surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy. B. Backfilling shall commence as soon as possible after permanent installations are approved. Exercise care to avoid damage to adjacent construction, walls, dampproofing and other work in place. In I compacting adjacent to walls after walls are built to grade, compact on both sides at the same time, or brace walls to avoid displacing or rupturing any portion of wall. IC. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. D. Heavy, self-propelled or towed power operated mechanical equipment used for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of the backfill above the top of the footing. Areas where other equipment cannot be operated I shall be compacted by power-driven hand operated equipment. I 3.7 SURPLUS MATERIAL A. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site. B. Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. 3.8 MEAS UREMENT AND PAYMENT I A. Payment for granular fill and other earthwork covered under this section shall be included in applicable lump sum items listed on the Proposal. 111 END OF.SECTION II . I I I I 10-27-97 02300-s BVSH#97098 IBAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I SECTION 02620 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM I 1. GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation drainage tile system, complete with required couplings and accessories. IB. Aggregate setting bed and cover. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1 A. Section 02300- Earthwork. B. Section 07130-Sheet Membrane Waterproofing. C. Section 07200- Board Insulation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Submit Certification signed by Contractor and foundation drainage system Installer that installed materials conform to specified requirements and system was successfully checked and tested I prior to covering with filtering and drainage fill. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Drainage Tile: Perforated, double-wall polyvinylchloride type; shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F949; 4 inch inside diameter, complete with required couplings and fittings. 111 B. Subsurface Insulating Drainage Mat: 1. General: Provide prefabricated in-plane wall drainage matting as part of overall foundation drainage system. I 2. Drainage Core: Styrofoam Thermadry insulating drainage panels, 2 1/."thickness. 3. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard non-woven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or a combination thereof. 4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated I in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Styrofoam Thermadry by Dow Chemical. D. Soil Materials: See Section 02300. I 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Do not over excavate. Remove large stones or other hardmatter which could damage drainage tile. B. Lay drainage a tile sloped to drain,with maximum variations of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Place with perforations facing downward. Install drainage tile in accordance with NCMA-TEK 19-3A 1994, Preventing Water IPenetration In Below-Grade Walls, Structural Details, and Section 02300 Earthwork. 10-27-97 02620-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 1 C. Ensure complete connection to storm sewer system using unperforated pipe. D. Prior to placing aggregate cover, allow Architect/Engineer to make visual inspection of installed drainage tile. E. Subsurface Drainage Mat: Coordinate placement of drainage mat with other foundation drainage materials. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for securing matting to substrate. Use adhesive and mechanical fasteners as recommended by matting manufacturer. Lap edges of fabric and extend fabric around foundation drainage pipe in accordance with mat manufacturer's recommendations. Protect in- place matting during backfill operations in accordance with matting manufacturer's instructions. Do not use drainage mat as protection board over waterproof membrane. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I l� 10-27-97 02620-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. It I SECTION 03100 1 ,A CONCRETE FORMWORK 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete,with shoring, bracing and anchorage. IB. Openings for other work. 1 C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete. , IB. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement. 1.3 REFERENCES IA. ACI 347- Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork. B. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. PS-1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to meet design and code requirements; so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines and dimensions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301. iB. Maintain one copy of ACI 301 on site. 2.PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS 1 A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel- type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form I material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. I 10-27-97 03100-1 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects,Ltd. I 1 C. Plywood: PS-1, BB Grade, Class I. 2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable or Snap-off type, metal, adjustable length, cone type, one inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1-1/4 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless oil which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Hard wood strips or rigid plastic with maximum possible lengths. I D. Flashing Reglets: Formed of the same type and gage as the flashing metal which shall be inserted into the reglets; longest possible lengths; release tape sealed slots; with alignment splines for joints; securable to concrete formwork. E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. 3.EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings. B. Earth forms are not permitted. p 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. I D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawings. J F. Provide chamfer strips on exposed corners of beams, columns and walls. 3.3 APPLICATION-FORM RELEASE AGENT 1 A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. I C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 10-27-97 03100-2 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer 8 Haecker Architects,Ltd. I 3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS,AND OPENINGS 1 A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. 1 C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure II items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.5 FORM CLEANING A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. I C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.6 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms, shoring, or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces Ischeduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Il Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION I 1 I 1 1 II 10-27-97 03100-3 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects,Ltd. r I ` SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1.GENERAL I, 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel bars,wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100-Concrete Formwork. IB. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies- Reinforcement for masonry. I1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 -Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318-89- Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI SP-66-American Concrete Institute- Detailing Manual. ,I D. ANSI/ASTM A185-Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ANSI/ASTM A497-Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ANSI/AWS D1.4-Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel. I G. ASTM A615- Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM A706- Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. I I. CRSI -Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. I B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, and supporting and spacing devices. Comply with ACI SP-66 for detailing I reinforcement. Shop drawings and bar lists to be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Nebraska. C. Manufacturers Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Maintain one copy of ACI 301 on site at all times. C. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. I 10-27-97 03200-1 BVBH#97098 Bahr Vermeer 8 Haecker Architects,Ltd. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. 11, 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Reinforcing steel shall be stored above the ground surface upon platforms, skids, or other supports. 2.PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT 1 A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 furnish in flat sheet. I C. Steel expansion joint dowels: Dowel bars shall be round smooth steel conforming to ASTM A36. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS I A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement 1. during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required. 2.3 FABRICATION 1 A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice. B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4 and applicable portions of ACI 318-89. 1 C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer. 3.E XECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. All reinforcement shall be secured in position and inspected and approved by Architect, before concrete can be placed. 3.2 PLACEMENT I A. Place, support and secure reinforcement and welded steel wire fabric against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. 111 B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. I D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as indicated on the Drawings. E. Conform to ACI 318 code for concrete cover over reinforcement not indicated on the Drawings. I END OF SECTION 1 10-27-97 03200-2 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects,Ltd. 1 I SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide-cast-in-place concrete where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section in Division 1 of these Specifications. B. Section 03100-Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 -Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 304- Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 305R- Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306R-Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308-Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. G. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. H. ANSI/ASTM D994- Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). I. ANSI/ASTM D1190-Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type. J. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 1 (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). K. ASTM C33-Concrete Aggregates. L. ASTM C94- Ready-Mixed Concrete. M. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. N. ASTM C260-Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 10-27-97 03300-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS.Ltd. I I O. ASTM C494-Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. P. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice To Proceed,submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. C. Submit two copies of laboratory trial mix designs proposed in accordance with ACI 318-89, Chapter 4 or one copy each of 30 consecutive test results and the mix design used from a record of past performance in according with ACI 318-89, Chapter 4. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301, except as otherwise indicated. A copy of ACI 301 shall be kept on the job at all times. C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. I E. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. F. Testing: The Owner shall select an independent testing laboratory, subject to the approval of the Architect, and shall pay for all testing. 1. All Portland Cement shall be tested at the mill in conformity with ASTM C 150. 1 2. During construction, compression test cylinders shall be made at the job site, by approved, ACI certified personnel. Four cylinders, molded from one sample, for each test and at least one test for each day's batch concreting, but not less than one test per 50 cu. yds., of each class of concrete shall be made following standard Procedure ASTM C 31. Cylinders shall be cured 24 hours on the job in a manner to prevent loss of moisture and maintain a temperature of 60 to 80 degrees F. At the end of 24 hours the cylinders shall be carefully transported to a testing laboratory, moist cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. The remaining cylinder to be held as reserve for later testing if required. After 56 days, unless notified by the Architect to the contrary, reserve cylinder may be discarded without being tested. The cost of compression testing shall be paid directly to the laboratory by the Contractor. I I 10-27-97 03300-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. a . I 3. When the strength level of the concrete is considered unsatisfactory, the Architect shall have the right to order tests at no cost to the Owner of the hardened concrete in the structure, conducted in 1 accordance with standard procedure ASTM C 42, or order required field load tests. In case the field tests show weakness in the structure, all such concrete shall be removed and replaced with new concrete when directed by and at no cost to the Owner. I 2.PRODUCTS - I2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: Provide a standard brand of Portland cement complying with ASTM C150, Type I. Do not Ichange the brand of cement during progress of the work except as approved in writing by the Architect. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Nebraska Department of Roads fine and coarse aggregate for Class "47B"concrete. All aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet ASTM C33. I C. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. 1 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: Use only a standard brand of admixture for concrete, approved by the Architect, and Imeeting ASTM C260. B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type A - Water Reducing Type B -Retarding Type C - Accelerating Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating Type F - Water Reducing, High Range Type G-Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding admixture. C. Calcium chloride or admixture containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. The use of a Iwater reducing agent that contains chlorides shall not be used in any concrete that is to be prestressed. D. Certification: Provide admixture manufacturer's written certification that chloride ion content complies with specified requirements. I2.3 ACCESSORIES I A. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm.when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 1 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: "Masterseal"; Master Builders. I "A-H 3 Way Sealer;Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co. "Ecocure"; Euclid Chemical Co. I "Clear Seal"; A. C. Horn. "Sealkure";Toch Div.-Carboline. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonnebom/Contech. "Polyclear"; Upco Chemical/USM Corp. I "L&M Cure"; L& M Construction Chemicals. "Hardtop"; Gifford-Hill. I 10-27-97 03300-3 BVBH#97098 IBAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS.Ltd. I B. Absorptive Cover. Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. a C. Moisture-Retaining Cover. One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. Waterproof paper. Polyethylene film. Polyethylene-coated burlap. D. Bonding Agent: Use only a standard brand, approved by the Architect, of two component, mineral filled, 111 epoxy- polysulphide polymer complying with FS MMM-G-650 Type I or Type II. Grade A. E. Vapor Barrier. 6 mil polyethylene moisture barrier cover over prepared base material at building slabs and where shown on drawings. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. F. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout. I 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Non-metallic: "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders. "Sonogrout"; Sonnebom Building Products. "Euco-NS"; Euclid Chemical Co. "Crystex"; L& M Const. Chemical Co. 2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler. Premolded asphalt impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM D1751 of thickness - as indicated in the Drawings. B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel formed to tongue and groove profile, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. C. Expansion,Joint Material: Rescor closed cell plastic manufactured by W. R. Meadows, Inc., Vinylfoam #327, manufactured by W. Grace and Co., or approved equal. D. Sleeves: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A53,standard weight, galvanized. E. Sealant and Primer: as specified in Section 07900. 1 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. Concrete strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301,Article 3.2, as follows: 11 1. Specified compressive strength (fc) of concrete shall be as noted in the General Notes on the Drawings. 2. Specified compressive strength (fc) of concrete shown but not indicated on the Drawings: a. fc-4000 psi at 28 days age for all concrete. b. Air-entrained, 6 percent plus or minus 1 percent for exterior exposed concrete. 3. Required average compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301, Article 3.8.2.3. 10-27-97 03300-4 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. r I I 4. Concrete exposed to freezing and thawing in the completed project shall be proportioned in il accordance with Method 2, ACI 301 - six sacks of cement (564 Ibs) minimum per cubic yard of concrete. - B. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, use of admixtures, job conditions, method of placement, weather, test I results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and I accepted by the Architect before using in the work. C. Air-Entrainment: Use air entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturers prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of I placement having air content (percent by volume) as noted in the General Notes on the Drawings. Permissible variation from specified air content is plus or minus one percent. D. Admixtures: No admixtures will be allowed except as specified herein, unless authorized by the Architect. Requests for approval and/or substitution must be accompanied by sufficient information and test data for evaluation. 1 1. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with the manufacturers directions. 1 E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as Inoted. Slump: IF. 1. Maximum Slump: 2"to 4"for slabs,walls and footings. 2. Where field conditions require slump to exceed that indicated, obtain increased slump by use of super-plasticizer only. Obtain written approval of Architect who may require adjustment to the mix. ratio shall not exceed 0.45 b G. Normal Weight Con crete: Water-cementY weight including any water added to meet specified slump in accordance with ASTM C 94, unless otherwise indicated on the 1 Drawings. H. No water shall be added to concrete mix outside of the batch plant. All adjustments to the concrete mix, I except as indicated in "F" above, shall be made only at the batch plant subject to the approval of the architect. 3.EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. I3.2 INSPECTION A. Bearing material for all footings shall be inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer before footings are I placed. Should unforeseen conditions be discovered necessitating increase in the footing depth, the Architect will order such increase and allow the Contractor extra payment. I 10-27-97 03300-5 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I B. No concrete shall be placed until the Architect has approved the reinforcement and other embedded items. All concrete placed in violation of this provision shall be rejected and removed. The Contractor shall give the Architect 24 hours notice before placing concrete. I 3.3 CONCRETE MIXING A. Concrete for minor work, when approved by the Architect, may be mixed at the site in a power mixer when the mixer has a capacity not less than one full sack batch. B. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, use ready mixed concrete complying with ASTM C94. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. I B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. C. Ensure reinforcement,welded wire fabric, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers, and joint devices are secured in proper locations and are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Install vapor barrier only under interior slabs on grade, lap joints minimum 12 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 12 inches and seal watertight. F. Install joint fillers , primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler of thickness as indicated. I H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section ,. 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. I. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. I J. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. K. Place floor slabs in checkerboard pattern unless otherwise indicated. I L. Saw cut joints as soon as possible, without damaging concrete. Using 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness, unless otherwise indicated. M. Interior slab control joints are to be hand tooled, cast-in or may be saw cut immediately following final troweling using a "soff-cut"saw in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. N. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 10-27-97 03300-6 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. In areas with floor drains, pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on Drawings. 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 305R and 306R. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and ' finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. D. Curing methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. E. Provide moisture curing by following methods. 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Continuous water-fog spray. 3. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces Iand edges,with 4"lap over adjacent absorptive covers. F. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: ' with moisture-retaining Cover concrete surfaces cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 1 G. Provide curing and sealing compound to interior slabs with synthetic turf surfacing or left exposed; and to exterior slabs,walks, and curbs, as follows and except as noted below: 1. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, concrete sealer, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect and the curing and sealing product is proven compatible with the applied coating or finish. 2. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. H. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. 1 10-27-97 03300-7 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. . I topping, and other flat Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floorpp g, surfaces by application of appropriate curing methods. J. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture- retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.7 PATCHING 1 A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer I upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections as directed. , 3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer. , C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. END OF SECTION 111 1 1 I I 1 10-27-97 03300-8 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 r r SECTION 04060 rMORTAR 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. rB. Grout for mortar. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete Footings. B. Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar. C. Section 08110-Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Grouting steel door frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C5- Quicklime for Structural Purposes. B. ASTM C144-Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. D. ASTM C207- Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. E. ASTM C270- Mortar for Unit Masonry. F. ASTM C387- Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. G. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. H. ASTM C404-Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. I. ASTM C476-Grout for reinforced and non-reinforced masonry. J. 1994 Uniform Building Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit under provisions of Section 01330. r' B. Samples: Submit two ribbons of mortar, illustrating color and color range. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 111 10-27-97 04060-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. r . I 1 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S. ' D. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type. E. Premix Mortar. ASTM C387, using gray cement for concrete masonry and gray cement, normal strength for face brick. F. Water: Clean and potable. I 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for concrete masonry walls: ASTM C270, Type S. I B. Type S mortar shall be mixed in accordance with ASTM Standard Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry C270 as follows: 1. 1 part by volume Portland Cement. 2. 1/4 to 1/2 part by volume Hydrated Lime. 3. 3-1/4 to 4-1/2 parts by volume Aggregate. 4. Clean water as required for proper tempering. 2.3 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. I C. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within two hours of mixing.- D. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of the specific masonry Sections and Drawings. I END OF SECTION , 10-27-97 04060-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 1 SECTION 04800 MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 1. GENERAL 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications: Placement of loose steel lintels. I1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04060—Mortar. 1 B. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM A82-Cold-Drawn steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM A123-Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A525-Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A580- Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire. E. ASTM A615- Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM C90- Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. G. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. H. 1994 Uniform Building Code. I. ASTM C404—Specification For Aggregates For Masonry Grout. J. ASTM C476—Grout For Reinforced and Non-Reinforced Masonry. K. ASTM C150—Portland Cement. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit product data for each material, flashing, and accessory indicating product meets or exceeds that specified. 10-27-97 04800-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. • I 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer. Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with 1994 Uniform Building Code. I B. Comply with U.L. Laboratory Fire Ratings. I 1.8 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of composite masonry under provisions of Section 01400. 1 B. Erect 3 x 4 feet panel size, include specified mortar and accessories. C. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for the work. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. 111 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction, and 1994 Uniform Building Code. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS-CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS I A. A member of Nebraska Concrete Masonry Association. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. , 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N,Type I-Moisture Controlled; normal weight. I B. Concrete Brick Units: ANSI/ASTM C55, Grade N, Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight of same Grade,Type, and Weight as block units. I C. Masonry Units: Nominal modular and double half modular(scored) size of 2 - 12 x 8 x 16 inches. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, and lintels. Provide at reveal patterns indicated on 111 Drawings. 10-27-97 04800-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement Ladder type; hot dip galvanized after fabrication cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A580, Type 304, 9 gauge side rods with 9 gauge cross ties; manufactured by AA Wire Products Co., Dur-O-Wall;or Heckmann Building Products Co. ' B. Adjustable veneer anchors: Brick ties for use at 2" CMU soap wall shall be Durowal, Inc. DA-213S with 9 gauge veneer reinforcement lapped minimum of 1" onto CMU soap, all hot dip galvanized, including 2 D/A 807 stainless steel screw type fasteners at each anchor. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615,60 ksi,yield grade, deformed billet bars. D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel strap,20 gauge hot dip galvanized. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Filler. Closed cell polyethylene oversized 50 percent to joint width; self-expanding; 3/4 inch wide by maximum lengths. ' B. Cleaning Solutions: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.5 GROUT 1 A. Grout Materials: Portland Cement ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. 1. Fine Aggregate for Grout Sand,ASTM C 33 or ASTM C 404, Size No. 1. B. Grout: ASTM C 476, and the following: 1. Use "Fine Grout" where specified. Proportion by volume; one part portland cement, zero to 1/10 part lime and sand equal to 2 1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials. ' C. Mixing: Combine and mix cement, lime, water and aggregates for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Do not use grout which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed after initial mixing. D. In addition, grout shall be proportioned as required to provide a 28-day minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi. 111 1. Mix grout to have a slump of 10"plus or minus 1", at time of placement. E. Do not add air-entraining agents or other admixtures to grout materials. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location,and ready for roughing into masonry work. 10-27-97 04800-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&-HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 • 1 D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION • A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.3 COURSING I A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. I C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints. 3.4 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar,with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. ' B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. I E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with-proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. I. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with a control joint or clear space as indicated on the drawings. 3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES-REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY ' A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 1 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first joint below top of walls. I D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 12 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings. E. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned 1 position. 10-27-97 04800-4 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I I . I 1 3.6 LINTELS A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. ' B. Openings Up To 36 Inches Wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars one inch from bottom web, unless otherwise shown. C. Openings Over 36 Inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. D. Use single piece reinforcing bars only. E. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. F. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. G. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.7 GROUTED COMPONENTS ' A. Reinforce bond beams as indicated on the Drawings,and fill with grout. B. Reinforce pilasters and walls as indicated on the Drawings and fill with grout. ' C. Lap splices minimum 48 bar diameters. D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned ' position. E. Fill with grout all cores containing reinforcing, embed items, etc. ' F. Place and consolidate grout fill without disturbing reinforcing. G. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores to foundations with grout for a minimum 8 inches either side of ' opening. See drawings for additional requirements. H. Prepare cores for grout per industry standards,including cleaning and pre-wetting of cores to be grouted. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint devices in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. D. Form expansion joint as detailed. 3.9 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, build-in metal frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other items furnished by other Sections. 10-27-97 04800-5 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 I B. Build-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build-in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: Pilasters: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. , E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. 3.11 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other built-ins. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. B. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance ' or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.12 CLEANING I A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears. , C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 111 3.13 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finish installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. END OF SECTION I 10-27-97 04800-6 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 I SECTION 05120 ISTRUCTURAL STEEL 1. GENERAL I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Location of structural steel work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and I details to show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) I C. 'Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. Furnish anchor bolts, bearing plates and other incidental items of structural steel to be built into concrete or masonry under this section. • 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS - A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Grouting base plates and bearing I plates. B. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications. IC. Section 09900- Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36- Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53- Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. I C. ASTM A325- High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. D. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. I E. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. F. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings including Commentary and Supplements, thereto, as issued, 9th edition, June I 1, 1989. G. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". 1. Paragraph 4.2.1 of above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following I sentence: "This approval constitutes the owners acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings". I H. Steel Structures Painting Council Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, 2nd Edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Submit producers or manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). 1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Structural steel primer paint(protective coatings). 111 10-27-97 05120-1 BVBH x97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 1 B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300 with all information necessary for fabrication, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Shop I drawings shall be prepared under the direct supervision of, and signed and sealed by, a Professional Engineer registered in the state of Nebraska. C. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions given on the Drawings and shall make such I field measurements as are necessary to lay out the work properly and assure proper fit and proper elevations. Field verifications of all existing dimensions, configurations and conditions shall be done by the Contractor prior to submittal of steel shop drawings D. Erection drawings shall not be a direct reproduction of Engineers framing plans without I approval of Engineer. E. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, (including access holes for welding, etc.) size and weight of members, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4 symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. F. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of others sections. G. Approval of shop drawings will be for general conformance with the design concept and compliance with the requirements given in the Contract Documents. I 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". B. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS I qualification tests. C. Welders shall have been tested within the past twelve months and their qualification shall be considered as remaining in effect unless the welder is not engaged in a given process of welding for a period exceeding six months. 1. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractors responsibility. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Loading and handling of structural steel shall proceed without deforming, bending, or damaging metal. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place I concrete in ample time so as not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 2. PRODUCTS 111 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new quality steel free of rust, scale or defects which impair strength or durability. Furnish full length pieces unless specifically indicated on shop drawings. , I 10-27-97 05120-2 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer& Haecker Architects, Ltd. I I B. Metal Surfaces, Exposed to View: Use materials free from surface blemishes including scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such I blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. IC. D. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501. I 1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium-strength carbon steel. I G. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. (Galvanize where indicated to be used in a galvanized assembly.) H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 36, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor bolts in exterior environments shall be hot-dipped galvanized. I. Provide leveling nuts unless detailed otherwise. J. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers shall be quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts I and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. 1. Deliver to shop site properly boxed and labeled. K. Expansion Bolts: Hilti "Kwik-Bolts" or ITW/Ramset/Red Head Expansion Product's, Inc., I "Wedge Anchors," or approved equal. If the embedment length is not shown on the Drawings, provide the embedment length recommended by the manufacturer to develop the full strength of the bolt. 1 L. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1;type required for materials being welded. I . M. Primer. 1. SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. I 2. TNEMEC Series, 90-97 Primer, 2.5 mils thick, minimum dry film. 2.2 FABRICATION I A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC I Specifications and as indicated on final reviewed shop drawings. I B. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of 1 finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. D. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to I similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 1. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated. IE. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. I 10-27-97 05120-3 BV&H#97098 111 Bahr Vermeer& Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 F. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections. 2. Shop may give equivalent welded connection in lieu of all bolts if approved by the Engineer. G. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC"Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" (RSCS, 1985). H. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. I. Before welding, clean surfaces of scale, rust, grease, paint, galvanizing and other foreign materials. Jointing shall be tight and flush in true planes. Weld shall show uniform section, smoothness of weld metal, weather edges without overlaps, freedom• from porosity and clinkers and be of adequate strength and durability. Unless shown otherwise, welds shall be continuous. All exposed welds shall have rough places ground I off. Welds shall be ground smooth where shown on drawings. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2" of embedded areas only. Coordinate with Section 09900 - Painting for other requirements and compatibility. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SSPC SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". -All Steel. C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges and exposed surfaces. D. Apply paint within 24 hours of completing surface preparation. 111 E. Properly and thoroughly apply"cold"galvanizing paint per ASTM A780 where indicated. 3. EXECUTION 1 3.1 ERECTION A. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connections required for securing structural steel to in-place work. B. Furnish templates and other devices for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations, including column base plates, connections to existing columns and light tower anchorage. C. Surveys: For accurate erection of structural steel check elevations of concrete and steel bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect. D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. I 10-27-97 05120-4 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer& Haecker Architects, Ltd. I I E. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, leveling nuts, or other adjusting devices. IF. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. I G. Grouting of baseplates shall be as specified in Section 03300. Grout prior to placing loads on structure. I H. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for Idiscrepancies in elevations and alignment. I. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 1 J. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. K. Missized or misaligned holes in members shall not be enlarged by burning with gas I cutting torches in the field. L. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used I for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness required for original painting in shop. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. Source Quality Control: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials land fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. I B. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. I C. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. D. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated I or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. END OF SECTION I I I I 10-27-97 05120-5 9V411#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 SECTION 05500 ' METAL FABRICATIONS ' 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted. B. Refer to Schedule at end of this Section. 111 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete. ' B. Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 09900- Painting: Paint finish. ' 1.3 REFERENCES • A. ASTM A36- Structural Steel. - B. ASTM A53- Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A123-Zinc Coatings of Fabricated Products. D. ASTM A307- Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. E. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded Steel Structure Tubing. F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. G. FS TT-P-641 - Paint, Oil: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, Red and Brown. H. FS TT-P-641 -Primer Coating, Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide(for Galvanized Surfaces.) I. FS TT-P-645- Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate,Alkyd Type. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. B. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. C. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. I10-27-97 05500-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS.LTD. 1 1 111 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. Grade B, Schedule 40. (ASTM A501 , B. Steel Tubing:ASTM A53, ) C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1;type required for materials being welded. E. Primer. FS TT-P-31, red or brown; for shop application and field touch-up. I F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: FS TT-P-641. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent ' with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. ' G. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. I 2.3 FINISH A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale,grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 1 B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items scheduled with one coat. 1 D. Galvanize items to minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc coating. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION I A. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 10-27-97 05500-2 BV&H#97098 I BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS.LTD. 1 B. Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled. C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. ID. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate Sections. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. ' B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. C. After installation,touch-up field welds, scratched or damaged surfaces with primer. ' 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Provide and install items listed in Schedule and shown on Drawings with anchorage and attachments ' necessary for installation. B. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. C. Galvanized steel components as shown on drawings. ID. Lintels: As detailed, prime paint. END OF SECTION 1 I 1 1 10-27-97 05500-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS.LTD. 1 I 1 SECTION 06100 ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: ' A. Roof and wall sheathing B. Roof curbs. C. Blocking in wall and roof. D. Concealed wood blocking. ' E. Preservative treatment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS • A. Section 05120—Structural Steel B. Section 06100—Rough Carpentry. C. Section 06200—Finish Carpentry. D. Section 09260—Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with the 1994 U.B.C. local amendments and regulations and, except as indicated otherwise by these specifications, the latest edition of the following Standards: ' 1. NFPA- National Forest Products Association. 2. ALSC-American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standard. 3. APA-American Plywood Association: Grades and Standards. 4. AWPA-American Wood Preservers Association: Treatment Standards. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. ' 7. AITC—American Institute of Timber Construction. B. Where one or more requirements of the Standards conflict, comply with the more stringent requirement(s). I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading Agency: WWPA. B. Plywood Grading Agency: APA. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals according to the provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit manufacturer's data on wood preservative materials and application processes. 10-27-97 06100-1 BVH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I • I 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS I A. Framing lumber shall be grade stamped by the Western Wood Products Association or an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee and shall be manufactured in accordance with Product Standard PS 20-70, as published by the Department of Commerce. Framing lumber shall have a maximum moisture content of 19% and shall be marked with the indication "S-DRY"on the grade stamp. B. Grading, strength and stiffness properties for all framing lumber shall meet or exceed the I following minimum design values for the given material. Where one or more of the properties j conflict, provide material complying with the more stringent requirement. Design values indicated are base values (unadjusted for member size) for the species/grade according to WWPA guidelines. C. Treated wood framing and joists(per AITC—Timber Construction Manual, 4th Edition): I 1 2x12 2x10 2x6 Species/Grade SYP/#2 or better SYP#1 or better SYP#1 or btr. Extreme fiber in bending (single) Fb= 1250 psi 1300 psi 1650 psi I Tension parallel to grain Ft = 675 psi 725 psi 900 psi Horizontal shear Fv= 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Compressive perpendicular to grain Fc= 565 psi 565 psi 565 psi Compressive parallel to grain Fc= 1600 psi 1600 psi 1750 psi Modulus of Elasticity E = 1,700,000 psi 1,700,000 psi 1,700,000 D. Treated wood, blocking and miscellaneous wood framing: I Species/Grade SPF/#2 or better Extreme fiber in bending (single) Fb= 750 psi Tension parallel to grain Ft = 325 psi Horizontal shear Fv= 70 psi Compressive perpendicular to grain Fc= 335 psi Compressive parallel to grain Fc= 975 psi I Modulus of Elasticity E = 1,100,000 psi 2.2 ROOF/FLOOR SHEATHING A. Roof and wall sheathing shall be APA Structural I Rated Sheathing. Panels shall be a minimum I of '/," thick with a span rating of 48/24 Panels shall have an Exterior exposure durability classification. Nominal size: 48"x 96". I 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Screws and nails shall be Hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere. The roof of the clubhouse and restroom areas shall be 111 considered as exterior construction as it relates to the wood construction. B. Framing hardware, anchors and hangers shall be zinc coated steel manufactured by Simpson I Strong-Tie. C. Ventilation channels at insulation for venting between roof member. I 2.4 WOOD TREATMENT A. All exposed wood framing and wood framing in contact with roof masonry or concrete shall be pressure treated with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) to a minimum net retention of.60 lbs/cu. ft. in accordance with AWPA C1. 10-27-97 06100-2 BVH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I I 3. EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be performed in conformance with good trade practice, recommendations of ' manufacturers, building codes, these specifications and the contract drawings. All members shall be framed, anchored, tied and braced so as to develop the strength and rigidity for the purposes for which they are used. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or herein all wood framing shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 23, Section 2526 of the 1994 U.B.C. ' B. Erect wood framing members level and plumb. C. Construct corners using 3 studs. ' D. Place horizontal members crown side up. E. Unless noted otherwise all framing members are 1-piece (without splices). ' F. Curb all roof/floor openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by lapping side members alternately. G. Install wood blocking, furring and grounds where shown on the drawings. 3.3 FASTENINGS A. Except as noted otherwise on the drawings connect wood members using (as a minimum) the number and size of nails set forth in Table No. 23-I-Q of the 1994 U.B.C. 3.4 ROOF/FLOOR SHEATHING A. Install roof/floor sheathing with the long dimension of the panel across the framing and with the panel continuous over 2 or more spans. Stagger panel end joints 4'-0". Allow 1/8" spacing at panel ends and edges. Panel end joints shall occur over truss framing. Block all panel edges with 2x framing. Unless noted otherwise fasten roof/floor sheathing with 10d nails at wood and ' #12 screws at metal stud at 6" o.c. at the roof/floor perimeter and at all panel edges. Use 10d nails at wood and#12 screws at 12" o.c. in the panel. 3.5 TOLERANCES ' A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true positions. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 10-27-97 06100-3 BVH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 _ I SECTION 06200 ' FINISH CARPENTRY 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: ' A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop fabricated work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. B. Section 06410-Custom Casework: Shop fabricated cabinetwork. C. Section 08000- Door Schedule. D. Section 08700-Hardware: Supply of finish carpentry hardware. IE. Section 09000-Room Finish Schedule. F. Section 09900- Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AWI -Quality Standards. B. FS L-P-508-Plastic Sheet, Laminated, Decorative and Non-Decorative. C. FS MM-L-736- Lumber- Hardwood. D. FS MMM-A-130-Adhesive, Contact. E. HPVA HP-1 - Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood, Plywood, and Veneer Associations. ' F. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. ' H. PS 51 -Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. I. PS 58-Basic Hardwood. J. WRCLA-Western Red Cedar Lumber Association. NLGA- National Lumber Grading Authority. UK. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform finish carpentry work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, custom grade. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details; finishes, accessories, and to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to one foot (1:10). ' 10-27-97 06200-1 BVBH#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER.ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 I C. Submit manufacturers instructions under provisions of Section 01330. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. 1 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver wood materials under provisions of Section 01600. 1 B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber. PS 20; premium grade in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent for interior work. B. Hardwood Lumber premium grade in accordance with A101; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; plain sliced poplar suitable for painted finish. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; premium grade in accordance with AWI; core material of lumber; or particleboard; thickness 3/4" unless otherwise noted. B. Hardwood Plywood: Premium grade in accordance with AWI and HPVA Grade AA; core material of lumber, or particle board; thickness '/. inch unless otherwise noted; poplar suitable for painted finish. C. Wood Particleboard: 44 lb. to 48 , medium density, composed of wood chips made with water resistant adhesive;thickness 3/4"unless otherwise noted. D. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder;tempered grade. 2.3 FINISH MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: 0.050 inch general purpose grade; color as shown on drawings or specified in specific sections. B. Plastic Laminate Backing: High pressure paper base laminate without a decorative finish; 0.020 inch thick, smooth surface finish. 2.4 ADHESIVE A. Contact Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application. ' B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; non-corrosive for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish at other interior locations. 1 1 10-27-97 06200-2 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 I 1 3. EXECUTION I3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to schedule at end of this Section. r IB. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb, and level. C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting this Section are placed and ready to receive this work. ID. Prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies in contact with cementitious materials. E. Fit exposed edges of plywood and particleboard shelving with 3/8 inch thick hardwood edging. Width is 1 thickness of plywood or particleboard. F. Install hardware supplied by Section 08700 in accordance with manufacturers instructions. I G. Apply plastic laminate finishes where indicated. Adhere with adhesive over entire surface. Make joints and corners hairline. Match patterns. Slightly bevel arises. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern. Apply laminate backing on reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. I3.2 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. I3.3 SCHEDULE A. Interior. I 1. Moldings, bases, casings, and miscellaneous trim and stops. 2. Loose shelving: finish as detailed. IEND OF SECTION I I I I I I I 10-27-97 06200-3 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 I . I SECTION 06410 1 CUSTOM CASEWORK 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Special fabricated cabinet units. 1 B. Countertops. C. Prepared for site finishing. D. Prepared for utilities. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 1 B. Section 06200- Finish Carpentry. 1 C. Section 09000- Room Finish Schedule. D. Section 09900- Paints and Coatings: Finishing cabinets. E. Division 15- Mechanical: Plumbing utilities and fixtures. F. Division 16- Electrical: Electrical equipment. I1.3 REFERENCES A. FS MM-L-736- Lumber, Hardwood. IB. FS MMM-A-130-Adhesive, Contact. C. NEMA LD3- High Pressure Decorative Laminates. ID. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. E. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. IF. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. G. PS 58-Basic Hardboard. I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work to custom grade in accordance with "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), latest edition. I1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. IB. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. i C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. 10-27-97 06410-1 BV8H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I D. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating finish and plastic laminate colors. 2. PRODUCTS I 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber. PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: Item Species Cut Cabinet Frame Douglas Plain or rotary B. Hardwood Lumber, graded in accordance with AWI custom grade; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: Item Species Cut Exposed Frame . Red Oak Plain Sliced 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade; core material of lumber; medium density particleboard, species and cut as follows: B. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade and HPVA Grade AA; core material of 44 lb medium density fiberboard; type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cut suitable for transparent finish as follows: Item Face Species Cut Door and Drawer Fronts Red Oak Plain Sliced Drawer Construction To match fronts Plain Sliced Drawer Bottoms 1/4" particle board with almond melamine and PVC edge. C. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: 3/4"44 lb. medium-density particleboard with almond color melamine. D. Solid Surfacing: Conan Yz solid surfacing adhesively joined with no exposed seams, and including No. 815A/S integral seamed undermount lavatories as manufactured by DuPont, fabricated and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions by a licensed fabricator(see Room Finish Schedule and drawings for selections). Provide manufacturers 10 year manufacturing defect warranty. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS j A. Wilsonart B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 2.4 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate:.NEMA LD 3, GP-50 general purpose type; color as selected; matte finish. I B. Laminate Backing Sheet: LD-3 BK20 Backing grade, 10-27-97 06410-2 BVBH#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD W I I 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. 2.6 HARDWARE - A. Shelf Supports at cabinets: K&V #346 supports, walnut finish with #129 cushion, (drilled hole type). Holes drilled at 1'o.c. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley 4485- US26D finish. C. Cabinet Locks: National C8103 or equal- US26D.. • D. Drawer Slides: Blum 430E Series. E. Hinges: Stanley 1592 X 4 X 641, one pair doors to 48" height, 1 1/2 pairs doors 48"to 7'-0" height. F. Catches: Stanley SP41 - Magnetic. G. Touch Latch: Ives#821. H. Grommets: Minimum 1-1/2"diameter plastic grommets for countertops, color to match. 1 I. Bumpers: Rubber at doors and drawers. J. Shelf Standards and Rests: KV 255 AN K. Shelf Brackets: KV 256 AN L. Chair Hooks and Coat Hooks: Stanley CD80-4025 US32D. M. Closet Rods and Brackets: Bobrick B6047 with SS Flange. N. Continuous Hinge at bench lockers seat: Stanley STS 314% US32D. O. Padlock Hasp at locker bench: Stanley CD941 BP. P. Perforated Screen Plate: McNichols 1/8"galvanized steel %"square perforated screen plate with straight centers and with 3/16" bar widths. ' 2.7 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use full length pieces only. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. E. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make _ corners and joints hairline. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. F. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 10-27-97 06410-3 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I I G. Mechanically fasten splashbacks to countertops. H. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint contact surfaces of cut edges. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework which is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Counter-sink anchorage devices at exposed locations used to wall mount components, and conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Cut holes in countertops where shown on drawings or required for electrical cords. Fill hole with plastic grommet with plug (cap)to be installed when cord not in use. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures. END OF SECTION I I I 10-27-97 06410-4 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD . I - SECTION 07130 IISHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 1. GENERAL • I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Sheet applied membrane waterproofing. i 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1 A. Section 02620- Foundation Drainage Systems. 1 B. Section 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Section 07200—Thermal Protection. 1 1 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Waterproofing System: Prevent moisture migration to interior. I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator: Company specializing in sheet waterproofing systems with three years minimum experience. IA. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperatures above 40 degrees for 24 hours before application and continuously until waterproofing membrane has cured. B. Provide ventilation when waterproofing in an enclosed space. 1 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. I2. PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. W.R. Meadows Melnar. B. W. R. Grace Bituthane 3000. IC. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS IA. Primer. B. Gusset tape at joints. I I 10-27-97 07130-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I 1 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 111 A. Verify surfaces are solid, free of frozen matter, loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections, and foreign matter detrimental to adhesion and application of waterproofing. B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. I C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I B. Seal penetrations, small cracks, and honeycomb in substrate. 3.3 APPLICATION I A. Apply in accordance with the manufacturers application instructions. I END OF SECTION I 1 I I I I 1 10-27-97 07130-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I I SECTION 07200 THERMAL PROTECTION 1. GENERAL 5 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall. B. Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior ceiling construction. C. Foam and Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and roof assembly. 1.2 . RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete. _ B. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. D. Section 09260- Gypsum Board Assemblies: supportive construction. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C578- Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. B. ASTM D2842-Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. C. ASTM E96-Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. NFPA 255-Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. FS I-P-375- Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl-Chloride. F. FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures). 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of this Section shall provide a continuous thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturers installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. 2. PRODUCTS I2.1 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION MANUFACTURERS A. Rigid Insulation. ' 1. Styrofoam "SM" by Dow Chemical Co. 2. Forrnular 250 by U.C. Industries. 3. Certifoam SE by Diversifoam. 4. Amoco. 10-27-97 07200-1 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I I B. Batt Insulation. 1. United States Gypsum. 2. Certainteed. 3. Manville. 4. Owens Coming. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 111 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Board Insulation: Type A: Extruded cellular polystyrene; thermal resistance "R" per inch of 5.0 at 75°F temperature; minimum compressive strength of 15 psi above grade and 25 psi below grade; water absorption by volume in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D2842 0.3 percent; square edges; board size of II 48 x 96 inches by thickness indicated on drawings. Minimum thickness shall be 2 inches, except 1" minimum thickness at structural studs. B. Batt Insulation: Preformed glass fiber roll; R19 at studs, and R38 at Ceiling, and thickness indicated on Drawings;friction fit type without membrane. C. Foam Insulation: for joints at walls; and around door frames. Owens Corning Pink Foam. 2.3 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 2.4 VAPOR BARRIER MATERIALS A. Vapor and Air Barrier: Translucent polyethylene film for above grade application; 6 mil thick. B. Tape: Polyethylene;translucent; mesh reinforced; 2 inch wide. P 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip type of plastic disc; of type to be mechanically fastened to surface to receive rigid insulation; length to suit insulation thickness; capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. B. Provide air barrier/netting to hold insulation to wood beams. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of irregularities and materials that will impede adhesive bond. 1 C. Verify insulation is unbroken, free of damage. D. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 10-27-97 07200-2 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD 1 I 3.2 INSTALLATION- FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards on foundation wall perimeter, horizontally. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. B. Extend boards over joints, unbonded to foundation 6 inches either side of joint. C. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.3 INSTALLATION- EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install boards on wall perimeter, horizontally. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. Form seal butt edges at all joints. ' B. Install boards with thermal break type anchors that finish material can be fastened to at 16"O.C.. C. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. ' 3.4 INSTALLATION- BATT INSULATION-VAPOR BARRIER A. Install batt insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' B. Install batt insulation, vapor barrier in exterior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. E. Place vapor barrier on warm side of insulation by taping in place. Tape seal tears or cuts in barrier. F. Extend vapor barrier tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal in place. 1 G. Install foam insulation around perimeter of all exterior door and window frames, and all penetrations, to seal all gaps completely. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit work to be damaged prior to covering insulation. • END OF SECTION 10-27-97 07200-3 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD 1 I . 1 SECTION 07530 1 MEMBRANE ROOFING - EPDM 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Adhered single ply sheet membrane roofing. B. Flexible flashings. IC. Counterflash membrane termination. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 04800—Masonry Assemblies B. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry. IC. Division 15- Mechanical: Drain flashing flanges. 1.3 REFERENCES I A. ANSI/ASTM D412-Rubber Properties in Tension. B. ANSI/ASTM D746- Brittleness Temperatures of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. I C. ASTM D624- Rubber Property-Tear Resistance. 1 D. ASTM D2240- Rubber Property- Durometer Hardness. E. FS HH-I-524- Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene). I1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Elastomeric sheet membrane roof assembly to conform to UL requirements for a Class A rated Iassembly, Factory Mutual (FM)Class 1A/90, and all code requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Membrane Manufacturer. Company specializing in sheet roof membranes with five years experience. B. Applicator. Company specializing in installation of sheet roof membranes with five years documented I experience, approved by membrane manufacturer. C. Contractor to conduct a pre-roof installation conference on site with Architect & Owner prior to roof installation. III I 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification. IA.B. Factory Mutual (FM) Class 1A/90. III 10-27-97 07530-1 8V&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I 1 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit shop drawings detailing special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. C. Submit product data for sheet membrane, elastic flashing, joint cover sheet, and joint and crack sealants,with temperature range for application of membrane. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01400. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Under provisions of Section 01600, store materials in weather protected environment clear of ground and moisture. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1.10 WARRANTY I A. Provide two year manufacturers'warranty under provisions of Section 01770. B. Warranty: Include coverage of materials and installation resulting from failure to resist penetration of moisture. 2. PRODUCTS 1 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- MEMBRANE A. Carlisle System. B. Firestone- Rubberguard System. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 2.2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Membrane: .060 inch thick EPDM, in 50 x 150 ft. sheets conforming to the following criteria: I Properties Test - Results Tensile Strength ANSI/ASTM D412 1305 psi Elongation ANSI/ASTM Q412 350%, 1000 psi min. Tear Strength ASTM D624 150 lbs./in. min. Low Temperature Brittleness ANSI/ASTM D746 -75°F. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. I C. Flexible Flashing: 60 mil thick EPDM; tensile strength of 1400 psi; elasticity of 50 percent with full recovery without set; black or white color. D. Prefabricated Control or Expansion Joint Flashing: Sheet neoprene reinforced with closed cell foam backing,seamed into metal flashing flanges, including counterflashings. 10-27-97 07530-2 BV&H s #97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I 1 I 2.3 ACCESSORIES ' A. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions,waves, or projections, properly sloped to gutters. B. Verify roof openings penetrating elements through roof are solidly set,wood nailing strips are in place. C. Do not apply roofing materials to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufac- turer. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Install sheathing on wood framing. Lay with long side at right angle to flutes. Stagger end joints and provide support at ends. B. Cut sheathing cleanly and accurately at roof breaks and protrusions to provide smooth surface. Tape joints. C. Mechanically fasten sheathing in accordance with FM requirements at perimeter of roof deck, to a distance of 4 ft. in from edges using 8 fasteners with washers per board over entire roof area, with 8 ' fasteners per board. 3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install membrane roofing in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Roll out membrane. Bond sheet to substrate except those areas directly over or within 3 inches of a working crack or expansion joint. Work out air bubbles, wrinkles, and fishmouths. Firmly press sheet into place without stretching. ' D. Overlap edges and ends minimum 3 inches and seal.Apply uniform bead of sealant of edge. E. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.Apply joint tape and seal. F. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. G. Seal to adjoining surfaces. H. Continue membrane up vertical surfaces minimum 6 inches unless otherwise noted. _. . I. Seal items penetrating membrane with counterflashing membrane material. J. Install membrane flashings. Seal watertight to membrane. K. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints are static or moving. ' L. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater-than can be weather- proofed during same day. 10-27-97 07530-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. After installation, close off area to prevent unauthorized traffic. END OF SECTION 1 I • I I I 1 I I 1 1 10-27-97 07530-4 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I SECTION 07710 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS. 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gutters and Downspouts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07530—Membrane Roofing- EPDM. 1.3 REFERENCES - A. ASTM A525-Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process. B. NAAMM-Metal Finishes Handbook. C. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association)- Roofing Manual. D. SMACNA-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations,jointing methods, fastening methods, locations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit samples, illustrating component design, finish, color, and configuration. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to SMACNA Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. PVC: PVC heavy-duty gutters and downspouts. B. Substitutions under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: Size and profile as indicated. B. Downspouts: Size and Rectangular profile as indicated. 10-27-97 07710-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060-Lincoln,NE- Pasadena,CA • • I I C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. D. Downspout Boots. , 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. I B. Gutter Supports: Straps. C. Downspout Supports: Straps. I D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. E. Protective Back Coating: FS TT-C-494, bituminous. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and SMACNA requirements. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. I E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Seal metal joints watertight. D. Connect downspouts to downspout boots system. Seal connection watertight. I END OF SECTION I I 1 10-27-97 07710-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Homey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345.3060-Lincoln,NE- Pasadena,CA 1 I SECTION 07840 IFIRESTOPPING 1. GENERAL 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Preparing firestopping substrate surfaces. IB. Firestopping. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Firestopping used in conjunction with concrete. B. Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies: Firestopping used in conjunction with masonry. I C. Section 09260—Gypsum Board Assemblies: Firestopping in conjunction with Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber. I B. ASTM C804- Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. C. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute)- Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. I B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. I B. Applicator. Company and applicators specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. I1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 1 B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1 A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310. B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. I I 10-27-97 07840-1 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING I A. Fire Stopping Sealant: Synthetic Elastomer 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP25 or approved equal. 2.2 ACCESSORIES I A. Primer. Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner. Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: manufactured by 3M or approved equal. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturers instructions. , B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. ' D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. I 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. 1 B. Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/dept ratios. 1 D. Install joint backing. E. Apply firestopping within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Install firestopping free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Tool joints. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 10-27-97 07840-2 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 1 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01770. B. Protect sealants until cured. 1 ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 ' 10-27-97 07840-3 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 I 1 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS ' 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant, caulking, and backing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Sealants used in conjunction with concrete. B. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies: Sealants used in conjunction with masonry. ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D1056- Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber. B. ASTM C804-Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. C. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator. Company and applicators specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. ' C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after ' installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ' A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310. 10-27-97 07900-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 I III 1 B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 2.PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS , A. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component (two component at precast concrete), chemical curing, non- staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type for application in vertical joints and in horizontal joints, color as selected; manufactured by Pecora, Tremco, Sonnebom or approved equal for one component, and Sonnebom for two component. Elongation Capability 25 percent Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35 B. Silicone Sealant: Single component, fungus resistant, chemical curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non- bleeding, color as selected, manufactured by General Electric or approved equal. C. Fire Stopping Sealant: Synthetic Elastomer 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP25 or equal. ' 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer. Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. I B. Joint Cleaner. Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; manufactured by Sonnebom or approved equal. D. Bond Breaker. Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 1 3.EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings I and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. ' D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. I 10-27-97 07900-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS.Ltd. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. ' B. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/dept ratios. D. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. ' F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01770. iB. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ' A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.6 SCHEDULE Location Type A. Window and door frames, masonry Polyurethane. control joints,joints between dissimilar materials, and other joints. B. Horizontal joints in concrete. Polyurethane C. Bathroom accessories, sinks, etc. Silicone 1 END OF SECTION 1 10-27-97 07900-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 I . SECTION 08000 IDOOR SCHEDULE Mario Frame Door Door&Frame I TYPE MAT FINISH SIZE TYPE MAT FINISH IWidth X Height X Hardware NO. Paint Thickness Paint Rating Set Details REMARKS 001/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 314' A HM X 1 A10/A6.3 I 001/2 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 1 A10/A6.3 001/3 1 NM X 3'-0'X T-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 2 A10/A6.3 002/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 1 Al0/A6.3 002/2 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A ' HM X 1 A10/A6.3 I 01/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 4 C81A6.3 01/2 1 HM X 3-0'X T-0'X 1314' B HM X 4 C8/A6.3 24 x 12 Louver 02/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X T-0'X 1 3/4' A NM X 4 C8/A6.3 03/1 3 HM X 4'-0'X T-0'X 13/4' A HM X 3 C8/A6.3 I - 10/1 3 HM X 4'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 5 C8/A6.3 11/1 6 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 13/4' A HM X 6 C8/A6.3 12/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X T-0'X 13/4- B HM X 7 C8/A6.3 24 x 12 Louver 13/1 5 HM X 3'-0'X 6'-8'X 1 3/4' A HM X 5 " C8/A6.3 I 14/1 2 HM X 3'-6'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 5 C8/A6.3 15/1 3 HM X 4'-0'X T-0'X 1 3l4' B HM X 5 C8/A6.3 24 x 12 Louver 16/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 4 C8/A6.3 16/2 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0"X 1 3/4' B HM X 4 C8/A6.3 24 x 12 Louver 17/1 1 NM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 4 C8/A6.3 18/1 4 HM X 3'-0'X T-0'X 13/4' A HM X 3 C8/A6.3 18/2 4 NM X 3'-0'X TM X 1 3/4' A HM X 3 C8/A6.3 2311 1 HM X 3-0'X 7'-0'X 13/4' A HM X 5 C8/A6.3 I 24/1 1 HM X 3'-0'X 7'-0'X 1314' B HM X 5 C8/A6.3 24 x 12 Louver 2511 1 HM X 3-0'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' B HM X 5 C81A6.3 24 x 12 Lower 26/1 4 HM X 3-0'X T-0'X 1 3/4' B HM X 5 C8/A6.3 24 x 12 Louver 27/1 2 HM X 3'-6'X 7'-0'X 1 3/4' A HM X 5 C8/A6.3 I I I I I I I 10/27/97 08000-1 BVH Project#L97098 IBAHR VERMEER HAECKER ARCHITECTS • I SECTION 08110 I STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES I 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Non-rated and fire rated steel doors and frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. IB. Section 08000—Door Schedule. C. Section 08700—Hardware. ID. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors. 1.3 REFERENCES IA. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/SDI-100-Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1 I C. ASTM A525- Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. ID. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) -The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. IE. NFPA 80- Fire Doors and Windows. F. NFPA 252- Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. IG. UL 10B- Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. SUBMITTALS I1.4 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for i glazing and finish.C. Product Data: Indicate door and frame configurations, anchor types and spacings, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement. I D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. I I 10-27-97 08110-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Harney Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA I 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1. , 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B. , B. Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 111 B. Protect doors with resilient packaging. C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. , 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. , 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 2.PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR MANUFACTURERS A. Steelcraft Manufacturing, Inc. B. Ceco Corporation. 1 C. Curries Manufacturing. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Exterior Doors(Galvanized): SDI-100 Grade III, Model 2 (16 gauge). ' B. Exterior Frames: 14 Gauge thick galvanized material. C. Interior Doors(Galvanized): SDI-100 Grade III, Model 2 (16 gauge). D. Interior Frames: 14 Gauge thick galvanized material. , 1 10-27-97 08110-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Homey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 1 • 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION ' A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100, internally welded to steel stiffeners or bonded to rigid Styrofoam or polyurethane. ' B. Core: Stiffeners or Styrofoam at interior, polyurethane foam at exterior C. Vertical edges: minimum 14 gauge continuous channel (12ga at hinge edges). 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. B. Primer. Zinc chromate type. C. Louvers: provide integral louvers. 2.5 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate frames as welded unit type. B. Fabricate doors with continuous welded seams. ' C. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. Provide foam insulation where grouted frames must be penetrated with screws. Provide high frequency hinge reinforcing at the following doors and frames: 001/1, 001/2, 002/1, 002/2, 02/1, 03/1, ' 10/1, 13/1, 15/1, 17/1, 18/1, 18/2, 23/1, 24/1, 25/1, and 26/1. D. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single doors on strike side. E. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. F. Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. ' G. Configure exterior frames with special profile to receive weatherstripping. ' 2.6 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60. ' B. Primer: Epoxy. ' 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 1 ' 10-27-97 08110-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DHI. , B. Coordinate installation of anchorage, glass, and glazing. C. Install door and frame plumb and level. , D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware specified in Section 08700. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. I 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01770. 1 B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. C. Adjust hardware for smooth and balanced door movement. 1 END OF SECTION 111 1 1 1 i 1 10-27-97 08110-4 BVBH#97098 I BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 SECTION 08310 ' ACCESS DOORS 1. GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire resistive rated and non-rated access door and frame units. ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04800—Unit Board Assemblies. ' B. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in gypsum board. C. Section 09900—Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer fire rated access doors and frames to conform to UL requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. ' B. Include sizes,types,finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. ' 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. lnryco/Milcor. B. J.L. Industries. C. Karp Associates, Inc. ' D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 16 gauge steel and door panels of 14 gauge steel. Minimum size required is 24"x 24". B. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. ' C. Hardware: 175 degree steel hinges with non-removable pin and keyed flush lock. 2.3 FINISH A. Galvanized. I10-27-97 08310-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA • 1 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for door and frame area correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION , A. Install frames plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings. B. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. I C. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturers instructions. I END OF SECTION 1 r 1 1 I 1 10-27-97 08310-2 BVBH#97098 I BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA I SECTION 08330 IOVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1. GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES • A. Roll up metal overhead coiling doors with accessories;manual operation. I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies. I B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. C. Section 09260—Gypsum board Assemblies. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide opening sizes, details of grillage, track and hardware, attachments, related and adjacent I work, materials,and finishes. 2. PRODUCTS I2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Cookson Company. I B. Cornell Iron Works. C. Atlas. ID. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS I A. Rolling overhead coiling door shall be Type CD10-1 Push-Up with 22 gauge hot-dip galvanized steel No. 10 slat design and baked epoxy enamel paint finish as manufactured by The Cookson Company. 1. Hardware: Rolling counter door shall have slide bolt and padlock locking. I2.3 FINISH I A. Epoxy enamel paint on galvanized rolling counter door,color as selected. 1 I 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install counter door and grille in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. IB. Fit,align,and adjust door assembly level and plumb;provide smooth.operation. IEND OF SECTION I10-27-97 08330-1 . BVBH#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I 1 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 1:GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Hardware for interior and exterior doors. B. Thresholds and weatherstripping for exterior doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Hollow metal doors. 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI A115.2- Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. B. ANSI A115.4- Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. C. ANSI A115.13- Door and Frame Preparation for Tubular Deadlocks. D. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. E. ANSI A156.2- Locks and Lock Trim. ' F. ANSI A156.3- Exit Devices. G. ANSI A156.4- Door Controls(Closers). H. ANSI A156.6-Architectural Door Trim. I. ANSI A156.7-Template Hinges. J. ANSI A156.8- Door Controls(Overhead Holders). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The firm supplying the hardware shall employ a member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants or a consultant approved by the Architect for this project. ' B. The consultant shall be available during all phases of construction for consultation and technical assistance. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. ' B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 10-27-97 08700-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 1 C. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturer to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs for hardware. D. Indicate required style and finish. 1.6 KEYING I A. Door Locks: New Grand Master keying to existing Schlage system. B. Supply three keys for each lock. Supply three keys for each keyed group. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA I A. Provide Architect/Engineer with manufacturers parts list and maintenance instructions under provisions of Section 01330 for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. 2.PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this Section, complete to function as intended. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Item Specified Acceptable I Hinges Stanley Hager, McKinney Cylinders Schlage No Substitute Locks Russwin Schlage L90000X03 Closers Norton LCN 4040 EDA Overhead Stop Glynn Johnson Rixon Flat Goods&Stops Quality Rockwood, Ives Push Plate #40 X 4"X 16" US32D Pull Plate #40 X 4"X 14"X#163 X 10" US32D Kick Plate #48 x 10"x 2"LDW US32D Wall Stop #302 US32D Weatherstrip Pemko Reese B. Hardware finish shall be: 1. US32D satin stainless. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 3.EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, using proper templates. ' 10-27-97 08700-2 V H#97098 B & BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 I I IB. Mounting heights for doors shall heights conform to DHI recommended heights. C. Install all exterior thresholds in full bed of caulking. I 3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware Set#1 ,I 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB199 4.5 x 4.5 ML2211 NRP US32D 1 Each Deadlock 630 1 1 Each Mortise Cylinder 626 I 1 _ Each Push Plate 1 Each Kickplate 1 Each Wall Stop 1 IHardware Set#2 1 I 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB191 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1 Each Lockset ML2257 LWA 630 1 Each Mortise Cylinder 626 1 Each Wall Stop 111 Hardware Set#3 I1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB199 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB199 5 x 4.5 US32D 1 Each Lockset ML2255 LWA 630 I 1 Each Mortise Cylinder 626 1 Each Closer PR7500H BF AL 1 Each Kickplate 1 Each Wall Stop Hardware Set#4 I .5 Pairs Hinges FBB191 4.5x 4.5 US32 1 Each Lockset ML2251 LWA 630 1 Each Mortise Cylinder 626 I 1 Each Closer PR7500BF AL 1 Each Closer PR7500H BF AL 1 Each Closer CLP7500 BF AL 1 Each Kickplate 1 Each Wall Stop I 10-27-97 08700-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA I 1 Hardware Set#5 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB191 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB191 5 x 4.5 US32D 1 Each Lockset ML2255 LWA 630 1 Each Mortise Cylinder 626 1 Each Wall Stop 1 Each Overhead Stop 450H US26D I Hardware Set#6 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB191 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1 I Each Lockset ML2251 LWA 630 1 Each Mortise Cylinder 626 Each Wall Stop Hardware Set#7 1.5 Pairs Hinges FBB191 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1 Each Privacy ML2230 LWA 630 1 Each Wall Stop I END OF SECTION I I I 10-27-97 08700-4 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA I , i SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Glass and glazing for windows, doors, and frames. 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. B. Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. ASTM E84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM C1036-Standard specifications for Flat Glass. D. FS DD-G-1403 - Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered). E. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing(Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). F. FS TT-S-230 - Sealing Compound: Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction. G. FS TT-S-1543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). H. FGMA-Glazing Manual. I. 1994 Uniform Building Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Glazing shall comply with 1994 Uniform Building Code Safety Requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS. A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Provide data on glazing sealant. Identify colors available. 111 D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. E. Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inches in size, illustrating color of each glass for approval. 10-27-97 08800-1 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD • f 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION I A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 1 B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide ten year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01770. B. Warranty: Include coverage of sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. Libby-Owens-Ford Co. B. PPG Ind., Inc., Glass Division. C. Viracon. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float or Plate Glass-Type G-1: Clear; glazing select quality, Y.inch thick minimum. 1 B. Safety Glass-Type G-2: Clear; glazing select fully tempered, '/, inch thick minimum. C. Mirror Glass - Type G-3: Clear tempered safety type with copper and silver coating; organic overcoating, square ground edges, %"thick. 2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Silicone Sealant: Single component, chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding; non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color selected by Architect/Engineer. 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4 inch long x 3/8 inch wide x 1/4 inch high. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene; 50 Shore A durometer hardness; 3 inch long x 1/4 inch wide x 1/4 inch thick. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed neoprene compound; 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper. D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinylchloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 10-27-97 08800-2 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.3 EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED GLAZING) A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glass pane. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane. D. Install removable stops without displacement of glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.4 EXTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sightline. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bed of butyl sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with pane. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. 111 D. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane. E. Install removable stops, spacer strips inserted between glass, and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sightline. Place glazing tape on glass with tape 1/4 inch below sightline. F. Fill gap between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on pane, but not more than 3/8 inch below sightline. G. Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform line, flush with sightline. Tool or wipe sealant surface with solvent for smooth appearance. 3.5 INTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sightline. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glass, and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sightline. E. Fill gap between pane and applied stop with type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on pane to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 10-27-97 08800-3 BVBH#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I • 3.6 INSTALLATION-MIRRORS A. Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturers instructions. I B. Place plumb and level without visible distortion 3.7 CLEANING A. After installation, mark pane with an"X"by using plastic tape or removable paste. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after work is completed. 3.8 GLASS SCHEDULE GLAZING TYPE LOCATION Type G-1 (Clear Float) Interior Transoms, Interior Windows Type G-2(Tempered, Clear) Interior doors, interior windows per safety code, interior sidelights Type G-3 (Mirror) Lavatory Area - See drawings for locations 1 END OF SECTION I I Cl I I 10-27-97 08800-4 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD I I I . H co ^ CO i, ;LL il h O m ° 7 b b b b b b b W W WQ b b b Q WQ W WQ b W b tQ b b b b b b b w w wQ WQ = a W W O O O ' ' ' • ' ; 0 0 0 ; ; O 5 O ; 0 0 0 O O O co a X X ; co co H ti ^ H .= .= ti H I= ti ti ti ti ti VYVY Y `dY Y VVV YYV f f NNN WWW NNN WWW 11 I m N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 4 a d 6 C d d d d a 6 d d 0. d W W W W W W W W W W W W W W N ; nnnnnn •- - NNNN ^ N ! . ^ . .. ► � NNN nn W dddddd ddd 0d ddddd ddd r. ddd. dddd W F 3 '� W W W W W W W W W U U U U W U W W W W W W W W U U U W W W W W W W 'lip • I w g yay W i }( m CD n n n n n en el' ' ' n • • n n n n n • • 'n n n n n • • • n O rf 'n rf n n � 8 _ D f H W Z W y Yl n n n n N N N .� N N N N MM u .Y- d a d d d d d d d d d 0 0 0 d O d d d d d d d d d .- .= d d d d d d d c°S U W d C - W W W W W W W W W U U U W U W W W W W W W W W U U U W W W W W W W Q n n I I I I enn n n • • • I • nnn • • • n n n n • • • n . . . . . . 3 7 n n n n . N N N N N N N N Me? 2 " WWWWW WWWWUUUWUWWWWWWWWWUUUUWWWWWWW Ow�fz W 0 a s Z W W j 4 =2 mamma n n n n • • • n • n n n r5 rf .n n n n n • • • n rf . . . . . U W a a. '' i n '!1 n n n N N N N N N n n W W WI ¢ ? z " W W W W W WWuo u W W W W W W d. W W W W U U U W W W W W W Wm 0 D 8 R u c� W Q ri i ri r n n n n n n n n n • • • n n n n n r n n n n n • • • n . . . . . . _ Q ~ii A N X XX X X X X X Z rs m O s O fO h' r h HhrrH W 0 UUUU 0 U U UUUUUO U m 2 C' 1' K R' C C C C K C d' K K K O O X X X X X K X X X X X X X ct I u 4 s ' `° ' S �' U V O D U U U U U U U U U I a 1 a v I O aaa a as aaa a V U U U U U u u U U u U R m V Y 7 V o r E o• E S C 26 . 60 U 4 - e 8 C 6 (� Yu O as 'a c p 4 s i g g E LL »> G7 J J j F y ti 4,0 m _ 1eo r� 1p 1p q �pp p� 8888888 O O O S_8 O O_O O ° ' Nfr n • O rJ n 0 O' R N N N X N g N N R' I I Rosenblatt Stadium Acoustical Ceiling Tile: I 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom ACT-1 Celotex/Hytone—Gibralter-IRP-157 White/ 24'x 24'x 5/8'/Trim Edge Detail. Renovations Grid: 15/16'standard white. Materials List: Plastic Laminate: Carpet: CPT-1 RCM International/Poly weave/Roll (Note: 2 week lead time on plastic laminates Form/Color-#2 Blue/Gray. Contractor no substitutions will be accepted.) should reserve amount needed 3 months in advance of installation date. PL-1 Wilsonart O307Y—60 Hollyberry Splash Ceramic Tile: CT-1 Crossville Ceramics-Cross Plus-#A830 Rubber Base: I Atlantic Grey CP1: 8'x 8'(7 3/4'x 7 3/4'). RB-1 Johnsonite Rubber 4'/#CB-18/Navy Blue Grout: Custom Building Products#165, Delorean Grey(Floor Tile). Solid Surface/Lavatory: SS-1 Cohan Solid Surface—Color. Magna. I CT-2 Crossville Ceramics-Unpolished-#A830 Mediterranean with 815A/S seamed Atlantic Grey UP1: 8'x 8'(7 3/4'x 7 3/4'). undermount lavatories. Grout: Custom Building Products#165, Delorean Grey(Wall Field Tile). Toilet Partitions -Metal: Global Steel Products/Door#2145 Red CT-3 Crossville Ceramics-Unpolished-#160 Support&Sides#2151 Yellow. Adriatic Blue UPII: 8'x 8'(7 3/4'x 7 3/4'). Grout: Custom Building Products#165, Toilet Partitions—Filled Acrylic: Delorean Grey(Wall Accent Tile). Cohan—integrated Toilet Partitions. Color-Magna Mediterranean. CT-4 Crossville Ceramics-Unpolished-#A210 Glacier, UP1: 8'x 8'(7 3/4'x 7 3/4'). Grout: Custom Building Products#165, Delorean Grey(Wall Accent Tile). CT-5 Crossville Ceramics-Unpolished-#A830 1 Atlantic Grey UP1:6"x 8"cove base. Grout: Custom Building Products#165, Delorean Grey. ' CT-6 Crossville Ceramics—Cross Colors Mosaics —Cross Sheen#A583 Windsurf UPS: 3'x 3'(2 3/4'x 2 3/4').At all showers. I Paint: P-1 / EP-1 Match Benjamin Moore#1093. 1 P-2/ EP-2 Rosenblatt White(to match existing). P-3/ I EP-3 Rosenblatt Gray(to match existing). E-4/ EP-4 Rosenblatt Blue(to match existing). Stain: S-1 Contractor to match sample provided by architect. Contractor must submit stain sample to architect for approval. 10/27/97 • 09000-2 BVH#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS I I SECTION 09220 IPORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER FINISH 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Plaster finish,two coat application over cement board. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1 A. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 REFERENCES I, A. ANSI/ASTM C587-Gypsum Veneer Plaster. , I B. ANSI/ASTM C631 -Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering. C. ANSI/ASTM C843-Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster. ID. ANSI/ASTM E90-Laboratory Measurement of Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. E. ANSI/ASTM E119-Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1 F. GA 150-Application of Gypsum Base for Gypsum Veneer Plasters and Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster. G. GA 216-Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. I1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. 1 B. Product Data: Provide data on veneer plaster products. C. Samples: Submit two sample panels,36 x 36 inch in size illustrating veneer finish and texture to match samples Iavailable at Architect's office. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. I1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: I1. Apply gypsum veneer plaster in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C843. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to 1994 Uniform Building Code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Section 09260. I I10-27-97 09220-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 I I 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply veneer plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor more than 80 degrees F; for 24 hours prior to, during operations and after, until building heating system can maintain the above minimum temperature. 2. PRODUCTS 111 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. United States Gypsum Company. B. Substitutions:Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cement Board: Fire rated, 1/2 inch thick,square edges,ends square, USG Durock. Tape all joints. I B. Durock screws: 1-1/2", 8"o.c. C. Gypsum Board Metal Accessories: Minimum 20-gauge,3-1/2"metal studs. D. Reinforcing Tape,Joint Compound: U.S.Gypsum Perf-A-Tape and Durabond joint compound. I E. Bond Coat ANSI/ASTM C631,vinyl polymer type. F. Basecoat: USG Diamond basecoat plaster. I G. Smooth Finish Coat: USG Portland cement finish plaster. 2.3 MIX DESIGN A. Develop plaster mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01310. B. Verify cement board substrate is flat,joints are taped and sanded, and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place. C. Verify cement board base has been installed in accordance with ASTM C844, is flat, smooth and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of dust or loose matter. B. Remove projections greater than 1/8 inch and fill depressions greater than 1/4 inch with Portland cement mortar. 10.27-97 09220-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I I. . I C. Apply bond coat to prepare cement board surfaces within 1 hour of veneer plaster application. Apply in Iaccordance with manufacturers instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION-CEMENT BOARD I A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Install cement board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I C. Use Durock screws(1-1/2")to fasten board to framing substrate at 8"o.c. I D. Single Layer: 1. Erect fire rated cement board in direction most practical and economical, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 2. At furred partition faces, place 4 inch wide strip of cement board,same thickness as furring,at perimeter of wall openings and partition. E. Tape, fill, and sand filled joints, edges, corners, openings, and fixings to produce surface ready to receive I veneer finish. . F. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that joint camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.4 APPLICATION-VENEER PLASTER A. veneerplaster in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply cc 1 B. Dampen surfaces without visible water on surface,to minimize suction from veneer plaster materials. C. Apply Two Coats: I 1. After bond coat application,apply base coat to a thickness of 1/8 inches. 2. Apply final coat over slightly green, almost dry base coat,to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3. Total Thickness: 3/16 inch. 1 D. Finish surface to rough,textured finish to match existing,hard trowel finish. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES IA. Maximum Variation From Specified Thickness: Plus or minus 1/64 inch. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK IA. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Do not permit traffic near unprotected finished surfaces. 1 3.7 SCHEDULES IA. Apply to all surfaces indicated including ceilings and walls. END OF SECTION I10-27-97 09220-3 BV8H it97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER.ARCHITECTS.LTD. I SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal channel ceiling framing. B. Gypsum board. C. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies. B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood framing system. C. Section 07200- Thermal Protection: Thermal insulation. D. Section 08110-Standard Steel Doors and Frames. ' E. Section 09900- Paints and Coatings: Surface finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36-Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C79-Gypsum Sheathing Board. C. ASTM C475-Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. D. ASTM C630-Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. E. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C754- Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. H. ASTM C840-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. I. ASTM C1002- Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. IJ. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. K. ASTM E119- Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. L. GA-201 -Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. M. GA-216- Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. N. GA-600- Fire Resistance Design Manual. 111 10-27-97 09260-1 BVSH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER.ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustical seals. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, acoustical insulation, and sealants. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Building Code and UL Laboratories for fire rated assemblies. 1 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS-GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. U. S. Gypsum. B. Gold Bond. C. Georgia Pacific. 1 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Furring, Framing and Accessories: Hot-dip galvanized GA-216 and GA-600. B. Fasteners: GA-216. 111 C. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. D. Adhesive: GA-216. I 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Fire-Rated Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; fire-resistant type, UL rated, 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; tapered edges. B. Cementitious Backing Board: Fire-Rated, High density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners; Durock manufactured by U. S. Gypsum or Wonderboard. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; manufactured by U. S. Gypsum. B. Corner Beads: Metal; use vinyl at exterior and soffit. I C. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type L and at exposed reveal bead. Use USG200 series or equivalent. Series 400 trim is not acceptable. Use vinyl at exterior and soffit. D. Joint Materials: GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape,joint compound, adhesive, and water. E. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA-216. Use non-corrosive at exterior and soffit. F. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads with 4 mil clear polyethylene air seal manufactured by USG. I 10-27-97 09260-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I I I G. Expansion Joints: Superior SEJ Series by Delta Star, Inc. unvented galvanized steel for 1" expansion. Use vinyl at exterior. 3. EXECUTION III 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop 1 drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. I3.2 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. I C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. I D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels,with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. t3.3 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1. Metal Framing: Two beads. I 2. Base Layer. 3. Face Layer. 4. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, and rough-in boxes. I3.4 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600. IB. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically,with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. C. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. ID. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. E. Double Layer Applications: Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. F. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. G. Erect exterior gypsum soffit board perpendicular to supports,with staggered end joints over supports. II H. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. 1 I. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated and as directed. I 10-27-97 09260-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I length. Place edge trim where gypsum J. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practicalg g board abuts dissimilar materials. K. Install backing board over metal studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M 3.5 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Tape and fill joints and corners of cementitious backing board. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. I END OF SECTION I I r i I I I I I 10-27-97 09260-4 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I SECTION 09300 TILE 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile floor, base and walls finish using mortar set application method for floors and the thinset application method for walls. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Trowelling of floor slab for tile application. B. Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 09000-Room Finish Schedule. D. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/TCA A108.4- Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water-Resistant Organic Adhesives. B. ANSI/TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSUTCA A108.10- Installation of Grout in Tilework. D. ANSI/TCA A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. E. ANSI/TCA A118.4-Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI/TCA A118.6- Ceramic Tile Grouts. G. ANSI/TCA A136.1 -Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2. H. ANSI/TCA A137.1 -Specifications for Ceramic Tile. I. TCA(Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples of colors selected under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit shop drawings indicating patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials. C. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01330. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 10-27-97 09300-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 1 r 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. r B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS-TILE A. Ceramic Tile See Room Finish Schedule for color and grout selections. 111 2.2 TILE MATERIAL A. Ceramic Tile: ANSI/TCA 137.1, conforming to the following: Moisture Absorption 0.5 to 3.0 percent See Section 09000 Room Finish Schedule for tile selected including manufacturer size and color selected. . B. Base: Square top edge if tile above, coved internal corner; bullnose top if not tile above. 2.3 ADHESIVE MATERIALS 1 A. Adhesive: ANSI/TCA A136.1, dryset mortar,thinset bond type. Use exterior grade at exterior. 2.4 GROUT MATERIALS I A. Grout: Cementitious type with latex additive. Use exterior grade at exterior. B. Color Admixture: Cementitious type, color as selected. I 2.5 GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion pre-mix grout materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2.6 MEMBRANE A. Membrane: Waterproof membrane - Hydroment/Bostik Ultra-Set. Provide at structural slabs where finish space is below. Turn up at wall a minimum of 8 inches. 2.7 SEALER I A. Non-silicone sealer recommended by ceramic tile and grout manufacturers. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate. 111 10-27-97 09300-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS.LTD. r 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Apply sealer/conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION—MORTAR BED METHOD—AT FLOORS A. Install mortar bed, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to TCA Handbook. B. Install cleavage membrane; lap and seal watertight edges and ends. C. Apply mortar bed over concrete surfaces to a thickness of 1-1/4 inches. D. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. E. Place edge strips at exposed tile edges. F. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Ensure finish trim will cover cut tile edges. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. G. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep expansion and control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints. J. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. K. Grout tile joints. L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.4 INSTALLATION—THINSET METHOD—AT WALLS A. Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Handbook requirements for exterior and interior. B. Install waterproof membrane at structural slabs. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Provide transition edge strips at material changes. D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints. E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. ' F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 10-27-97 09300-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 1 i • I. Grout tile joints. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. I K. Apply sealer as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01770. B. Clean tile surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface. 3.7 SCHEDULE A. See Room Finish Schedule Section 09000. END OF SECTION 1 I I 1 t 1 I 1 I 10-27-97 09300-4 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I I . 1 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1. GENERAL I1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. I B. Acoustical tile and panels. C. Non-fire rated and fire rated assembly. I D. Perimeter trim. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS I A. Section 09000- Room Finish Schedule. B. Section 09260—Gypsum Board Assemblies. C. Division 15- Mechanical: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. D. Division 16- Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. I - 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635- Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. I B. ASTM C636- Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. C. FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets,Thermal Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures. I D. UL- Underwriter's Laboratories System Ratings. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 111 A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assembly. 1.5 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. IC. Provide product data on metal grid system components, and acoustic units. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING IA. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,tested, and approved. IB. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. I10-27-97 09510-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Harney Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE, Pasadena,CA 1 I 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra quantity of acoustic units under provisions of Section 01770. I B. Provide 20 extra tile. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. U.S.G./Donn DX Series 9/16" Grid or 15/16" Standard Grid as selected in Room Finish Schedule; Color. White. B. Chicago Metallic Company- equal to above. I C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS 1 A. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non-fire rated exposed T components die cut and interlocking. B. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips where required for suspended grid system. C. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. D. Support Channels and Hangers: Primed steel; size and type to suit application,to rigidly secure acoustic 111 ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-ACOUSTIC UNITS A. See Room Finish Schedule for selections. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 3. EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. I B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. I 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturers instructions and as supplemented in this Section. B. Install fire rated system in accordance with requirements. C. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 10-27-97 09510-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE, Pasadena,CA I I . d pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are E. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, p p s ny g spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 1 F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. IG. Center system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plan. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each I corner, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. J. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and I function. L. Cut tile to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of reveal or tegular units. M. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. I N. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. O. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system in rated ceilings, and vestibules. I P. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. Variation Members Caused byEccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. B. from Plumb of Grid g 1 3.4 SCHEDULE A. See Section 09000 Room Finish Schedule for location of acoustical tile ceilings. I END OF SECTION I I I 1 I 10-27-97 09510-3 BVSH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Harney Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE, Pasadena,CA 1 SECTION 09650 ' RESILIENT FLOORING 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Preparation of substrate surfaces. ' B. Application of rubber base. C. Cleaning of all surfaces and areas of work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finish trowelling of floor slab. B. Section 04800—Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 09000- Room Finish Schedule. B. Section 09260- Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 REFERENCES A. FS SS-T-312-Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. B. FS SS-W-40-Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Describe floor pattern, scaled design, color of various materials, and location of floor accessories. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F air temperature at flooring installation area for three,days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation. B. Store flooring materials in area of application. Allow three days for material to reach equal temperature as area. 1 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver 50 sq. ft. of each color and pattern of floor tile and 25 ft. of base material required for project, for maintenance use. B. Clearly identify each box or roll. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Johnsonite. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. I 10-27-97 09650-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 2.2 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: Conforming to FS SS-W-40,Type II rubber;top set coved, toeless, at carpet 4 inch high, 1/8 inch thick including premolded end stops and external corners. Colors: See Room Finish Schedule for color selections. 2.3 ACCESSORIES/ADHESIVES/SEALERS A. Edge Strips: 1 or 2 inch wide type; 1/8 inch thick; color selected by Architect. B. Sub-Floor Filler. White premix latex, mix with water to produce cementitious paste. I C. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material. D. Sealer and Wax: Type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for material type and location. 3. EXECUTION I 3.1 INSPECTION A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 7 percent moisture content). 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks,joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. 3.3 INSTALLATION- BASE A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. Use premolded sections for external corners and exposed ends. C. Install base on solid backing. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION I 10-27-97 09650-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I SECTION 09680 CARPET 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prepare surfaces to receive carpet. B. Apply glue down carpet on floor, and base surfaces where indicated, complete with required accessories. C. Install edge strips where carpet terminates at other floor finishes. ' D. Install carpet tiles, loose laid. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finish trowelling of concrete floor slabs. B. Section 09000- Room Finish Schedule. C. Section 09650- Resilient Flooring: Base. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. ASTM E84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. ' B. Clearly indicate the location of all seams, method of joining seams, direction of carpet, type of adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet, and installation procedures. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. ' D. Submit one sample of each type of carpet to be used, sufficiently sized to clearly indicate construction. In addition,submit one duplicate sample of each color selected. ' E. Also submit one sample of edge stripping. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work,tested, approved, and completed. B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 70 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation, and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained. C. Provide sufficient lighting. 1 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of 01770. B. Provide 10% carpet material to Owner. 10-27-97 09680-1 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. See Section 09000, Room Finish Schedule. - B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 2.2 MATERIALS A. See Section 09000, Room Finish Schedule for selections. B. Adhesive: Carpet manufacturers EPA-approved adhesive to suit application, expected service, and warranty. Other manufacturers adhesive is not acceptable. C. Edge Strips: Rubber, color as selected. 3. EXECUTION , 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly dry. B. Ensure floors are level,with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative. C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity. D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes, and for leveling. 1 E. Installer must examine the substrate, and the conditions under which the carpeting is to be installed, and notify the Architect in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. B. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect/Engineer approval. ' C. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots. D. Cut carpet,where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. E. Cut carpet tile using only procedures recommended by the carpet tile manufacturer. Cut from back side of carpet only. Use sharp scissors to cut loop pile after backing has been cut. All cut edges of carpet shall be coated or buttoned with seaming cement to seal edge. F. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. G. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease it life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. H. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer after primer application to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. 1 10-27-97 09680-2 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 111 1 I. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. J. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. K. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. L. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps. M. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive is set. N. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subflobr, well fastened at edges, and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern, and texture, including lay of pile match, within any one area. O. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt ' tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces using commercial machine with rotating agitator in the nozzle. ' Remove soiled spots. C. Protect the carpet. END OF SECTION • 1 1 1 1 10-27-97 09680-3 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha,NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA i 1 SECTION 09900 ' PAINTS AND COATINGS 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications: Shop primed items. iB. Section 06200- Finish Carpentry. C. Section 08110- Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. Division 15- Mechanical: Prefinished mechanical equipment. 1 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16- Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016-Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. NPCA(National Paint and Coatings Association)- Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. ' D. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America)-Painting-Architectural Specifications Manual. E. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. i1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. .Product Data: Provide complete paint schedule indicating surfaces, number of coats, product to be ' used, and gloss rating. Provide data on all finishing products. C. Samples: Submit three samples, 8 1/2 x 11 inches in size illustrating selected colors and textures for each color selected. ' D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention. i 1 10-27-97 09900-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln.NE-Pasadena,CA I • 1 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator. Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years ' documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING , A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. ' C. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Relative humidity shall be no higher than 75% and the dew point of the surface shall be at least 5 degrees above the dew point. B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. ' D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F.; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. I 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01770. B. Provide 1 gallon of each color, type, and surface texture to Owner. I C. Label each container with color,type,texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. 10-27-97 09900-2 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Harney Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 I . 1 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers-Epoxy and Special Coatings ' 1. Tnemec Company, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE THE TOP QUALITY AVAILABLE FROM EACH MANUFACTURER. B. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing ' properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. D. All materials shall be the top quality available from each manufacturer. E. Patching Materials: Latex filler. F. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to finish schedule on Drawings for surface finish and color schedule. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions. ' B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. ' E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. ' 10-27-97 09900-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. C. Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. ' F. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. H. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, , scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. I. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. , J. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. K. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. L. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand_lightly between coats. M. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, I pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. N. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with complete primer and finish coats. 3.3 PROTECTION I A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 10-27-97 09900-4 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Harney Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 ' B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. ' D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. ' G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required,tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. J. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss III varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Divisions for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. C. Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items noted on Drawings. D. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. ' E. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 1 10-27-97 09900-5 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 1 H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and-telephone equipment before installing equipment. I. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. ' J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed when required by Architect/Engineer. I 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01770. ' B. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. C. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. D. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.8 SCHEDULE- EXTERIOR SURFACES , A. Steel- Unprimed: 1. Sandblast- SSPC-SP6. 2. One coat of Tnemec 90-97, 2 1/2 mils dry. 1. Two coats of Tnemec, Series 73, 2 mils dry per coat, gloss. B. Steel- Shop Primed: 111 1. Touch-up with Tnemec 90-97 primer-2 1/2 mils dry. 2. Two coats of Tnemec, Series 73, 2 mils dry per coat, gloss. C. Steel-Galvanized: , 1. Sand and solvent wipe surfaces. 2. One coat galvanize primer,Tnemec, 2 mils dry, gloss. 3. Two coats of Tnemec, Series 73, 2 mils dry per coat, gloss. 3.9 SCHEDULE- INTERIOR SURFACES A. Concrete Floors-Sealed Concrete: ' 1. For areas noted on finish schedule. 2. L& M"Seal Hard" penetrating sealer. B. Concrete Block: Epoxy Paint (EP) 1. One coat Tnemec 54-660 Masonry Filler(80-100 SF/Gallon). 2. Two coats Tnemec Series 113,Tnemec-Tuf Coat, satin, 3 mils dry per coat. 111 10-27-97 09900-6 BV8H#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Hamey Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 ' C. Steel Unprimed: 1. Sandblast- SSPC-SP6. 2. One coat of Tnemec 90-97, 2 1/2 mils dry. 3. One coat of Tnemec, Series 73, 2 to 3 mils dry per coat,gloss. D. Steel-Shop Primed: 1. Touch-up with Tnemec 90-97 primer-2 1/2 mils dry. ' 2. One coat of Tnemec, Series 73, 2 to 3 mils dry per coat, gloss. E. Steel-Galvanized: 111 1. Sand and solvent wipe all surfaces. 2. One coat galvanize primer,Tnemec, Series 66, 2 to 3 mils dry, gloss. 3. One coat of Tnemec, Series 73, 2 to 3 mils dry per coat, gloss. ' F. Insulated Coverings-Canvas and Cotton: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. One coat of alkyd enamel, eggshell. II G. Gypsum Board and Portland Cement Plaster: 1. One coat of 51-792 PVA Sealer and P.C. Plaster, 1.5 mills dry per coat. 2. Two coats of Tnemec Series 113, Tnemec TufCoat, Satin, 3 mils dry per coat. i3.10 SCHEDULE- COLORS IA. See Room Finish Schedule for finishes and colors. 1 END OF SECTION I 1 1 10-27-97 09900-7 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd.,1209 Harney Street,Omaha NE 68102 (402)345-3060 - Lincoln,NE-Pasadena,CA 1 1 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1. GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tackboards. ' B. Trim and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04800—Masonry Assemblies. ' B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood grounds. C. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions,joint locations, special anchor details. C. Product Data: Provide data on markerboards,tackboards, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of markerboard and tackboard surfacing. I 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Greensteel. B. Claridge. ' C. Egan Visual Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. ' 2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS A. Tackboard: Equal to Claridge 1/4" natural cork bulletin board (2-1/2 #/sf) on 1/4" burlap on hardboard for a total thickness of W. Use manufacturers standard aluminum trim. 1 10-27-97 10100-1 BV8H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER 8.HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions. B. Verify that wall is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install unit with concealed fasteners in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Establish bottom of perimeter frame at 36 inches above finished floor. ' C. Secure units level and plumb. 3.3 CLEANING 1 A. Clean work under provisions of 01770. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Cover markerboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. D. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. 3.4 SCHEDULE I A. See Drawings for types and quantities. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1 10-27-97 10100-2 BV&H#M97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. 1 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS ' 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments, floor mounted, head rail braced. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and supports. ' D. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies. ' E. Section 10800-Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES ' A. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act. B. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by IPhysically Handicapped People C. ANSI/ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality. ' D. ASTM A167-Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. ' B. Indicate on shop drawings, partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall, floor ceiling supports, and door swings. ' C. Provide product data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. ' E. Submit two samples illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. B. Sanymetal. ' C. Global. 10-27-97 10160-1 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. D. All American Metal Corporation. E. general Partitions Manufacturing Corp. F. Hadrian Manufacturing Corp. , G. Metpar Corp. H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS ' A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A526,with G90 zinc coating. B. Head Rails: Extruded Aluminum, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel;tamper proof type; heavy duty extruded aluminum 111 brackets. D. Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; ADA approved latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper, cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. 2.3 FABRICATION , A. Fabricate components of steel sheet as follows: 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage. 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage. B. Doors and Panels: One inch thick by 24 inch wide by 58 inch high, sheet steel face, pressure bonded to sound deadening core; 36 inch wide door, swinging out on stalls for handicapped use. C. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch thick, constructed same as doors, of sizes required to suit cubicle width and spacing. D. Pilaster Shoes: One piece formed 304 stainless steel with satin finish. E. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Form and close edges, miter and weld corners, grind smooth. 1 G. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHING A. Clean,degrease and neutralize panels. ' B. Follow with a phosphatizing treatement, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel of colors as selected by Architect, see Finish Schedule. 1 10-27-97 10160-2 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. IB. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required. 1 D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 1 B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. ID. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through sleeve tamper proof through bolts and nuts. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. I E. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. IF. Equip each door with two hinges, one door latch, one coat hook and bumper. G. Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. I H. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return outswing doors to closed position. 3.3 ADJUSTING I A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove protective maskings. Clean surfaces. IB. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. C. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. END OF SECTION 1 I I I 10-27-97 10160-3 BV&H#97098 IBAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. SECTION 10170 FILLED ACRYLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor-mounted filled acrylic toilet partitions. B.. Attachment hardware. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04800—Masonry Assemblies. B. Section 09000-Room Finish Schedule. C. Section 09300-Tile. D. Section 10800-Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by the Physically Handicapped. B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shopdrawings under provisions of Section 01330. 9 B. Submit shop drawings indicating partition layout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door swings, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes. C. Submit product data for components, hardware, and accessories. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. E. Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and applicable code for provisions for the physically handicapped. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 3-year warranty against defects in fabricated products. 10-27-97 10170-1 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. t 2. PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Corian Partitions by ShowerShapes. I B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Specified Product: Corian Partitions by ShowerShapes. B. Material: Homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite osite 9 rYP construction; meeting ANSI Z124.3 and .6, Type Six, and Federal Specification WW-P- 541 E-GEN. 1. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified in the following paragraph D. 2. superficial damage to a depth of 0.010"shall be repairable by sanding. C. Toilet Partitions: Panels of 1/2"thick Corian, color as selected. Pilasters of 1' Corian. Pilasters to attach at floor. All mounting hardware to be internally mounted in panels and pilasters and to be concealed after assembly of partitions. Door latch and striker to be exposed. D. Performance requirements to meet or exceed Corian specifications. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non-porous joints,with a chemical bond. (Ref: Technical Bulletin: CTDC 102) B. Coat hooks made of Corian shall be provided by Shower Shapes. 2.4 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Stainless steel type 304 pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning, nylon bearings. B. Latch and Keeper: Stainless steel type 304 door latch to meet ADA requirements, door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Pre-fabricated components to be purchased from a Corian distributor. B. Components shall be fabricated in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and DuPont requirements. (Ref: I Technical Bulletin: CTDC-117) C. Joints between components shall be formed using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. D. Dispensers, grab rails, and coat hooks shall be mounted using "T" nuts or adhesives as indicated on the installation drawings provided by the Shower Shapes. E. Component edges shall have a smooth, uniform finish. Defective or inaccurate work shall be repaired or replaced. 10-27-97 10170-2 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. IF. Finish: All surfaces shall have uniform semigloss finish with a gloss rating of 20-40. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. P B. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. 1 C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures. ID. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 ERECTION 1 A. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. IB. Install partition components secure, plumb and level. Attachpanel brackets securelyto walls and floors usingappropriate anchor devices. C. ID. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. E. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. IF. Equip each toilet stall door with top and bottom hinges, and door latch. 1 G. Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. H. Equip each toilet stall door with one coat hook and bumper. I3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb or Level: 1/8 inch. I'I B. Maximum Misplacement From Intended Position: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING IA. Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors. Clearance space not to exceed 3/16 inch. I B. Adjust door hinges so that free movement is attained and will locate in-swinging doors in partial open position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01770. 1 B. Remove protective coverings. C. Clean surfaces and hardware. I 10-27-97 10170-3 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. I 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Field touch-up of finished surfaces will not be permitted. Replace damaged ' components. I END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I I I I 10-27-97 10170-4 BV&H#97098 Bahr Vermeer&Haecker Architects, Ltd. 1 I I SECTION 10400 IIDENTIFYING DEVICES 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Signs. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 04800-Masonry Assemblies B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit shop drawings showing sign layout, lettering, locations, construction details, and overall dimensions of each sign or graphic. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING I, A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. I1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70 degrees F. Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs. I2. PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNS A. Provide exterior and interior sign and associated accessories as indicated on the Drawings, for a complete finished system. I B. Provide box type back lighted signs approximately 4'-8"wide x 1'-0"high to match existing right field concourse. Box type back lighted signs shall have international symbol for accessibility. Signs shall be located as per Elevation on Sheet A6.3 I B. Provide Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) compliant with minimum 5/8" cap height tactile text, raised minimum 1/32" - Full Caps, Grade 2 Braille - and contrasting background uniformly sized signs be of SPE unframed acrylic: plaque face only-no backplate by ASI Sign Systems, Inc., colors as selected by Architect. Signs shall be for exterior or interior use. II Signs shall be as follows("/"indicates separate sign on each side of door): I10-27-97 10400-1 BVH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS.Ltd. I . Door Number Sian Wording 001/1 Male-wittl6"height pictogram and International Symbol of Accessibility 002/1 Female-with 6"height pictogram and International Symbol of Accessibility 003/1 Omaha Royals Clubhouse with Royals Logo 01/1 Manager,with Royals Logo 02/1 Coaches Lockers with Royals Logo 10/1 Training,with Royals Logo 11/1 Trainer,with Royals Logo 13/1 Equipment 14/1 Mechanical 15/1 Laundry 16/1 Manager 17/1 Coaches Lockers 18/1 Visitors Clubhouse 18/2 Visitors Lockers 111 23/1 Training 24/1 Trainer Equipment 25/1 Laundry Equipment 111 26/1 Equipment 27/1 Mechanical 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all mounting hardware as required or as indicated on Drawings. 3. EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install all signage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Drawings. Verify all locations with Architect. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished,in locations indicated and as directed. C. Level all signage. S D. Clean and polish. END OF SECTION I 10-27-97 10400-2 BVH#97098 I BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER ARCHITECTS,Ltd. I 1 • _ ISECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES I1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Fire extinguishers. B. Cabinets. IC. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS IA. Section 04800- Masonry Assemblies B. Section 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings. IC. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish. 1.3 REFERENCES IA. NFPA 10- Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE illA. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. 1.5 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounted Imeasurements, anchorage details, rough-in measurements, location, and details. C. Submit manufacturers installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturers operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770. I B. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re-certification requirements including requirements applicable to the Work. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS IA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. 2. PRODUCTS 1 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. J. L. Industries. IB. Larsen. C. Amerex. 1 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. I10-27-97 10520-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS 1 E. Dry Chemical Type: Steel tank, Model Cosmic 6E manufactured by J. L. Industries; with pressure gauge, size and classification as scheduled. 111 2.2 CABINETS A. Recessed Cabinet at basement, first, and second floor areas: Formed sheet steel, Ambassador#1015 F10 with ADAC option flush cup handle and RT trim; full-glass door, flat trim; epoxy coated finish; color- white, as manufactured by J. L. Industries or an approved equal. B. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. C. Graphic Identification: "FIRE EXTINGUISHER", vertical lettering on glass. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Standard. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams. 111 B. Predrill holes for anchorage. C. Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. # D. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch. 2.5 FINISHES I A. Extinguisher: Red epoxy. B. Cabinet Trim and Door normal areas: Epoxy, color—white. C. Cabinet Interior: Epoxy, color-white. 3. EXECUTION I 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. I B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings. B. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Provide one fire extinguisher per cabinet. B. Locate cabinets and fire extinguishers indicated on drawings as directed by Architect. I END OF SECTION I 10-27-97 10520-2 BV&H#97098 I BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES rA. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 04800 Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: In wall framing and plates for support of accessories. D. Section 09260- Gypsum Board Assemblies. E. Section 10160—Metal Toilet Compartments. F. Section 10170—Filled Acrylic Toilet Compartments. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act, Public Law 101-336. C. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. ID. ANSI/ASTM A366-Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. E. ANSI/ASTM A386-Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. 1 F. ASTM A167- Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 1 G. ASTM A269- Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. 1.5 KEYING I 10-27-97 10800-1 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I A. Supply three keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Master key all accessories. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1 and ADA. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING I A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. I 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. - I B. Bradley Corporation C. American Specialty Co. I D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. ' D. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type,waterproof. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized,tamperproof. I F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. I G. Mirrors: 1/4" polished plate glass. 2.3 FABRICATION I A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. I 10-27-97 10800-2 BVSH#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. i 1 I E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. IF. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. IG. Hot dip galvanized exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. IC. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. ID. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. 1 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. s. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. IC. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. I3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. I C. Use tamper-proof fasteners. 1 I I 10-27-97 10800-3 BV&H#97098 BAHR VERMEER&HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I I 3.4 SCHEDULE ITEM . LOCATION QUANTITY MANUFACTURER/MODEL I Paper Towel Dispenser Men 001 3 * Women 002 3 * a Coaches Lockers 02 1 * Lavatory 04 2 * Restroom 12 1 * Coaches Lockers 17 1 * Lavatory 19 2 * Toilet Paper Holder(Giant) Men 001 4 * Surface Women 002 14 * Coaches Lockers 02 1 • Toilet 05 2 * Restroom 12 1 * Coaches Lockers 17 1 * Toilet 22 2 * Diaper Changing Men 001 1 * Women 002 1 * Mirror Men 001 7 Bobrick B292 24 X 36 I Women 002 7 Bobrick B292 24 X 36 Restroom 012 1 Bobrick B292 24 x 36 Soap Dispenser Men 001 6 Bobrick B4112 Women 002 6 Bobrick B4112 Coaches Lockers 02 1 Bobrick B4112 Lavatory 04 4 Bobrick B4112 Restroom 12 1 Bobrick B4112 Coaches Lockers 17 1 Bobrick B4112 Lavatory 19 4 Bobrick B4112 I Grab Bars Men 001 1 Bobrick B-68137 36 x 54 Women 002 1 Bobrick B-68137 36 x 54 Men 001 2 Bobrick B-6893 x 54 Women 002 2 Bobrick B-6893 x 54 Feminine Napkin Disposal Women 002 14 Bobrick B270 Surface Shower Rod Coaches Lockers 02 1 Bobrick B6047 I Restroom 12 1 Bobrick B6047 Coaches Lockers 17 1 Bobrick B6047 Hair Dryer Lavatory 04 - 2 Bobrick B731 x 115v AC Lavatory 14 2 Bobrick B731 x 115v AC I *Furnished by Owner: Contractor shall install. I 10-27-97 10800-4 BVBH#97098 BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. ITEM LOCATION QUANTITY MANUFACTURER/MODEL Nylon Soap/Shampoo Shelf Coaches Lockers 02 1 HEWI 476.5.100 Showers 07 9 HEWI 476.5.100 Restroom 12 1 HEWI 476.5.100 Coaches Lockers 17 1 HEWI 476.5.100 Showers 20 5 HEWI 476.5.100 Towel Hooks Coaches Lockers 02 1 Bobrick B677 Dry 06 10 Bobrick B677 Restroom 12 1 Bobrick B677 Coaches Lockers 17 1 Bobrick B677 Dry 21 5 Bobrick B677 Mop Holder Mechanical 14 1 Bobrick B-239 x 34 Laundry 25 1 Bobrick B-239 x 34 END OF SECTION 1 I I 1 I 1 • 10-27-97 10800-5 BVBH#97098 - BAHR VERMEER 8 HAECKER,ARCHITECTS,LTD. I SECTION 15010 eft ';r"''r'�`1'�'. .y�-`T`j IGENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS OCT• • C I�:,( 111 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION tV4 .''+'y''`"' A ,44.0i4. IA. This section describes the general mechanical requirements of these specifications and shall apply to all phases of the work specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide for complete installation of mechanical systems for this project. 1 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions I3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 1.03 . WARRANTIES IA. The Contractor shall warrant all materials,workmanship and equipment against defects for a period of one year after the date of substantial completion. Certain equipment shall I be warranted beginning at the time of final acceptance or for longer periods of time as specified in those divisions of the Project Manual. The Contractor shall repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner any item which may become defective within the warrant period. Any manufacturers'warranties concerning any item installed will run to I the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees not to void or impair or to allow Sub-Contractors to void or impair any warranties regarding products or items installed as part of this project. The repair of faulty workmanship shall be considered to be included in I the contract. 1.04 ALTERNATES A. Alternates, if required, shall be as described in the"Alternates" section of this Project Manual, as described on the proposal form, or as shown on the drawings. 1.05 QUESTIONS OF INTERPRETATION I A. If questions arise during the bidding process regarding the meaning of any portion of the contract documents, the prospective bidder shall submit the questions to the Architect/Engineer for clarification. Any definitive interpretation or clarification of the I contract documents will be published by addenda, properly issued to each person holding documents, prior to the bid date. Verbal interpretation or explanation not issued in the I form of an addendum shall not be considered part of the bidding documents. When submitting questions for clarification, adequate time for issuance and delivery of addenda must be allowed. I B. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge regarding interpretations of conflicts within contract documents. I 970154 15010-1 10/23/97 I I I 1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENT DISCREPANCIES A. If any ambiguities should appear in the contract documents, the Contractor shall request 1 clarification from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work. If the Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out the work in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. Should a conflict occur within the contract documents, the Contractor is deemed to have estimated the more expensive way of doing the work unless a written clarification from the Architect/Engineer was requested and obtained before submission of proposed methods or materials. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions shall apply throughout the contract documents: 1. Architect/Engineer Architect or Engineer I 2. Code All applicable national, state and local codes 3. Contractor Any Contractor performing work required by the Contract Documents 4. Electrical All electrical work required by the contract documents 5. Furnish Supply and deliver to the site ready for installation 6. Indicated Noted, scheduled or specified 7. Mechanical All mechanical work required by the contract I documents 8. Provide Furnish, install and connect, complete and ready for use 9. Selected Selected by the Architect or Engineer I 1.08 SYMBOLS A. Items of equipment and materials are indicated on the drawings in accordance with the symbols shown on the plans. 1.09 ABBREVIATIONS I A. The following abbreviations apply throughout the contract documents: 1. AMCA Air Moving Council of America I 2. ANSI American National Standards Institute 3. ARI American Refrigeration Institute I 970154 15010-2 10/23/97 1 I I 4. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and IAir Conditioning Engineers 5. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 29 West 39th Street, New York, NY I6. ASTM Specification Standard specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials, 1916 Race Street, IPhiladelphia, PA 7. FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation 1 8. NEC National Electrical Code, latest edition 9. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1 10. NFPA National Fire Protection Association, 60 Batterymarch Street, Boston, MA I 11. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 12. Underwriters or UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 207 East Ohio I Street, Chicago, IL ADA Americans with Disabilities Act I13. 1.10 CODES I A. The work shall be performed by persons skilled in the trade involved and shall be done in a manner consistent with normal industry standards. All work shall conform to all applicable sections of currently adopted editions of the following codes, standards and I specifications: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 2. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction I 3. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards 4. National Electrical Code(NEC), Latest Edition I 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. Life Safety Code(NFPA#101). 7. American Gas Association (AGA). 8. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). I 9. National Electrical Safety Code(NESC). 10. Applicable national, state and local codes. 11. Omaha Plumbing Code I B. Where there is a conflict between the code and the contract documents, the code shall have precedence only when it is more stringent than the contract documents. Items that are allowed by the code but are less stringent than those specified shall not be 1 substituted. I ' 970154 . 15010-3 10/23/97 I I I 1.11 PERMITS A. The Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all requirements regarding all permits, fees, etc., and shall comply with them. All permits, licenses, inspections and arrangements required for the work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense. All utilities shall be installed in accordance with the local rules and regulations and all charges shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS 1 A. The Contractor's options in selecting materials and equipment are limited by requirements of the contract documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects. Materials and equipment shall be provided in accordance with the following: 1. Primary Design Products: Primary design products are those products around which the project was designed in terms of capacity, performance, physical size and quality. Primary design products are indicated by use of a single manufacturer's name, model number or similar data on drawings or schedules or within the specifications. The Contractor shall provide primary design products unless substitutions are made in accordance with the following paragraphs. 2. Acceptable Equivalent Substitutions: Acceptable equivalent substitutions are products of manufacturers other than those listed for the primary design products. Equivalent acceptable substitutions shall meet each of the following requirements: a. The product shall be manufactured by one of the acceptable manufacturers listed in the Project Manual, drawings or addenda. b. The product shall meet or exceed the requirements of the contract , documents in terms of quality, performance, suitability, appearance and physical characteristics. c. The Contractor providing the substitution shall bear the total cost of all changes due to substitutions. These costs may include additional compensation to the Architect/Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of work by the Owner or other Contractors, and similar considerations. 3. Performance Requirements: Where the contract documents list performance requirements or describe a product or assembly generically, provide products that comply with the specific requirements indicated and that are recommended by the manufacturer for the respective application. I 4. Compliance with Standards,.Codes and Regulations: Where the specifications require only compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation, the Contractor has the option of selecting a product that complies with specification requirements, including the standards, codes and regulations. B. Proposed substitutions will be judged on the basis of quality, performance, appearance and on the governing space limitations. The reputation of the manufacturer, delivery time requirements, and the availability of repair or replacement parts may also be considered. I 970154 15010-4 10/23/97 1 I I C. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole and final judge as to the suitability of substitution Iitems. 1.13 SUBMITTALS IA. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 1. See Section 1300"Submittals". Section 1300 shall be adhered to if more Istringent than the following paragraphs. 2. When required by other h r sections of this Project Manual, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings, product data or samples to the Architect/Engineer for I review. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed. A completed copy of the transmittal form included with the Project Manual shall accompany each submittal. Submittals shall be numbered consecutively. Unless otherwise noted, I submit a minimum of six(6)copies of shop drawings and product data for review. A minimum of four(4)copies will be returned to the Contractor. Where samples are required, submit one (1)sample of each required item. I a. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for this project by the Contractor, or any manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the work. Ib. Shop drawings shall be drawn to accurate scale and of adequate size to illustrate required details. Maximum sheet size shall be 30"x 42". For I each shop drawing sheet larger than 11"x 17", submit one drawing on reproducible media and one blue-line or photocopied print. The Architect/Engineer's action shall be indicated on the reproducible drawing and the drawing shall be returned to the Contractor. Ic. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of I the work. • d. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and to establish the standards by I which the work will be performed. I 3. All submittals shall clearly indicate proposed items, capacities, characteristics and details in conformance with contract documents. All equipment items shall be marked with the same item number as used on drawings or schedules. Capacities, dimensions and special features required shall be certified by the Imanufacturer. 4. Submittals shall indicate manufacturer's delivery time for the item after review by I 5. the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer shall review or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as shop drawings, product data and samples, but only to determine conformance with the design concept of the work and the I information given in the contract documents. I . 970154 15010-5 10/23/97 I 1 I 6. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the contract documents by the Architect/Engineer's review of shop drawings, product data or samples. The Contractor shall not be relieved 111 from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings, product data or samples by the Architect/Engineer's review of those drawings. 7. No portion of the work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product data or sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with reviewed submittals. 8. Provide submittals in accordance with the schedule at the end of this section. See individual project manual sections for additional requirements. I B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. The Contractor shall prepare three operating and maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished. Manuals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review and distribution to the Owner not less than 30 days prior to substantial completion of the project. Manuals not meeting the following requirements may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Each manual shall be assembled in a three-ring binder with hard cover and plastic finish. Binders shall not exceed 3"thickness. Where more than one binder is required, the manuals shall be separated into a logical grouping, i.e., "Mechanical", "Electrical", "Maintenance", "Operation", "Parts", "Shop Drawings", etc. Where loose-leaf inserts are used, the sheets shall be reinforced to prevent tearing from continuous usage. Each binder shall have the following information clearly printed on its front cover: a. Project name and address. b. Portion of the work covered by each volume(if more than one volume in the set). Where more than one volume is required, label each volume as "Volume of c. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor and all Sub- Contractors including night or emergency number. 3. Manual shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: a. A Complete Index. Contractor may submit the index to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to submittal of complete manuals if desired. I b. Names,Addresses and Telephone Numbers. This list shall include the manufacturer and local representative who stocks or furnishes repair parts for all items of equipment and shall be typed on a single page in front of the binder. c. Start-Up, Operation and Shutdown Procedures. Provide a written description of procedures for start-up, operation and shutdown of each mechanical item or system. This description shall include motors to start, valves to open, etc., in proper sequence, and location of switches, 970154 15010-6 10/23/97 I starters, pushbuttons and valves. Description shall include item I references or labels used in the contract documents unless otherwise instructed in advance by the Owner. d. Seasonal Changeover Procedure. Provide a written description of the I procedure for necessary seasonal changeover from heating to cooling and vice versa. I e. Equipment Accessory Schedule. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a complete equipment accessory schedule listing each piece of equipment and the related size, type, number required and the manufacturer of all renewable items. If. Lubrication Schedule. Provide a chart listing each piece of equipment, the proper type of oil or grease required, and recommended frequency of IIubrication. g. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists. I h. Emergency Procedures. Provide a written description of emergency operating procedures or a list of service organizations (including addresses and telephone numbers)capable of rendering emergency Iservices to the various parts of the system. i. One copy of all shop drawings and product data, clearly marked for each item furnished using the designation label specified or indicated on Idrawings. j. All manufacturers'warranty information. Ik. Normal Maintenance Schedule. Include a listing of work to be performed at various time intervals; i.e., 30, 90, 180 days and yearly. II. Motor List. The list shall indicate motor location, equipment served (using labels indicated on drawings), horsepower, electrical characteristics, motor type, and RPM. Motors less than 1/2 horsepower need not be 1 included. 1.14 OPERATING TRAINING I A. Complete operating instructions for each system and item of equipment shall be provided to the Owner's designated personnel. Operation and maintenance manuals must be reviewed and accepted by the Architect/Engineer and provided to the Owner prior to I operating training. Training shall be scheduled at the convenience of the Owner. A minimum of six(6) hours of training shall be provided. Training shall include instructions on the following: I1. Startup and shutdown procedures 2. Seasonal changeover 3. Periodic maintenance 4. Emergency operation 5. Safety I 970154 15010-7 10/23/97 I 1 1 B. In addition to the instructions required above,wherever possible the Contractor shall perform the operations being described in order to fully illustrate system operation. I C. At the completion of training, the Contractor shall turn over to the Owner all required keys and special tools for installed equipment. Each key or tool shall be labeled with its use. PART 2- PRODUCTS I 2.01 MATERIALS I A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new, unused and undamaged. Materials and equipment shall be the current and standard designs of manufacturers regularly engaged in their production. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Where materials and equipment are indicated as furnished by others and installed or connected under this contract, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify installation details and requirements. 2.03 QUANTITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS REQUIRED A. Wherever in these specifications an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings or required to complete the installation. PART 3- EXECUTION Not used. I • 1 1 1 1 I I I 970154 15010-8 10/23/97 I I I MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE ISECTION SHOP PRODUCT NUMBER SECTION NAME DRAWINGS DATA SAMPLES WARRANTY OTHER 1 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and V V Methods 15055 Basic Piping Materials and Methods `� '� 15250 Mechanical Insulation V 15400 Plumbing '� I . 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15458 Water Heaters 15600 Gas-Fired Make-Up Air Units V 15650 Direct Expansion Refrigeration V V ISystems 15800 Heat Transfer Equipment 15845 Energy Recovery Units 15850 Air Handling Units and Fans I15880 Air Distribution(Sheet Metal) V 15950 Temperature Controls I 15990 Systems Testing,Adjusting and v v V Balancing 1 END OF SECTION I I I I , 1 1 970154 15010-9 10/23/97. I 1 I SECTION 15050 ' BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes mechanical materials and methods. The requirements contained in this section shall apply to all phases of the work specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide for complete installation of mechanical systems for this project. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. When included as a part of this specification,the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15055- Basic Piping Materials and Methods 6. Section 16050- Basic Electrical Materials and Methods PART 2-PRODUCTS 111 2.01 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. General. Basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment or are provided with the equipment. These components include, but are not limited to, factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished with mechanical equipment. B. Compliance: 1. Comply with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and applicable requirements of I NFPA 70E, "Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces". 2. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 198D, UL 486A and B, and UL 508 pertaining to installation of motor controllers. Provide controllers and components which are UL listed and labeled. ' 3. Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA MG 1 "Motors and Generators", NEMA Standards ICS2"Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies", NEMA KS1 "Enclosed Switches"and Pub. No. 250"Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum)", pertaining to motor controllers and enclosures. C. Motors: 1. Energy efficient, squirrel cage, NEMA Standard MG 1, 60 Hz, general purpose, continuous duty, Design"B", except"C"where required for high starting torque. I 970154 15050-1 10/23/97 1 1 1 2. NEMA Standard 48 or 54 frames; use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. 3. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance; for fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted. 4. Enclosure Type: a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation; guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by building occupants. , b. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. c. Self-ventilated open type motors and fan hoods of totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall meet NEMA MG 1 requirements for a fully guarded machine. d. Totally enclosed with all metal surfaces protected with a corrosion resistant polyester paint or coating, wherever practical. Unpainted or uncoated exposed metal surfaces shall be corrosion resistant material. i 5. "Quiet" rating on motors located in occupied spaces of building. 6. "Energy efficient"motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than"average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. 111 7. Nameplate shall indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. In addition to nameplate requirements of NEMA MG 1, nameplate shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's identification number b. Frame size number c. Insulated system class designation d. Efficiency index e. Service factor f. Locked rotor KVA code letter g. Starting limitations, if any h. Hazard classification, if applicable , 8. Factory Tests. Test and inspect each motor for mechanical and electrical defects at the manufacturer's factory. Reject defective materials. Test in accordance with NEMA MG 1 to comply with IEEE Standard 112. I 9. Rated for 40°C environment with maximum 90°C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load, with class F or class H insulation. I 10. Service factor shall be 1.15 for three phase ODP motors, 1.10 for three phase totally enclosed motors, and 1.35 for single phase motors. 970154 15050-2 10/23/97 1 1 11. Motor voltage rating shall be as follows: ' Circuit Voltage Motor Rating I 120 115 208 200 240 230 480 460 12. Motors 3/4 HP or larger shall be three phase; smaller than 3/4 HP, single phase unless otherwise indicated. ' 13. Motors used with solid state variable frequency drives shall be Design B, coordinated and approved by drive manufacturer. 111 14. Motor Construction: a. Frames, bearing brackets and terminal housing shall be cast iron. Fan cooled motors to have fans fabricated of corrosion resistant metal and cast iron fan covers. Drain plugs shall be combination water drain- breather type. b. Insulation shall be non-hygroscopic, with resistance corrected to 40°C. c. Each motor to have a single cast iron, pressed steel or fabricated steel ' terminal housing, accessible from outside the motor, for motor power leads and accessory leads. Housing shall be diagonally split with a gasket between the diagonally split halves of the housing. Provide a non- conducting motor lead positioner and gasket between the housing and motor frame. Threaded conduit opening for watertight rigid connection, suitable for rotation in 90° increments to receive conduit from any of four directions. Each motor lead to have terminal permanently numbered for easy identification. 15. Coordinate with indicated reduced inrush controller type and with characteristics of driven equipment load. Provide required wiring leads in motor terminal box to suit control method. 16. Single Phase Motors: a. Conform to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. ' b. One of the following types as selected to suit the starting torque and other requirements of the specific motor application: 1) Permanent split capacitor ' 2) Split phase start, capacitor run 3) Capacitor start, capacitor run 1 c. Use shaded pole type only for motors smaller than 1/20 HP. d. For all fractional horsepower motors, integral thermal overload protection shall be provided to automatically open the power supply circuit to the i 970154 15050-3 10/23/97 1 1 I motor, or a control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection shall operate when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Provide device that automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range except as otherwise indicated. e. Bearings on belt connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type. Sealed, pre-lubricated sleeve bearings may be used for other single phase motors. 111 D. Motor Controllers: 1. General: I a. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition. Starters for services with interlock or control requirements shall be magnetic type. 2. Motor Controller Characteristics: I a. Enclosures. NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations shall be NEC, NEMA 4 with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which shall conform to have proper class and division. b. Starters shall include a manually operated hand-off-auto switch with cover mounted handle for selection of operating mode. c. Starters shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard ICS. 3. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers. Shall have pilot lights and ex ,9 extra positions for multi-speed motors. Equip with quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanisms and one-piece melting alloy type thermal overload relays. Switch shall be designed so that switch cannot be held closed under sustained motor overload. Provide with switch pad lockable in the off position. Provide controller in a NEMA 1 enclosure. a. Single phase switches shall be toggle operated with thermal overload element. b. Three phase manual starters shall be pushbutton type with voltage rated 3 pole contactors and manual reset thermal overload relays for each phase. 4. Magnetic Starters: a. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase, sized in accordance with NEC for the associated load. Overloads shall be externally operated manual reset or solid state type unless specifically indicated otherwise. b. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for 1 coordination with control requirements and as indicated. Minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. contact. 970154 15050-4 10/23/97 1 I I c. Provide heavy duty pushbutton and selector switch units mounted in the starter cover as indicated. Units shall be complete with contact blocks and legend plates. Momentary contact start-stop pushbuttons shall be with auxiliary contact for use in holding circuit. Iprovided d. Built-in control circuit transformer, fused from line side,where service exceeds 120 volts. With minimum anticipated primary voltage, transformer shall maintain a minimum secondary terminal potential of I required volts during starter inrush. e. Starter shall be equipped forr remote control from local or remote switch I or other pilot devices. Provide internal wiring and readily accessible terminal blocks for easy connection to external control wiring. 5. Combination Magnetic Starters: Ia. Combination starters shall include magnetic starters and disconnect switch per this specification section. Disconnect switch shall be fusible or I non-fusible as indicated. If no indication, the switch shall be fusible. E. Disconnect Switches: 1 1. Disconnect switches may be motor circuit breaker type or fusible switch type. 2. Provide a manually operated disconnecting handle in the cover to operate the ' disconnect switch. Handle shall be lockable in open position with one or more padlocks. Interlock cover and switch so that cover cannot be opened normally when switch is in closed position. Provide mechanism to override this interlock. I 3. Motor Circuit Breaker. Instantaneous-only type circuit breaker employing adjustable magnetic trip setting designed to provide motor short circuit protection. I 4. Fusible Switches. Manually operated 3 pole, 600 volt switch connected in series with one replaceable dual element fuse per switch pole. Heavy duty; horsepower rated; non-teasible quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side I shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the"open"position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated. 1 5. Non-Fusible Switches. For equipment 2 horsepower and smaller, and where indicated on the drawings, switches shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch Itype; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. F. Wiring and Motor Connections: I 1. Wiring provided as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment shall be manufacturer's standard design and in compliance with NEC. 2. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated. 1 I . 970154 15050-5 10/23/97 1 2.02 1 SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, 1 capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type for application in vertical joints and in horizontal joints, color as selected; manufactured by Pecora, Tremco, Sonneborn, or approved equal: , B. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. C. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant r manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. D. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell, polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30%to 50% larger than joint width; manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal. E. Bond Breaker. Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2.03 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATION SEALANT A. See Division 7-Thermal and Moisture Protection. 2.04 ELECTRICAL WIRE A. All wiring materials covered by this section shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and shall carry the UL label where applicable. All wiring running exposed in return air plenums shall be plenum rated cable for fire and smoke spread. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete mechanical system shall be done by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Mechanical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where mechanical equipment or materials are to be installed, and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies the Contractor's acceptance of the conditions as fit and proper for the execution of the mechanical work. B. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, requirements or recommendations. 3.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS• 1 A. Each Contractor shall make provisions for the delivery and safe storage of materials and shall make the required arrangements with other Contractors for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Materials shall be delivered at such stages of the work as will expedite the work as a whole and shall be marked and stored in such a way as to be easily checked and inspected. 970154 I 15050-6 10/23/97 1 1 I B. The Contractor shall be responsible for adequately protecting all supplies and equipment during cold weather. All items subject to cold weather damage shall be protected by covering, insulating or storing in a heated space. 3.03 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS ' A. Perform the mechanical work in conformance with the construction called for by other trades and afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. ' Properly connect and coordinate the mechanical work with the work of other contractors at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. B. Examine the contract documents for the General, Mechanical and Electrical work and the ' work of other trades. Coordinate mechanical work accordingly. C. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the mechanical work which might prevent prompt and proper installation of work required from other trades. D. Systems Test and Balance Contractors or personnel shall coordinate their work with the contractors who installed the systems being tested or balanced. The Temperature Control Contractor or personnel shall be present during systems test and balance. 3.04 COORDINATION OF WORK ' A. The Mechanical Contractor shall plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. It shall also be the responsibility of the Mechanical ' Contractor to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building construction for the installation of the mechanical work. The Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate with all other contractors in furnishing material and information, in proper ' sequence, for the correct location of all sleeves, inserts, foundations, wiring, etc. Provisions shall be made for all special frames, openings and sleeves as required. B. The Mechanical Contractor shall pay for extra cutting and patching made necessary by ' his failure to properly direct such work at the correct time. C. Unless otherwise indicated, motors, equipment, controls, etc., shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. Attached notes shall apply to the schedule. Furn. Set Power Control ' Item By By Wiring Wirinq Equipment motors MC MC EC Unit mounted motor starters, contactors and overload heaters MC MC EC MC ' Loose motor starters, contactors and over- load heaters EC EC EC MC 1 970154 15050-7 10/23/97 1 I '' 1 Furn. Set Power Control Item By By Wirinq Wirinq Fused and unfused dis- connect switches, ther- mal overload and I heaters EC EC EC — Control relays and transformers MC MC EC MC Thermostats MC MC MC MC Temperature control I panels MC MC EC MC Motor and solenoid valves, damper motors, PE and EP switches MC MC MC MC Refrigeration equipment MC MC EC MC I Electric duct heaters MC MC EC MC Time clocks EC EC EC EC DX condensing units MC MC EC EC I MC= Mechanical Contractor EC= Electrical Contractor Notes to table above: I 1. All equipment-mounted starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor unless otherwise indicated on the preceding schedule. 1 2. The following description shall apply to equipment not covered by the "Temperature Control"section of these specifications: Immersion thermostats, remote bulb thermostats, motor valves, controls, etc.,which are an integral part of the mechanical equipment or which are directly attached to ducts, piping, equipment, etc., shall be set in place under the mechanical contract. Motor driven units which are controlled from line voltage, manual operating or start-stop I switches, or automatic controls such as line voltage thermostats, float switches or time switches which operate at line voltage, shall be wired for both power and control circuit under the electrical contract. I 3. Factory prewired control panels and packaged mechanical units shall be provided with one power source connection point unless noted otherwise. 4. For split systems (systems with remote condenser or condensing units), the I Electrical Contractor shall provide 3/4"conduit with a minimum of six distinctively colored or tagged#14 wires between units for control wiring. Wiring shall be connected by the Electrical Contractor. 970154 I 15050-8 10/23/97 I . 1 3.05 ELECTRICAL WRING IA. All wiring and conduit shall be run parallel to, or at right angles to, the building structure and shall be concealed in finished spaces. I B. All wiring required for a complete and operating temperature control system, as herein specified, shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings. Wiring shall include all electrical connections required by the I Sequence of Control and Point List(where indicated)and wiring required for interlocking equipment. C. All electric wiring shall be done in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All line I voltage and low voltage wire shall be installed in flexible conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Conduit may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or in areas where other piping is exposed. ID. Low voltage wiring in equipment rooms or concealed in walls shall be in one of the metal raceways mentioned above. Final connection shall be made with exposed wiring which shall be protected by a suitable protective grommet and the end of the metal container shall be securely fastened. Jacketed harnesses may be used where a number of wires are run together. E. All communication and control wiring which penetrates the building skin shall be provided with surger suppression devices. 1 F. All line voltage connections of the direct digital control system devices (where applicable) Ishall be provided with surge suppression devices. 3.06 LAYING OUT WORK IA. The Contractor shall carefully lay out all work in advance of installation using data and measurements from the site, the appropriate architectural and structural drawings and shop drawings. Equipment layout and all system layouts shall confirm adequate I clearances for installation, operation, maintenance and code required clearances from the structure or other equipment and systems. The layout shall not cause problems of operation, maintenance or clearance for items installed by other contractors. IB. Prior to installation of any work, make certain the location does not conflict with other items in or near the same location. If the layouts so prepared indicate that the required conditions cannot be met in the space provided, the Contractor shall so inform the IArchitect/Engineer prior to installation and shall request clarification. C. Failure to properly coordinate and lay out the work will require correction by the Contractors at their own expense. I 3.07 DATA AND MEASUREMENTS IA. The data given herein and on the drawings is as accurate as could be secured and absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. The Contractors shall obtain exact locations, measurements, levels, etc., at the site and shall adapt their work to actual conditions. I The Contractor shall examine the General Construction, Mechanical, Electrical, and other applicable drawings and the Specifications. Plans and specifications are available for examination at the office of the Architect/Engineer. Only Architectural drawings, 1 970154 15050-9 10/23/97 II Structural drawings, and site measurements may be utilized in calculations. Mechanical and electrical drawings are diagrammatic or schematic. 3.08 POSITION OF DEVICES A. Locate devices mounted on finished surfaces with regard to paneling, furring, trim, etc. Where several devices occur in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged as reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. Devices improperly located or installed shall be repaired, replaced or relocated at the Contractor's expense. Devices shall be set plumb or horizontal and shall extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor without projecting beyond the surface. B. Devices shown on wood trim, cases or other fixtures shall be installed symmetrically and, where necessary, shall be set with the long dimension of the plate horizontal. C. All Contractors shall coordinate their respective devices so as not to destroy the aesthetic effect of the surface in which the devices are mounted. Coordinate the locations of all mechanical items with work furnished by other trades to avoid interference. If the required coordination is not done, the outlets or devices shall be removed and relocated if so directed by the Architect/Engineer and the damaged surfaces repaired at the Contractor's expense. D. Devices shall be installed at the height shown below unless otherwise noted. All heights of devices are measured from finished floor to centerline of device. Heights may be adjusted to correspond to nearest masonry course or as necessary to clear wall mounted cabinets, fin tube convectors, unit heaters, etc. Temperature control panels 60" Thermostats 46"unless noted otherwise 3.09 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Label each piece of mechanical equipment. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 1"high unless otherwise specified or noted. In general, use white core ' laminated plastic attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate. Labeling shall be of a wording directed by the Owner and located as directed by the Owner. 3.10 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. Take such precautions as necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. Failure to provide such protection to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus, equipment, etc., concerned. 3.11 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT , A. All motors, terminal boxes, valves, control devices, specialties, etc., shall be located to provide for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance; if concealed, access doors shall be provided. 970154 I 15050-10 10/23/97 1 B. Access doors 0o s(AD) required for access to equipment requiring inspection or service shall be provided. This Contractor shall provide all access doors not already furnished by other t Contractors but which are required for access to Mechanical equipment. Doors to be Milcor or equivalent steel access doors with frame as required by construction. Doors shall be 12"x 12" unless shown otherwise. Person access doors shall be 20"x 20" ' minimum. 3.12 EQUIPMENT PADS The Mechanical Contractor shall provide concrete pads for the mechanical equipment unless otherwise indicated. Pads shall be 3-1/2"above slab and 2" larger than the equipment base on all sides and shall have 3/4"chamfered edges unless otherwise ' indicated. Pads poured on reinforced concrete slabs shall have 6x6x10/10 welded wire fabric and shall be doweled to the slab. Self-supporting isolating pads shall have#4 reinforcing bars at 12"center to center and shall have an expansion joint around the ' perimeter of the adjoining slab. 3.13 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES A. The Contractor shall examine the premises and all conditions thereon and/or therein. The bid proposal shall take into consideration all such conditions which may affect the work under this contract. 3.14 ROADWAYS, CURBS AND WALKS A. The Contractor shall use every possible precaution to prevent injuries to roadways, curbs and walks on or adjacent to the site of the work. Any damage shall be repaired at the Contractor's own expense. This shall also include damage necessary for installation of the mechanical work. 3.15 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS A. General. All work in the existing building, indicated on the drawings or specified herein, • shall be executed with a minimum amount of interference with the normal activities of the occupants of the building. All work shall be scheduled in advance with the Owner and shall not proceed without the Owner's written approval. ' B. Utilities. Utilities shall not be interrupted without the Owner's prior written approval regarding the time and duration of such interruptions. Utilities to existing facilities shall not be disconnected until new or temporary facilities are installed except for short periods of interruption which are necessary for the performance of the new work and which are approved by the Owner. Storm water may be temporarily diverted to surface drainage provided such drainage is arranged to prevent flooding of structures, basements and ' excavations for construction. C. Fire Alarm System. The existing fire alarm system shall remain functional throughout construction. As a minimum, the existing degree of protection shall be maintained for all areas. All required outages shall be coordinated with the Owner and the Fire Marshal. D. Welding. The Owner shall be notified before starting welding or cutting. Fire ' extinguishers shall be immediately accessible when welding or cutting with an open flame or arc. Welding or cutting with an open flame or arc shall be stopped not less than one hour before leaving the premises. 970154 15050-11 10/23/97 1 1 E. Noisy Operations. Noisy operations such as those involving use of air hammers, etc., in demolition, or cutting of openings shall be scheduled with the Owner. F. Occupancy. The Owner will continue to occupy the building and carry on normal activity. Each Contractor shall protect the occupied areas from dust, smoke, etc., by a method reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. I G. Owner's Right to Direct Work. The Owner shall have the right to direct the places of beginning work, its prosecution, and the manner in which all work under this contract is to be conducted, insofar as may be necessary to secure the safe and proper progress and quality of the work. H. Cutting and Patching. Each Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching required for the work. Patching shall be done by craftspersons skilled in the trade involved and shall be prepared to receive paint. Openings through floors may be drilled up to 1"but shall be core drilled over 1". Whenever the building surfaces (walls, floors, etc.)and openings are modified, removed and/or replaced to accommodate the new work or to introduce into or remove items from the building, such surfaces or openings shall be carefully reinstalled in conformance with the applicable code to protect the integrity of the building.• I. Existing Piping, Ductwork or Mechanical Equipment. If any existing piping, ductwork or mechanical equipment is encountered which would interfere with the proper installation of new work, it shall be removed or relocated as required or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Where existing work is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with these specifications. Materials used shall be the same as for new work unless otherwise specified. 3.16 DEMOLITION AND REMODEL A. The Mechanical Contractor shall remove all existing piping, ductwork, devices and 1 equipment, indicated on plans or which are not indicated but must be removed, to accommodate demolition or new remodeling. B. Verify existing conditions in field prior to bid date. 3.17 SLEEVES AND FRAMES A. Ducts passing through masonry walls shall be installed ins steel angle iron frames and sleeves. All sleeves and frames shall be securely fastened to the walls. Provide for structural lintels in masonry wall openings. Ducts passing through openings in poured concrete walls and floors need not have frames. B. Piping passing through masonry or concrete floors and walls shall be installed with Schedule 40 pipe sleeves sized to allow insulated pipe to pass through and with sufficient annular space to allow fire sealant. Cored openings through poured concrete walls and floors need not have sleeves. 3.18 FINISHED SURFACES PENETRATIONS A. All piping and ductwork penetrations of finished surfaces shall have escutcheons and/or closure plates. 970154 , 15050-12 10/23/97 1 I B. Openings shall be cut only as large as required for the installation, sleeves and/or frames I . installed with finished surfaces in C. Surfaces aroundflush openings shall be leftand smoothgrouted and finisheplace.d to match surrounding surface. I D. Duct frames and pipe sleeves through floors in concealed locations and in unfinished spaces such as mechanical rooms, etc., shall extend 2"above finished floor level and shall be caulked watertight. All other sleeves shall extend approximately 1/4"above finished floor but shall allow placement of escutcheons. j I3.19 SEALING OF EXTERIOR OPENINGS I A. Openings around pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., in exterior walls above grade shall be sealed with polyurethane sealant. B. Preparation: I1. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I 2. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. I . 3. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 4. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. I 5. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. IC. Installation: 1. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. I2. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth Iratios. 4. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. I5. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. I 6. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. 7. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. I8. Tool joints concave. I3.20 LUBRICATION A. Contractor shall run in all bearings and, after they are run in, shall drain and flush bearings and refill with a new oil charge. Equipment shall be so arranged that tools I . 970154 15050-13 . 10/23/97 1 1 (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)will not be required to make lubrication points accessible. Extensions on grease or oil fittings shall be provided where required for access to lubricate. 3.21 FILTER REPLACEMENT A. Prior to beginning systems testing, adjusting and balancing, replace all filter media with new media. 3.22 TEST REPORTS t A. Upon completion of the work, the entire system shall be tested and proven for capacity of equipment, balance of system, proper operation of controls and comfort of conditioned spaces. Contractor shall take air and water flow readings and submit copy of same to demonstrate proper flow according to the performances shown on the plans and noted in the specifications. All motors shall be checked for overload and belts adjusted. Lubricate all moving parts and clean or replace filters. B. Submit three (3)copies of all tests to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to date of substantial completion. C. All equipment and systems discrepancies shall be corrected prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION 1 • • 1 1 . I 1 I 970154 15050-14 10/23/97 1 1 SECTION 15055 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Basic piping materials and methods applicable to all piping systems except fire protection. B. Refer to separate piping specifications for special installation requirements. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions ' 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and manufacturers'technical product data for: 1. Hangers 5. Unions 2. Pressure gauges 6. Valve tags 3. Pipe labels 7. Pressure and temperature ports 4. Thermometers ' B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2"x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space),and variations for identification (if ' any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses, by • special"flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish additional copies for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with applicable codes. Qualification shall be made in accordance with ANSI B31.1, if applicable the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,Welding and Brazing Qualifications, AWS B3.0. B. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI B31.10-Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping and AWS Welding Handbook. C. Soldering and brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 -Standard Safety Code for ' Mechanical Refrigeration. 970154 15055-1 10/23/97 I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - I A. Valve tags and pipe labels: 1. Seton 3. Brady 2. Brimar B. Thermometers: I 1. U. S. Gauge 4. Trerice 2. Weiss 5. Weksler I 3. Marshalltown Instruments C. Pressure/temperature test ports: 1. Sysco 4. Watts I 2. Pete's Plugs 5. Superseal 3. Autoflow I D. Pressure gauges: 1. U. S. Gauge 4. Weiss 1 2. Ashcroft 5. Marshalltown Instruments 3. Trerice 6. Weksler E. Hangers and supports: I 1. B-Line 4. Pipe Shields 2. Elcen Metal Products 5. Grinnell 3. Michigan 6. Carpenter& Patterson F. Preinsulated pipe supports: I 1. Pipe Shields 3. Power Piping 2. Elcen I G. Vibration control hangers: 1. Mason 4. Korfund Dynamics I 2. Vibration Mountings & Controls 5. Amber Booth 3. Vibration Eliminator Co. 6. Peabody Noise Control H. Rooftop pipe flashing hoods: I 1. Kees 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast iron flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Materials to suit the service of the piping system in which I installed, non-asbestos. Materials will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and 970154 I 15055-2 10/23/97 I thermal conditions o s of the fluid being carried. Gaskets for plain finished surfaces shall be at least 1/16"thick and for serrated surfaces shall be at least 3/32"thick. B. Carbon steel bolting shall be used for joining all iron and steel flanged systems rated for less than Class 150 psi and shall conform to requirements of ANSI 616.1 and may be 1 threaded studs and nuts or bolts and nuts. Bolts and nuts shall be heavy hexagonal head ASTM A307, Grade B, conforming to ANSI 618.2.1 and 618.2.2. C. Alloy steel bolting shall be threaded studs and two nuts and shall be used for joining all ' steel flanges having a design pressure Class 150 psi or greater. Bolting shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16.5. Stud material shall conform to ASTM A193, Grade 67, and nuts shall conform to ASTM A194, Grade 2H, for piping design temperatures less ' than 750°F. D. Non-ferrous bolting shall be provided for non-ferrous flanges conforming to ANSI B16.24 and ASTM B43. 2.03 SLEEVES ' A. Sheet Metal: 10 gauge, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded joints. B. Steel: Galvanized,welded steel pipe. ' C. Modular Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, interlocking synthetic rubber links, bolted connections and pressure plates, watertight seal to 20 psig. ' 2.04 ESCUTCHEONS A. Chrome plated, stamped steel, or hinged split ring with set screw. B. Inside diameter shall fit tightly to outside of pipe or pipe insulation. C. Outside diameter shall completely cover openings. 2.05 DIELECTRIC UNION COUPLINGS OR FLANGED CONNECTIONS A. Specifically designed to isolate piping systems and equipment of dissimilar materials. ' Must effectively prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Same end connections as systems or equipment installed, full line size. 111 C. Provide at all locations where dissimilar materials join. 2.06 ADJUSTABLE ANGLE THERMOMETERS A. Aluminum case, replaceable glass window, red appearing mercury tubing,white scale, black lettering, adjustable angle, brass stem with union connection, 6"and 12"size; 0- ' 100°F, chilled and cold water service; 30-130°F, condenser water service; 30-300°F, heating and hot water service. B. Brass separable well, extended neck. 970154 15055-3 10/23/97 1 1 2.07 PRESSURE GAUGE A. Aluminum case, replaceable glass window,white scale, black lettering, adjustable red 1 pointer, bronze movement, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, 1.5% accuracy, liquid filled for pump service, siphon tube for steam service,4-1/2"diameter face. 2.08 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS(PTT) A. Brass body, 1/8"O.D. dual seal core, rated for 275°F and 500 psig, pressure gauge adapter, 2"extension on insulated pipe, color coded threaded cap and cap strap. I , B. Provide test kit with 0-100 psi 3-1/2"dial pressure gauge, gauge adapter, 0-220°F thermometer, 25-125°F thermometer, compartmentized carrying case. 2.09 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2"and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2": 150 psig forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Channel Type Inserts: Cast-in-place; 12 gauge carbon steel; integral anchor arm x 1-5/8"; load capacity, 2000 lbs. per foot; filler closure; end caps. s, 1-5/8" B. Spot Type Inserts: Cast-in-place; 12 gauge carbon steel; integral anchor arm; end caps; 1-5/8"x 1-5/8"x 5" long; load capacity, 1200 lbs. C. Ceiling-Mounted Concrete Anchor Bolts: Cast-in-place; carbon steel; welded washer, ' nailing holes; plastic coated threads. D. Drilled Anchors: Steel shell and expander plug or steel split wedge sleeve type; plated finish; integral thread. E. Metal Deck Ceiling-Mounted Concrete Anchor Bolts: Cast-in-place; carbon steel; welded deck plate; plastic coated threads. F. Floor-or Pad-Mounted Concrete Anchor Bolts: Cast-in-place;carbon steel; welded IPS sleeve and washer. G. Beam Clamps: Carbon steel, locking C-clamp or two-piece bolted; size to match beam flange. H. Riser Clamps: Carbon steel; two-piece; bolted each side. I. Plastic-Coated or Copper Finish Riser Clamps: Plastic-coated or copper finish carbon steel; two-piece; bolted each side. J. Wall-Mounted Angle Brackets: Carbon steel;welded angle construction; three bolt holes: 3000 lbs. vertical load capacity. I970154 15055-4 10/23/97 I I 1 K. Clevis Type Pipe Hanger: Carbon steel; two-piece; bolted or adjustable swivel ring; self- locking type; vertical adjustment; double nut locking; size for pipe and insulation. L. Plastic-Coated or Copper Finish Clevis Type Pipe Hanger: Plastic-coated or copper finish carbon steel; two-piece; bolted or adjustable swivel ring; self-locking type; vertical Iadjustment; double nut locking. M. Adjustable Swivel Ring Hanger: Carbon steel, knurled swivel nut for vertical adjustment; for non-insulated, stationary line, MSS-SP-69 (type 10), galvanized in wet areas. IN. Adjustable pipe ring hanger: Malleable iron adjusting nut with steel band, galvanized in wet areas; completely copper plated for copper or brass pipe, hinged design for 4" through 8"sizes; for non-insulated, stationary line; MSS-SP-69 (type 9). I O. Trapeze Type Supports: 3/16" minimum steel angle; double nut locking. I1. U-bolt to secure pipe to trapeze on top or hung underneath. 2. Plastic coated or copper finish U-bolt for glass, copper, brass and aluminum pipe. 3. Short strap to secure pipe to top of trapeze; MSS-SP-69 (type 26). 4. Size strap or U-bolt for pipe and insulation where applicable. P. Pipe Saddles: Carbon steel; shank insert into IPS; bolted yoke. Q. Pipe Rollers: Cast iron; steel axle; for use with yoke, hanger sockets, stand or chair support configurations. I R. Adjustable Pipe Roller Stand: Cast iron and carbon steel; locking vertical adjustment bolts; recessed base plate for longitudinal movement. S. Insulation Support Shield: Minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, 12" long. For pipe sizes 1 2-1/2"and larger, use insulated pipe supports. 2.11 ROOFTOP PIPE FLASHING HOOD IA. Constructed of galvanized steel; all seams welded; interior insulated with metal liner; removable pitched cover, pipes exiting through permanently flexible grommet seals. Furnish with roof curb. I 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS IA. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA Standard ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36. IC. Cement Grout: Portland cement(ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and Ihydration. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. I 970154 15055-5 10/23/97 I 2.13 VALVE TAGGING A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19 gauge, 1-1/2"diameter, polished brass valve tags with I stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4"high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2"high and with 5/32" hole for fastener. 1. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 2. Indicate normal position of valve, i.e., "open" (NO), "closed" (NC). 2.14 PIPE IDENTIFICATION I A. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl pipe markers comply with ANSI A13.1- 1981. B. Lettering: 1. Lettering height shall be per all applicable codes PP as a minimum. 2. Each pipe marker shall indicate direction of flow with arrows, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. Where flow is possible in either direction in a piping system, arrows shall be installed to indicate both directions of flow and type of piping system. 3. Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or specified. 2.15 BACKFILL MATERIAL AND MIXES A. Earth Fill: Approved PP type of soil classified, in accordance with ASTM D2487, as GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, ML or CL, and free of foreign substances, obtained from • excavation on this project or other approved source, and having a plasticity index between 7.5 and 17. B. Granular Fill: Granular fill shall include clean, natural or prepared gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands or gravelly sands with little or not fines. A minimum of 95%shall be �. retained on a No. 200 sieve. C. Pea Gravel: Pea gravel shall consist of clean, hard, round particles of crushed stone, I crushed or uncrushed gravel with the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing i 3/8" 85 - 95 #4 5 - 15 #8 0 - 2 D. Crushed Rock: Crushed rock shall consist of clean, hard, particles of crushed limestone, dolomite, granite, quartzite or other approved rock. It shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 45 and a percent loss of not more than 30 at the end of 16 cycles of the freezing and thawing test. Gradation for crushed rock shall be as follows: I 970154 15055-6 10/23/97 I I I Sieve Size Percent Retained 1 1-1/2" 0 3/4" 5 - 35 I 3/8" 30 - 64 #10 70 - 90 #200 90 100 IPART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE SUPPORT SPACING IA. Piping support spacing shall be as follows as a minimum: Pipe Material, Pressure and Temperature I Black Black Copper& Steel Steel Aluminum ABS& PVC Size 125# 250# All up to 70°F 1/2" 5' 5' 4' 2' 3/4" 8' 8' 5' 2' 1" 10' 10' 6' 3' 11 1-1/4" 12' 10' 6' 3' 1-1/2" 13' 12' 7' 4' 2" 14' 13' 9' 4' I 2-1/2" 16' 15' 10' 11' 5' 3" 17' 16' 5' 4" 19' 17' 12' 6' 1 1. Piping support and installation shall conform to ASME/ANSI B31.9 where applicable. I • 2. Support per manufacturer's requirements for pipe material, pressures and temperatures other than listed. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION I A. Drawings, plans, schematics and diagrams indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Piping layout takes into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, I expansion, pump sizing and other design considerations. Where practical, install piping as indicated. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt and debris from both inside and outside of piping, tubing and fittings before assembly. C. Keep all pipe and equipment openings closed during construction except when actual work is being performed on that item or system. D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, remove burrs, bevel plane ends of steel pipe. 1 E. Conceal piping in walls, pipe chases, utility chases, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless otherwise noted. i 970154 15055-7 10/23/97 I I I F. Install piping free of sags or bends with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. G. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted unless indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joists, columns, walls and other permanent elements of the building unless otherwise indicated. Provide space to permit insulation applications with 1"clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, adjacent building structure or connecting equipment. Install expansion loops or compensators where indicated. J. During construction, avoid any undue loads, forces or strains on valves, equipment, pump flanges or building elements with piping connections or piping systems. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit insulation and valve maintenance. �. L. Provide drains in all low points of piping mains, risers and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball valve and threaded nipple and cap. Systems shall be fully drainable. Drain valves in exposed areas shall be closed with removable plugs. M. Fittings shall be used for all changes in direction and all branch connections. Fittings shall be of long radius type unless otherwise indicated. N. Leaking joints shall be remade using new materials. O. Drill and deburr all openings which are made after erectio n of the piping system. P. Joints in steel pipe 2"and smaller shall be threaded in accordance with ANSI B1.1. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Utilize pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint. Tighten joints to leave not more than three threads exposed. Q. Pipe joints and steel pipe larger than 2"shall be welded in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31. R. Flanges on steel pipe larger than 2"shall be welded in accordance with ASME B31. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torques specified by the manufacturer of the flange and flange bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. S. Joints in non-ferrous pipe shall be brazed or soldered. Braze joints in accordance with ANSI B31.9 or B31.5. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the fitting using emery cloth. Clean tube and fittings and apply flux. Flux shall not be used for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces. T. Joints for other piping systems are specified within the respective piping system specifications. 970154 15055-8 10/23/97 I I 1 U. Pip e hangers for insulated pipe with vapor barrier jackets shall be installed around the outside of the insulation and a metal insulation support shield provided to prevent 1 crushing of the insulation. V. Pipe hangers: Use swivel ring hangers on pipe size 3"and smaller, clevis type for 4"and I larger. Contractor option to use swivel ring type on uninsulated piping to 6"size. Where hangers or supports are in contact with non-ferrous pipes, plastic coated or copper finish hangers or supports shall be used. 1 3.03 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Install piping, unions, flanges and groove couplings at connections to all equipment and fixtures in such a manner to permit the complete removal of fixtures and components such as coils, tube bundles, or filters without cutting pipes. I B. Install unions adjacent to each control valve and at connections to each piece of I equipment and plumbing fixture having 2"and smaller connections and elsewhere as indicated. $ C. Install flanges on piping 2-1/2"and larger where indicated and adjacent to each control valve and at the connection to each piece of equipment. D. Provide dielectric unions at all locations where dissimilar metals join. E. Tighten bolts to uniformly compress gaskets and to minimize flange stress. Allowance shall be made for shrinkage during welding of nozzle connections so that the stress on the equipment is minimized. 3.04 SEALS AND SLEEVES A. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls below grade using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6"shall be steel pipe; sleeves 6"and larger shall be sheet metal. 1 B. Seal around penetrations through non-fire-rated partitions utilizing techniques which allow optimum sealant movement. IC. Provide sleeves at all pipe penetrations through walls, floors and roofs. Sleeves through mechanical room floor shall extend 2"above finished floor elevation and be caulked water-tight. Sleeves are not required on core drilled openings except through mechanical 1 room floors. 3.05 ESCUTCHEONS I A. Provide escutcheons in all pipe penetrations exposed to view in finished areas and where exposed to view under normal operation such as below cabinets. 3.06 THERMOMETERS A. Provide thermometers on the inlet and outlet water connections to water heaters,water service entrance,well water service entrance and as indicated. IB. Thermometer shall have 12" scale in locations higher than 8'above finished floor. I 970154 15055-9 10/23/97 I I 1 C. When thermometers are installed in piping 1"and smaller, provide 1-1/4"tee with reducers at both ends for installation of thermometer without restricting flow. 3.07 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Provide single pressure gauge installed between pump suction and discharge flanges connected to flanges with 3/8 steel pipe. Provide ball valve in each piping branch to allow reading pressure at each flange. 3.08 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS (PTT) A. Provide pressure and temperature test ports on the inlet and outlet flanges or connections of the following items when pressure gauges and thermometers have not been indicated: 1. "Pumps 2. Boilers B. Install ports on or near the equipment connection in top half of pipe at 45°. 3.09 VALVE TAGGING A. Provide a valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system excluding check valves, valves within factory-fabricated units, faucets, convenience and lawn watering hose bibbs and shutoff valves at plumbing fixtures. List each valve tag in a valve schedule for each piping system. The valve tagging schedule shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Valve identification number 2. System designation 3. Valve type (gate, ball, auto control, etc.) 4. Manufacturer's catalog number 5. Location of each valve 6. Indicate valves intended for emergency shutoff or other special use 7. Indicate valves are normally-open (NO)or normally-closed (NC) B. Provide reproducible set of floor plan drawings, at 1/8"scale minimum, indicating all valve locations. 111 C. Valve tag schedules shall be framed with an extruded aluminum frame with safety sheet glass. Mount valve schedules where directed by the Owner or Engineer. I 3.10 PIPE LABELING A. Install pipe labels of one of the following types on each system. Include arrows to show direction of flow. 1. Stenciled markers including color-coded background band or rectangle in contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2"beyond ends of lettering. 2. Plastic pipe markers with application system as indicated in this section. Install I on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipe. I 970154 15055-10 10/23/97 I —. 3. Stencil markers black or white for best contrast wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided. B. Provide pipe labels as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine or equipment rooms, accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, I plenums, ceilings, etc., and exterior non-concealed locations: si 1. Within 12"of each valve and control device. II2. Within 12"of each branch excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch where there could be question of flow pattern. I3. Within 12"of locations where pipes pass through walls or floors, ceilings, or other non-accessible enclosures. 11, 4. Within 6"of access doors, access holes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Within 12"of major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Space intermediately at maximum spacing of 10'along each piping run except reduce spacing to 5' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 3.11 CEILING GRID VALVE MARKERS . • IA. Install valve markers on ceiling grid or access door with appropriate color and label below each valve located above ceiling. 3.12 EXCAVATION A. General: Perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths required or indicated on the drawings, in accordance with OSHA. During excavation, deposit material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the excavation banks to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or I cave-ins. Dispose of material unsuitable for backfill as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Grade as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping or by other acceptable method. Unless otherwise specified, all excavation shall be by open cut. Fill I any excess excavation below the levels indicated for structures or pipe with sand, gravel or concrete. B. Trench Excavation: Excavate true to line to an elevation at least 2'above the top of pipe 1 to provide a clear space of not less than 6" nor more than 8" on either side of the pipe. Grade the bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except I for the portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for the proper sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes and depressions for joints dug after the trench bottom has been graded, and in order that the pipe rest upon the prepared bottom for as nearly its full length as practicable, to be only of such length, depth and width as required for I properly making the particular type of joint. 970154 15055-11 10/23/97 I I I C. Unsuitable Material: Where the bottom of the trench is found to be unstable or to include ashes, cinders, all types of refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or 11 fragments of inorganic material, which in the judgement of the Architect/Engineer should • be removed, excavate and remove such unsuitable material to a minimum depth of 12" below the pipe. Backfill the trench with selected bedding material and compact to provide uniform and continuous bearing for the pipe. Dispose of the unsuitable material. D. Shoring Requirements: Perform all shoring and sheeting that is required to protect the excavation and to safeguard employees in accordance with OSHA. Widen excavation to provide for space occupied by shoring and sheeting. Shoring shall meet the requirements of all applicable codes and regulations. E. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric I temperature is less than 35°F. F. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. a 3.13 BACKFILL A. General: Do not backfill until all required inspections are made and tests are performed for the specific utility. Backfill with the excavated materials if it meets the requirements specified for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or other materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Broken concrete shall not be used as backfill material. No backfilling shall take place in freezing weather, and no backfill shall be made with frozen material. Adjust the moisture content of the backfill material if required for proper compaction. Reopen any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, to the depth required for proper compaction, refill and compact to specified density. Compact all backfill for structures to the specified density. B. Around Pipe: Deposit suitable backfill material under the haunches of the pipe in 6" 1 layers and thoroughly compact. Backfill to at least 90%of maximum density at optimum moisture content determined by ASTM D698 until the pipe has a minimum cover of 2'. The moisture content of the soil at time of compaction shall be not more than 3% above or 3% below the optimum. Be careful not to disturb the pipe. Carry backfilling on simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to eliminate the possibility of lateral displacement. C. Remainder of Trench: Deposit the remainder of the suitable backfill material exceeding 10" in loose depth and thoroughly compact them to at least 90%of maximum t density at optimum moisture content determined by ASTM D698, except compact the top 12"of backfill below the paving base or subgrade in areas to be paved to at least 95%of maximum density at optimum moisture content determined by ASTM D698. The moisture content of the soil at the time of compaction shall be not more than 4% above or 4% below the optimum. 970154 I 15055-12 10/23/97 a I D. Bedding: Where selected bedding material is required by the drawings or by the Architect/Engineer during construction to replace unsuitable foundation material, crushed rock or gravel bedding shall be used. Depth of bedding shall be 4" or 1/8 of pipe outside diameter, whichever is greater. END OF SECTION • I I I 1 1 I 1 I 970154 15055-13 10/23/97 r I I SECTION 15250 'I MECHANICAL INSULATION 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION IA. Provide for the insulation of the mechanical systems and equipment. B. All pipes, ducts and equipment shall be insulated unless specifically deleted. C. All surfaces subject to sweating or condensation shall have vapor barrier jacket over the insulation. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections I 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055 Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15400-Plumbing 8. Section 15880 Air Distribution (Sheet Metal) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include product description, list of materials, thickness, density and k values for each service or insulation type scheduled, locations, manufacturer's installation 1 instructions, and flame spread and smoke developed ratings. 1.04 DEFINITIONS IA. The word"concealed"as used in this specification refers to insulation in furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, wall cavities, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and above suspended ceiling construction which hides insulation Ifrom view. B. The word"exposed" refers to insulation in all areas where insulation is visible without removal of access panels and ceiling panels, and in mechanical rooms, tunnels, and I rooms without ceilings. IC. The word"all" refers to all locations where insulation is specified. D. The word"cover" refers to an additional outer wrapping not integral with the insulation product. 1 E. The word"jacket' refers to a factory-applied facing integral with the insulation project. I 970154 15250-1 10/23/97 I I I F. "All Service Jacket" (ASJ) refers to a factory-applied white kraft face laminated with aluminum foil and reinforced with glass scrim. G. "Foil-Scrim-Kraft" (FSK) refers to a factory-applied aluminum foil face, laminated and reinforced with glass scrim. PART 2-PRODUCTS I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation: 1. Armaflex 6. Armstrong 2. Certainteed 7. Partek 3. Knauf - 8. Manville 4. Owens-Corning 9. Rubatex 5. Halstead 10. Pittsburgh Coming B. Fitting covers: 1. Zeston 3. Certainteed 1 2. Knauf 4. Ceelco C. Adhesives and coatings: I 1. Foster(B.F.) 3. Childers 2. Armstrong 4. Chicago(CMC) 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS A. All insulation shall be new and shall have a composite(insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive)fire hazard rating as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, or UL 723, not to exceed 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed. Accessories such as coatings, tapes, and adhesives shall have the same component ratings. All insulating materials or their 111 containers shall bear the manufacturer's label and shall have a label indicating compliance with the above rating. B. Insulation thickness shall comply with or exceed ASHRAE/IES 90.1-1989. I 2.03 PIPE INSULATION A. Glass Fiber Insulation: ANSI/ASTM C547; maximum k value of 0.24 at 75°F; non- II combustible; one piece snap-on; temperature range 0°F to+500°F; nominal density of approximately 4 lbs. per cubic foot;jacket: All Service Jacket(ASJ); self-sealing adhesive joints;water permeance of.02 perms; beach puncture rating of 50 units(minimum); tensile strength not less than 35 lbs. per square inch width. B. Unicellular Foam: Flexible, plastic; maximum k value of 0.28 at 75°F; temperature rating- 40 to+220°F; minimum density 6 lbs. per cubic foot; in exterior applications, ultraviolet resistive coating: water base, two coats, flexible semi-gloss paint as recommended by manufacturer of color as selected. • I 970154 15250-2 10/23/97 1 1 2.04 DUCTWORK INSULATION ' A. Flexible Glass Fiber: ASTM C533;all service grade; maximum k value of 0.29 at 75°F for 1.0 lb. density; 0.002 inch flame resistant Foil Reinforced Kraft(FRK)facing meeting ASTM C1136 type II; stapled lap joint and tape on staples of cooling ducts; approximate nominal density .75 lb. per cubic foot; temperature range of 40°F to 250°F. B. Rigid Glass Fiber Board:ASTM C644, maximum k value of 0.24 at 75°F; 0.002 inch flame resistant Foil Reinforced Kraft(FRK)facing, all-service jacket(ASJ); approximate nominal density 3 lbs. per cubic foot;temperature range 0°F to 450°F with stapled lap joints and matching facing tape on staples of cooling ducts. ' C. Accessories: 1. Adhesives: Waterproof, fire-retardant type. 2. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, self-adhesive pad. 3. Joint.Tape: Foil-Scrim-Kraft self-sealing type. 4. Weld Insulation Hangers: Coated steel, 12 gauge minimum. 5. Facing Overlap Fasteners: Outward clinching plated steel staples. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING INSULATION A. All existinginsulation damaged by this Contractor shall be replaced with new insulation as 9 specified herein. 3.02 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that piping, equipment, and ductwork have been tested prior to installing insulation. B. Clean surfaces for adhesives per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Identify all products and/or their respective shipping cartons for flame and smoke ratings. 3.03 INSTALLATION rA. Insulation shall be installed only by persons skilled at such work. The appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance as its mechanical correctness and efficiency. Any insulation installed that is not of specified density and thickness shall be removed and ' replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Any insulation installation found unacceptable by the Architect/Engineer or Owner shall be revised or replaced at the expense of the Contractor. B. Install and apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install insulation at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesive, ' insulation and vapor barrier. D. Where vapor barriers are specified, all portions of the insulation at joints, fittings and hangers shall be vapor sealed. If staples are used, staples shall be coated with a vapor barrier coating. 1 970154 15250-3 10/23/97 1 I E. Continue insulation and vapor barriers continuous through walls, floors and ceilings unless otherwise specified or shown. I F. Where insulation is to be painted, all surfaces shall be properly prepared to receive paint. G. Piping Insulation: I 1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. 2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 1 3. Valves, fittings, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, expansion joints and union insulation shall be as follows: a. Concealed: Flexible blanket glass fiber insulation insert, or built up to same thickness as adjacent pipe insulation and wrapped with vapor barrier vinyl wrapping tape. b. Exposed: Same as above with pre-molded PVC insulation fitting covers taped in place. 4. When installing unicellular foam insulation, three wraps of high quality electrical tape, or other approved means, shall be provided at the following locations to prevent separation: a. Both sides of all fittings. b. Both sides of butt joints between sections. c. All locations which have a tendency to separate due to change in direction, supports, etc. H. Pipe Insulation Covers: 1. Ends or exposed edges of insulation shall be covered with pre-molded covers or made smooth with mastic. I. Ductwork Insulation: . I 1. Flexible insulation shall be installed with edges tightly butted and shall conform to duct surfaces uniformly and firmly. 2. Secure insulation with vapor barrier lap joints with staples. Seal jacket joints on cold ducts with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. I 3. Flexible insulation shall be cut slightly longer than perimeter of duct to insure full thickness at corners. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners on 18"centers where duct is over 24"wide to prevent sagging. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations of mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Seal insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. 970154 - 15250-4 10/23/97 I I 5. Rigid insulation shall be attached with welded or glued pins with self-locking clips. IJoints and clips shall be sealed with 3"vapor barrier tape. 3.04 SCHEDULE 1 A. Pipe Insulation: Insulation shall be installed with materials and thicknesses listed below: System: COLD DOMESTIC WATER (CW) I Location: All piping Insulation/Thickness: Glass fiber pipe insulation, 1/2" Jacket: ASJ I System: HOT DOMESTIC WATER AND CIRCULATING (110°-140°) (HW& HWC) Location: All piping I Insulation/Thickness: Glass fiber pipe insulation: Runouts less than 12': 1/2" 1/2"-2"size: 1" ' Jacket: 2-1/2"and larger: 1-1/2" ASJ System: HOT AND COLD DOMESTIC WATER(HW& CW) Location: Direct buried below floor slab Insulation/Thickness: Unicellular foam insulation, 3/4" 111 Jacket: None System: PLUMBING WASTE Location: All piping I Insulation/Thickness: None Jacket: None System: REFRIGERANT SUCTION (RS) I Location: All piping Insulation/Thickness: Unicellular foam insulation, all pipe sizes, 3/4" Jacket: None System: REFRIGERANT, HOT GAS AND LIQUID (HG, RL) I Location: All piping in building Insulation/Thickness: Unicellular foam insulation, all pipe sizes, 1/2" Jacket: None I System: COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES (D) Location: All piping Insulation/Thickness: Glass fiber, 1/2" I Jacket: ASJ Miscellaneous: As noted on drawings I B. Duct Insulation: Duct insulation shall be as scheduled below. Duct insulation not required where liner specified unless noted otherwise. I 970154 15250-5 10/23/97 I - 1 1 System: LOW PRESSURE SUPPLY AIR AND OUTSIDE AIR ILocation: All except mechanical room Insulation/Thickness/Density: Flexible glass fiber insulation, 1-1/2"; .75 lb. Jacket: FSK vapor barrier System: LOW PRESSURE SUPPLY AIR, OUTSIDE AIR, EXHAUST AIR,AND RELIEF AIR Location: Exposed in mechanical room Insulation/Thickness: Rigid glass fiber board, 1-1/2" Jacket: FSK vapor barrier System: ROUND LOW PRESSURE SUPPLY AIR Location: Mixing box outlet to air outlet Insulation/Thickness: Flexible glass fiber insulation, 1-1/2" Jacket: FSK vapor barrier I System: RETURN, RELIEF AND EXHAUST AIR Location: All Insulation/Thickness/Density: Flexible glass fiber, 1-1/2"; .75 lb. Jacket: FSK vapor barrier System: MISCELLANEOUS Location: As noted on drawings Insulation/Thickness: As noted on drawings Jacket: As noted on drawings END OF SECTION I 1 I I I r I 970154 15250-6 10/23/97 1 I I SECTION 15400 IPLUMBING 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION IA. This section includes providing piping, valves, pumps and accessories for the general plumbing systems. I1.02 CODE AND PERMIT COMPLIANCE A. Work shall be in accordance with all applicable codes. Where the codes and drawings do I not agree, the code shall take precedence; however, code shall take precedence over what is shown only when it is more stringent than that indicated. Items that are allowed by codes which are less stringent than that shown on the drawings shall not be substituted. IB. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all requirements as to permits, fees, etc., and shall comply. All permits, licenses, inspections and arrangements required for the Iwork shall be provided by the Contractors at their expense. C. All utilities shall be installed in accordance with utility company rules and regulations. D. Drawings, plans and schematics and diagrams indicate the general location and the arrangement of piping systems. Wherever practical, install piping as indicated. 1 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055-Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15250-Mechanical Insulation I 8. Section 15440- Plumbing Fixtures 9. Section 15458-Water Heaters 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers'technical product data for: I 1. Valves 2. Pumps I 3. Backflow preventers 4. Relief valves I 970154 15400-1 10/23/97 1 I I I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS I A. Gate, globe, check, and butterfly valves: 1. Crane 7. Lunkenheimer 2. Walworth 8. Milwaukee 3. Powell 9. Hammond 4. Jenkins 10. Nibco 5. Stockham 11. Mueller 6. Victaulic 12. Grinnell B. Gas cocks: I 1. DeZurik 2. Homestead I C. Silent check valves: 1. Mission 4. Marlin 2. Centerline 5. Metraflex 3. Mueller D. Ball valves: I 1. Apollo 5. Crane 2. Lunken 6. Worcester 3. Stockham 7. Milwaukee 4. Neles-Jamesbury 8. Watts E. Water pressure reducing valves: 1 1. Wilkins 3. Bell and Gossett . 2. Watts 4. Cla-Val Co. F. Relief valves: 1. Watts 3. Kunkle I 2. Conbraco 4. Spence G. Backflow preventers: I 1. Cla-Val Co. 5. Beeco 2. Braukman 6. Febco 3. Watts 7. Conbraco 4. Wilkins H. Water hammer arrestors: I 1. Precision Products 5. J. R. Smith 2. Sioux Chief 6. Josam 3. Wade 7. Ancon 4. Zurn 1 . 970154 15400-2 10/23/97 1 I • 2.02 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamps. 2.03 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BELOW GRADE A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, neoprene compression gaskets or lead ' and oakum joints; heavy coating of coal tar varnish on interior and exterior. 2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED A. Copper Tubing, 1-1/4"and Larger: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed, wrought copper fittings, silver brazed joints. B. Copper Tubing, 1"and Smaller. ASTM B88, Type K, flexible copper, no joints located below grade. 2.05 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, cast brass or wrought copper fittings, Grade 95TA solder joints. I2.06 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black, malleable iron or forged steel fittings, screwed or welded joints. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn cast brass or wrought copper fittings, silver brazed joints. 2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body; aluminum, bronze or stainless steel disc; resilient replaceable seat for service temperature up to 230°F; full lug ends; extended neck; 1.0-position lever handle; 125 psig; bubble-tight shutoff, or 2-1/2"-6"size copper connection butterfly valve for roll grooved- end pipe. 2.08 GATE VALVES ' A. 3" and Over Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, OS&Y, bronze single wedge, flanged or grooved ends; 125 psig. 2.09 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 3": Bronze body, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends,with backseating capacity; 125 psig. ' B. Over 3": Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, OS&Y, bronze plug type disc, flanged ends; 125 psig. 1 970154 • 15400-3 10/23/97 I t 2.10 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2-1/2": Bronze, two-piece body, replaceable chrome plated ball,teflon seats and I stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder, threaded or flanged ends; 600 W.O.G. 2.12 GAS COCKS A. Up to 2": Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. , B. Over 2": Cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. 2.13 SWING CHECK VALVES I A. Up to 2": Bronze body and swing disc, solder or screwed ends; 125 psig. B. Over 2": Iron body, bronze trim, bronze swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged 1 ends; 125 psig. 2.14 SPRING-LOADED"SILENT"CHECK VALVES I A. Iron body, bronze trim, spring-loaded, renewable bronze or composition disc, wafer or flanged ends; 125 psig. I 2.15 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Up to 2": Bronze body, renewable nickel alloy seat and renewable disc, stainless steel I internal parts, reinforced diaphragm, stainless steel strainer screen, threaded and single union ends. B. Over 2": Cast iron body, bronze fitted, renewable stainless steel seat and renewable disc, reinforced diaphragm, flanged ends. 2.16 RELIEF VALVES , A. Bronze body, steel stem and stainless steel springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, test lever, renewable disc, capacities ASME certified and labeled. I 2.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced pressure: , 1. Up to 2": Bronze body, renewable seats, stainless steel relief valve seats, shafts and flange bolts, rubber check and relief valves, bronze body test cocks, ball inlet and outlet valves, screwed ends, inlet strainer. Maximum working pressure, 175 psi. 2. Over 2": Epoxy-coated iron body and covers, renewable bronze seats, bronze relief valve with stainless steel trim, inlet and outlet OS&Y rising stem gate valves, bronze body test cocks, flanged ends. Maximum working pressure, 175 psi. 3. Manufacturer as required by local utility company. ' 1 970154 15400-4 10/23/97 1 2.18 PRESSURE TYPE VACUUM BREAKERS 1 A. Bronze body, stainless steel springs, silicone rubber seat discs, polyethylene float. Maximum working pressure, 150 psi. ' 2.19 ATMOSPHERIC VACUUM BREAKERS A. Cast brass body with silicone disc. Polished chrome finish in exposed areas, plain brass Ifinish in concealed areas. 2.20 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Copper body, brass piston, EPDM"0" rings, factory-charged, permanently epoxy sealed; 150 psig. 2.21 EQUIPMENT BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Vending and Ice Machines: Bronze body, double check backflow preventer, FDA accepted. Watts Series 7. B. Dispensing Machines for Carbonated Beverages: Reduced pressure backflow device. Watts Series 009. 2.22 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast iron with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a maximum 1/4"clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material. ' B. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker,with 1/2"connections matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018. C. Expansion Joints. Cast iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts. D. Cleanout Plugs: Cast bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk ' head. Cleanout plugs shall be engraved to identify piping system. E. Floor Cleanouts: Cast iron body and frame,with cleanout plug and adjustable round top as follows: 1. Nickel Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns: a. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8"thick resilient floor finish. b. Exposed rim type,with recess to receive 1/2"thick terrazzo floor finish. c. Exposed finish type, standard mill finish. d. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish. ' e. Exposed flush type, standard mill finish and carpet marker. F. Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron or PVC body adaptable to pipe with cast bronze, brass or PVC cleanout plug; stainless steel cover, vandal-proof screws. G. Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. 970154 15400-5 10/23/97 1 H. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast iron caulking type roof coupling for cast iron P P stacks. 9 2.23 SHOWER AND FLOOR DRAIN FLASHING A. Shower drains: (Non-slab-on-grade) Non-plasticized, chlorinated, polyethylene, , concealed, water-proof membrane, .040 inches thick, solvent weldable. Full size of shower basin plus 12". Basis of design: Chloraloy. B. Floor drains and floor sinks: (Non-slab-on-grade) Non-plasticized, chlorinated, I polyethylene, concealed, water-proof membrane, .040 inches thick, solvent weldable 48" square minimum. Basis of design: Chloraloy. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PIPING-GENERAL , A. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. B. Install piping sloped downward at a minimum slope of 1/4" per foot(2%)for piping 3"and smaller and 1/8" per foot(1%)for piping 4"and larger unless noted otherwise. C. Install backwater valves in drain piping as indicated and required by codes. For interior installations, provide cleanout covers flush to floor centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service. • D. Provide cleanouts as required by code at each change of direction greater than 45° at minimum intervals of 50'for piping 4"and smaller and 100'for larger piping at base of each vertical soil or waste stack 18"above finished floor elevation. E. Provide double grade cleanouts, as detailed, on sanitary and storm lines leaving the building. Locate cleanouts within the first five (5) lineal feet from the building. Provide 4" concrete slab at each cleanout, minimum 18"x 18",with top flush with grade. F. Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains with trap of required size. , G. Remove dirt and debris from the interior of the piping system as work progresses. H. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. 1 I. Vent terminals(VTR's) shall penetrate roof a minimum of 6'from any fire wall. J. Test systems in accordance with the procedures required by authorities having 1 jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows: 1. Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test the piping systems upon completion of rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system and fill with water to a point of overflow but not less than 10'of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the test starts through the completion of the test. View all joints for leakage. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective actions. 970154 15400-6 10/23/97 1 I 1 2. Architect/Engineer shall be notified two working days(48 hours) prior to scheduled testing time. I3.02 WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PIPING (SANITARY)-BELOW FLOOR 1 A. Lay pipe on the ground, piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment,with unbroken continuity of invert. B. Install floor cleanout covers for flooring types as indicated. I3.03 WASTE,VENT AND DRAIN PIPING (SANITARY) -ABOVE FLOOR A. PVC piping shall not be installed in return air plenums. I B. Install expansion joints on vertical ris ers as indicated and required by.codes. IC. Install wall cleanout covers for concealed piping types as indicated. D. , Install flashing flange and clamping device at each stack or vent passing through water- Iproof membranes. E. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing in accordance with roofing manufacturer's requirements. IF. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 1 G. Provide drainage piping runouts to roof drains of size indicated. Locate runouts as close as possible to bottom of roof structure. IH. Waste and vent pipes exposed to view in finished areas shall be chrome plated. I. Vent stacks shall terminate in accordance with applicable plumbing code or as follows: 1 1. At least 10 feet horizontally or 2 feet above doors,windows or other ventilating openings of the building or adjacent building. 111 2. No closer than 2 feet under any roof gable. 3. No closer than 2 feet from any wall extending above flat roof building. I4. No closer than 6 feet from any fire wall. 5. Minimum 7 feet above if roof is used for other purpose than weather protection (occupied). 3.04 PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIERS IA. Bolt support feet or base plates to floor with appropriate anchors. B. Install carriers per manufacturer's requirements and as required by code. ' 970154 15400-7 10/23/97 I 1 3.05 I WATER PIPING A. Conceal all pipe in walls, piping chases, utility spaces, above ceilings or below grade or floors unless indicated to be exposed to view. B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for I water-tight installation. C. Install ball valves on each branch and riser, close to main,where branch or riser serves two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and additionally where indicated. D. Install isolation or stop valves and supplies on the inlet of each plumbing fixture or equipment item and additionally where indicated. Valves shall be chrome plated if 1 exposed to view. E. Install pressure vacuum breakers where shown and required on lawn sprinkler systems as required by local code. Install as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Install domestic water expansion tank on facilities which include a master backflow preventer. Install as recommended by manufacturer and required by local code. I G. Install domestic hot water circulating pump where shown. Install with shutoff valves, inlet strainer, and check valve on discharge. Provide aquastat on hot water circulating to pump, to cycle pump. Provide wiring to pump. H. Water pipes exposed to view in finished spaces shall be chrome plated. I. Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. J. Install check valve on discharge of each circulating pump and additionally where 1 indicated. K. Install a ball valve on each hot water recirculating loop, the discharge of each circulating I pump and additionally where indicated. L. Install hose bibbs with vacuum breakers. M. Install backflow preventers and vacuum breakers at each connection to mechanical arncal equipment and systems, in compliance with applicable codes and authority having jurisdiction. Pipe backflow preventer relief outlet to nearest floor drain or safe waste outlet. Install backflow preventer at a maximum of 48"above floor for service. N. At connections to mechanical systems or equipment, install pressure reducing valves, if required by equipment manufacturer, with inlet and outlet isolation valves, balance valve bypass and pressure gauge on valve outlet. O. Provide branch isolation valve for each hose bibb and wall hydrant. I P. Install union and thermometer on inlet and outlet connection to each water heater. Q. Secure piping at connection to fixtures. I 1 970154 15400-8 10/23/97 1 . I R. Install a pressure reducing valve wherever water services pressure exceeds 80 psig. Set ' x S. Adjpressureust positionreducing of balancevalveto valv80espsig inma hot waimum.ter circulating systems. Insure that hot water is circulating to all fixtures. IT. Adjust position of balance valves in tempered water system serving showers and locker room lavatories. Insure that circulating system is flowing enough water to satisfy I minimum flow requirements of thermostatic mixing valves. U. Install thermostatic mixing valves and provide connecting piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings. IV. Clean and disinfect water piping in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction or with the absence of such publication, the following as a minimum: I1. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 PPM of chlorine. Valve off system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with I water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 PPM of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having I jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by authorities shows evidence of contamination. 1 2. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities. W. Test water piping as required by authorities having jurisdiction,with the absence of such I publication, provide the following as a minimum: 1. Subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system I materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for a period of 4 hours. Repair leaks using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. I 2. Architect/Engineer shall be notified two working days(48 hours) prior to schedule testing time. 1 3.06 HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PLUMBING FIXTURES I A. Install piping to fixtures per all applicable codes, A.D.A. and Ne. P.H. (Nebraska Provisions for the Handicapped, latest edition). 1. Maintain clearance requirements. ' 2.3. Flush valves shall be installed so that flush handle is on the wide side of the stall. Flush valve height shall be coordinated to clear grab bars. B. Install water and drain piping insulation per manufacturer's and ADA requirements. 1 1 970154 15400-9 10/23/97 I 1 3.07 NATURAL GAS PIPING A. Gas piping may be installed in accessible, above ceiling spaces(subject to the approval ' of the authority having jurisdiction)whether or not such spaces are used as a plenum. Valves shall not be located in such spaces. B. Concealed gas piping shall not be located in solid partitions. C. Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes chute, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct, dumbwaiter, elevator shafts, or other enclosed spaces. D. Do not install gas regulators or isolation valves in air plenums. E. Do not install gas piping in floors. F. Install pipe sleeve and mechanical sleeve seals in foundation and basement wall penetrations. G. Install gas piping at a uniform grade of 1/4"in 15' upward to risers and from the risers to the meter, service regulator, or equipment. H. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down. I I. Install branch outlet connections from the top or sides of horizontal lines. J. Install unions in pipes 2"smaller adjacent to each valve at final connections to each piece of equipment and where indicated. K. Install gas cocks as required to isolate each piece of equipment and where indicated. Provide dirt leg downstream of each gas cock. L. Install gas piping systems upstream from equipment shutoff valves electrically continuous and bonded to a grounded electrode in accordance with NFPA 70. M. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. N. Test gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54 and local utility requirements. I 3.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Install water hammer arrestors at each fixture connection or each battery of fixture 111 connections to eliminate water hammer as required by applicable codes and additionally where indicated. B. Install water hammer arrestors in easily accessible locations and provide ceiling or wall mounted access doors. 3.09 CONNECTION SIZES A. Piping connections to fixtures and equipment shall be as follows unless shown otherwise: 1 1 970154 15400-10 10/23/97 I I Fixture or Equipment Waste Vent CW HW IWater closets (flush valve) 4" 2" 1-1/4" — Urinals 2" 1-1/2" 3/4" — Lavatories 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1/2" 1/2" I Sinks 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" Service and mop sinks 3" 1-1/2" 3/4" 3/4" Showers 2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" I Drinking fountains 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1/2" Electric water coolers 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1/2" — Drains Shown 1-1/2" — — Washing machine 2" 1-1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 1 Hose bibbs or wall hydrants — — 1/2" — 3.10 CLEANOUT LOCATION COORDINATION 1 A. Cleanouts located in finished areas shall be carefully set in locations reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. Failure to obtain review by the Architect/Engineer shall subject the cleanout to relocation at the Contractor's costa I B. Final location shall not compromise access or operation of the cleanout. I C. Only a written request by the Contractor to the Architect/Engineer shall cause reconsideration of the final location. D. Coordinate cleanout cover type with type of finished wall or floor surface. 1 END OF SECTION I 1 I I I I 1 I 970154 15400-11 10/23/97 I I I SECTION 15440 I PLUMBING FIXTURES IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION IA. This section includes providing the following: 1. Plumbing fixtures and related accessories. I 2.3. Floor and roof drains, floor sinks, trench drains, and drain specialties. Water hydrants and hose bibbs. CODE AND PERMIT COMPLIANCE I1.02 A. Work shall be in accordance with all applicable codes. Where the codes and drawings do not agree, the code shall take precedence; however, code shall take precedence over I what is shown only when it is more stringent than that indicated. Items that are allowed by codes which are less stringent than that shown on the drawings shall not be substituted. IB. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all requirements as to permits, fees, etc., and shall comply. All permits, licenses, inspections and arrangements required for the work shall be provided by the Contractors at their expense. I C. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). I1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: II.2. Drawings General and Supplementary Conditions • 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections I 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055-Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15400-Plumbing Ill 1.04 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet, specialties, accessories; clearly indicate rated capacities. B. Submit rough-in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements, required I clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages. Coordinate requirements with Architectural shop drawings for fixtures installed in case work, countertops, cabinets, etc. Provide templates for installations. 1 I 970154 15440-1 10/23/97 1 C. Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for power supply to units. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and field installed portions. D. Submit certification of compliance with ANSI, UL,ASHRAE and all other applicable standards. Submit certification of compliance with performance requirements specified. ' E. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and trim to Owner in a quantity of one device for each 10 fixtures. F. Furnish repair kits complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins, retainers packings, 0-rings, sleeves, and seats in a quantity of 1 kit for each 20 faucets or flush valve type. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Fixtures, equipment and accessories are specified by manufacturer's numbers as to the type and quality required. Specified manufacturers and approved equal manufacturers are as follows: Approved Equal Fixture, Item Or Equipment Specified Manufacturer Manufacturer Vitreous China and Enameled American Standard Kohler Cast Iron Fixtures Eljer Crane Briggs Gerber Mansfield Universal Rundle TotStainless Steel Sinks Elkay Just Just • Moen Precast Basins and Mop Williams Fiat Sinks Mustee Drinking Fountains Halsey-Tayler Oasis Elkay Haws Sunroc Supply Fittings and Faucets American Standard Kohler Kohler Eljer Crane Chicago Moen Delta Symmons Cambridge Brass Valley Grohe I 970154 ' 15440-2 10/23/97 1 I I IFixture, Item Or Equipment Specified Manufacturer Approved EqualManufacturer Waste Fittings, Stops and Mcguire Dearborn Supplies Brasscraft I Shower Mixing Valves, American Standard Powers Shower Head,Arm and Leonard Escutcheon Kohler I . Symmons Eljer Crane Moen I Lawler Alsons Zurn I Fixture Carriers J.R. Smith Josam Zurn Wade Ancon I Flush Valves Sloan Zurn Delaney Toto I Water Closet Seats Bemis Beneke Centoco Church I Olsonite Floor Drains, Floor Sinks, and J.R. Smith Wade Drain Specialties Zurn Josam I Ancon Jonespec Washing Machine Supply and Guy Gray --- ' Drain Fittings Hose Bibbs Chicago Faucet Woodford I 2.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Architect/Engineer may reject any fixture, equipment item or accessory which in their I opinion is not of the quality specified. 2.03 MATERIALS I A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, acid resisting, elongated bowl, siphon jet,white. 1. Handicapped fixtures shall have 16" rim height. 111 B. Flush Valves: Chrome plated, diaphragm type with vacuum breaker, screwdriver back- check angle stop, designed for ADA. IC. Closet Seats: Solid plastic, open front, elongated bowl type, no cover, concealed check hinge, white. 1 970154 15440-3 10/23/97 • 1 I D. Urinals: Vitreous china, acid resisting, blowout,white. r E. Lavatories: Vitreous china, front overflow,wall hung to have concealed arm supports, countertop to be self-rimming, acid resisting, white. • F. Mop Sinks: Molded stone or terrazzo, one-piece basin with stainless steel rim guards; basin shall be of standard color and set level in a bed of cement mortar per manufacturer's requirements. Basin shall have integral chrome plated drain with tailpiece. Provide tile flange when set against walls with ceramic tile finish. G. Drinking Fountains: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish, non-squirt bubbler and self- closing valve. , H. Stainless Steel Sinks: 18 gauge, Type 302 (18-8)stainless steel, brushed satin finish, sound deadening undercoat, self-rimming. ' I. Washing Machine Supply and Drain: 16 gauge steel, corrosion-resistant epoxy finish, duo-close brass faucet with ball type valves, 2"drain outlet. J. Hose Bibbs, Warm Locations: Brass body, chrome plated finish, loose tee key in public areas, adjustable packing nut, replaceable 0-ring, vacuum breaker hose end. K. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker,with 1/2"connections matching piping system, complying with ASSE 1018. L. Handicap Accessible Plumbing Fixture Pipe Insulation: Fully molded, closed cell vinyl, 3/16"thick, UV protected, interlocking multi-piece assemblies, nylon fasteners, K value= 1.17. M. Shower Valves: Pressure-balancing shower mixing valve with adjustable stop screw, ' lever handle, shower head with arm and flange, integral stops. Shower head with semi- adjustable spray pattern, ball joint positioning. Valve with bronze stem, stainless steel piston, adjustable brass packing nut, brass limit stop screw, brass cast valve body, copper nickel chrome plated trim. 2.04 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS I A. Floor Drain, D-1: J. R. Smith#2010, cast iron body, flashing collar, 6" round adjustable nickel bronze grate. B. Floor Drain, D-2: J. R. Smith#2110, cast iron body, flashing collar, 8-1/2" round medium duty grate. C. Floor Sink, D-e: J. R. Smith#3100, 6"deep, acid-resistant coated, cast iron body, ' flashing collar, 8-1/2"square nickel bronze 3/4 grate, aluminum domed bottom strainer. 2.05 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES I A. Downspout Nozzle, DN-1: J. R. Smith#1770, nickel bronze body with wall flange. 1 1 970154 15440-4 10/23/97 r I I 2.06 PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIERS I A. General: All wall hung plumbing fixtures shall be supported by chair type or back wall support plates as follows. Verify space available for carriers and provide appropriate carrier to fit space. Carriers shall be of type and design required by the fixture and the 1 building construction. 1. Water closets shall be supported by J. R. Smith series 200 or 400 with adjustable I base supports and wall coupling, cast iron waste fitting, face plate and base supports, ABS nipple and coupling, galvanized bolts, nuts and washers and chrome plated cap nuts. I 2. Urinals, drinking fountains and water coolers shall be supported by J. R. Smith series 600 or 800 with stub feet, pipe supports, adjustable plate, galvanized bolts, nuts and washers and chrome plated cap nuts. I3. Lavatories and sinks in stud partitions shall be supported by J. R. Smith series 700 with stub feet, pipe supports, concealed support arms, leveling and securing screws, galvanized bolts, nuts and washers. I4. Lavatories and sinks in partitions other than studs shall be supported by J. R. Smith series 720, with steel wall plate, through-wall bolts, concealed arms with Ileveling and securing screws. 2.07 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM IA. All escutcheons shall be chrome plated cast brass. Provide set screw in exposed locations. I B. Plumbing trim utilized shall be provided with renewable seats and replaceable internal working components. C. Unless otherwise specified, each shower shall be provided with pressure balancing, non- ' scald, mixing valve. Contractor shall set temperature limit to not more than 110°F upon completion of project. ID. Unless otherwise specified, each lavatory shall be provided with loose key angle compression stops, flexible risers, adjustable semi-cast brass P-trap with ground swivel joint, slip inlet and 17 gauge trap arm and tailpiece. Provide loose key straight stop supplies for wheelchair lavatories and as required by code. 1 E. Unless otherwise specified, each sink shall be provided with loose key angle compression stops and flexible risers, 17 gauge tailpiece with brass locking and coupling nuts, ' adjustable semi-cast brass P-trap with ground swivel joint, slip inlet and 17 gauge trap arm. Provide additional tailpieces and continuous waste pieces for multiple compartment sinks as required. IF. Unless otherwise specified, each electric water cooler shall be provided with straight wheelhandle compression stop, flexible riser, adjustable semi-cast brass P-trap with ground swivel joint, slip-inlet and 17 gauge trap arm. Provide angle stops for drinking I fountains. G. Provide loose key angle compression stop and flexible riser on tank style water closets. I 970154 15440-5 10/23/97 I I H. All exposed fixture trim shall be polished chrome plated unless otherwise specified. I 2.08 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. Water Closets: I 1. WC-1 (Public): Wall hung, flush valve. siphon jet. Bowl: American Standard "Afwall"2257.103, 1.6 gallon flush I Flush Valve: Sloan Regal XL 111, 1.6 gallon flush Seat: Olsonite No. 10CC. 2. WC-2 (Handicapped): Wall hung, flush valve, siphon jet. 111 Bowl: American Standard"Afwall"2257.103, 1.6 gallon flush Flush Valve: Sloan Regal XL 111, 1.6 gallon flush I Seat: Olsonite No. 10CC. B. Urinals: I 1. UR-1 (Public): Wall hung, blowout, flush valve. Bowl: - American Standard "Lynbrook"6601.012, 1.0 I gallon flush Flush Valve: Sloan Regal XL 180-1. 2. . UR-2 (Handicapped): Wall hung, siphon jet, flush valve. I Bowl: American Standard"Lynbrook"6601.012, 1.0 gallon flush Flush Valve: Sloan Regal XL 186-1. I C. Lavatories: 1. L-1: Wall hung with 4"faucet centers. I Bowl: American Standard"Lucerne" 0355.012. Faucet/Drain Assembly: American Standard 5400.142H single lever handle, 0.5 GPM,with grid drain. I 2. L-2 (Handicapped): Wall hung, 4"faucet centers. Bowl: American Standard 9141.011. Faucet/Drain Assembly: American Standard 7400.172H gooseneck I spout,wrist blades, 0.5 GPM,with wheelchair offset grid drain. 3. L-3: Countertop, self-rimming, 4"faucet centers. I Bowl: American Standard"Aqualyn"0476.028. Faucet/Drain Assembly: American Standard 5400.142H single lever handle, 0.5 GPM,with grid drain. I I I 970154 15440-6 10/23/97 I I I D. Mop Sinks: I1. MS-1: Floor set Basin: Williams"Serviceptor"SB-900 series. Verify size with architectural plans. ' Faucet: American Standard 8344.111, wall mount with vacuum breaker,wall brace, stops in shanks. Drain: Chrome plated strainer to be provided with Ibasin. E. Drinking Fountains: 1. DF-1 (Public): Wall hung fountain with back panel. Bowl: Elkay EDFP-19C Valve: Self-closing pushbar. I2. DF-2 (Handicapped): Wall hung fountain with back panel. Bowl: Elkay EDFP-19C Valve: Self-closing pushbar. I3. DF-3: Wall hung bracket fountain Bowl: Halsey Taylor 4540 IValve: Self-closing cross-handle. F. Sinks: Ii. S-1:Sink: Stainless steel, bar sink. Elkay model BLR-15C. Faucet: Elkay LKA-2438, two-handle faucet. I Drain: Elkay LK-36, basket strainer. j 2. S-2: Stainless steel, self-rimming, double bowl. Sink: Elkay LR-3322. ' Faucet: American Standard 4205.441 single lever handle less spray. Drain: American Standard 4320.024, removable crumb I cup strainer. G. Showers: Ii. SH-1 (Standard): Basin: None Faucet: Powers 905"Biltmore"series pressure balanced I mixing valve, lever handle, adjustable limit stops and fixed position, adjustable spray pattern, vandal-resistant shower head. IH. Washing Machine Supply: 1. WMS: I Wall Box: Guy Gray WB-200. I 970154 15440-7 10/23/97 I 1 Hose Bibbs: 1. HB: I Faucet: Woodford 24P-3/4 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify all dimensions in field. Verify that all plumbing fixtures can be installed in ' accordance with applicable codes, the original design, and the referenced standards. B. Examine rough-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. C. Examine walls, floors, cabinets and countertops for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIERS A. Bolt support feet or base plates to floor with appropriate anchors. ' B. Install carriers per manufacturer's requirements and as required by code. 3.03 INSTALLATION 111 A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, applicable codes, the original design, and the referenced standards. B. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation. ' C. Provide all work and material required to rough-in, connect up and install supply, drain, waste, soil and vent piping as required for proper operation. , D. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture. Install faucets and flush valves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. F. Set all countertop fixtures with caulking compound and seal edge of rim with white or clear silicone sealant. G. All spaces between fixtures and finished surfaces shall be caulked and pointed square with an approved silicone sealant resulting in a neat and smooth appearance; color selected by Architect. H. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor unless noted otherwise. 970154 1 , 5440-8 10/23/97 I II. Trap and vent all floor drains connected to the sanitary or acid waste. J. Install floor drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membrane where penetrated. 1 K. Remove dirt and debris from floor and roof drain strainers, domes and traps. I L. Protect drains during construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and prevent damage from traffic and construction work. M. Install downspout nozzles approximately 6"above final grade to spill onto splash block. IN. Install hose bibbs and hydrants with vacuum breakers where indicated. I O. Install drinking fountain and cuspidor per manufacturer's recommendation. Cuspidor shall include trap, and water supply from adjacent drinking fountain. P. Install trap primers in easily accessible locations and provide ceiling or wall mounted Iaccess doors,if required. 3.04 HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install piping and insulation per all applicable codes,A.D.A. and Ne.P.H. (Nebraska Provisions for the Handicapped, latest edition)clearance requirements. I3.05 EXISTING FIXTURES A. Where existing fixtures are to be removed and reinstalled, provide all new working Icomponents, same as new fixtures. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest. 1 B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures. 3.07 ADJUSTING I A. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow. IB. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops. C. Set temperature limit stops for mixing valves. I3.08 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods I and materials. B. Clean faucet aerators prior to Owner occupancy. I 970154 15440-9 10/23/97 I 1 1 3.09 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by the 1 Owner. END OF SECTION ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 970154 ' 15440-10 10/23/97 I 1 1 SECTION 15458 ' WATER HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. This section includes providing water heaters. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: ' 1.2. Drawings General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements ' 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055- Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15400-Plumbing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for manufactured products and assemblies including water heaters, storage tanks and circulating pumps. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide a 5-year warranty on the storage tank. B. Provide a 5-year warranty for the heat exchanger. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE/COMPLIANCE A. Underwriters Laboratory, UL. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, ASHRAE. ' D. National Electric Code, NEC. E. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc., ETL. F. American National Standards Institute, ANSI. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Commercial water heaters: 1. Weben-Jarco 5. Lochinvar ' 2. Teledyne Laars 6. Raypak 3. State 7. PVI 4. A. O. Smith 970154 15458-1 10/24/97 1 1 B. Pumps: 1. Bell&Gossett 4. Grunfoss 2. Amtrol 5. Taco 3. Armstrong 2.02 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATER A. Factory assembled, electric storage type, capacity as indicated, high density or foam insulation, enameled metal jacket, stainless steel or incoloy sheath, multiple elements wired to ceramic terminal block, dual anode rods, sequencing control with transformer. B. ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, 150 psig working pressure. C. Complies with latest ASHRAE standard. 2.03 STORAGE TANK , A. Packaged storage tank with epoxy lining, tank thermometer, temperature sensing well, access opening, support legs. B. ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, 150 psig working pressure. C. Tank shall have PVC vinyl covering foam insulating jacket. ' 2.04 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected,with resiliently-mounted motor for in-line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psig maximum working pressure. B. Construction: Bronze casing, bronze impeller keyed to shaft, two oil-lubricated bronze 1 sleeve bearings, alloy steel shaft with sleeve, integral thrust collar, mechanical seal, suction and discharge gauge port. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes. B. Startup test and adjust equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide access around equipment for service including tube or heat exchanger removal. D. Pipe relief valve discharge to nearest floor drain. E. Install floor-set equipment on 4"concrete housekeeping pad. F. Clean and flush tanks after installation per applicable codes or other sections of this specification. G. Connect piping to equipment with isolation valves and union. Install drain valves and terminate over nearest floor drain. 970154 15458-2 10/24/97 1 I I H. Install thermometers on the inlet and the outlet connection of water heater or storage tank. I. Install isolation valves on inlet and outlet connection of water heater or tank. J. Install hot water circulating pump(s) between heater and storage tank as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for support and location. K. Install isolation valves and unions on the suction and discharge connections to circulating pumps. L. Install non-slam check valve on the discharge connection to circulating pumps. M. Install pressure and temperature test ports on the suction and discharge connection to each circulating pump. END OF SECTION I 1 1 I I I I 970154 15458-3 10/24/97 I I I SECTION 15600 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1 1.01 DESCRIPTION IA. This section includes providing gas-fired make-up air units. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS $ A. When included as a part of this specification,the following contain related requirements. 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements I 5. Section 15050- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055-Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15880-Air Distribution (Sheet Metal) 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, connections, arrangement, accessories, and Icontrols. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers installation instructions. IC. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include relevant instructions. 1.04 WARRANTY IA. Provide ten year manufacturer's warranty including coverage for heat exchangers. B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty including coverage for refrigeration compressors. PART2-PRODUCTS I2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Indirect gas-fired make-up air units: 1. Hastings 4. Bananza 2. Lennox 5. Sterling I3. Reznor 6. Weather-Rite 2.02 INDIRECT GAS-FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. Casing: Constructed of galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel. Provide access panelsll for access to motors, filters and electronic controls. For outdoor installation, stal anon, provide weatherproof casing. I 970154 15600-1 10/23/97 1 I B. Fan: Centrifugal type with prelubricated ball bearings and V-belt drive. Provide high efficiency motor. C. Heat Exchanger: Welded construction, 409 stainless steel tubes and header plates with stainless steel internal baffles. i D. Burners: Aluminized steel with stainless steel ribbon inserts. E. Controls: 1. Control transformer 2. Combination gas valve containing main and pilot gas cocks 3. Main gas pressure regulator 4. Pilot gas pressure regulator 5. Redundant solenoid gas valves 6. Pilot solenoid gas valve 7. 100% safety shutoff 8. High limit control 9. Lb./Oz. gas regulator F. Filters: 2"throw-away, extended surface type. G. Remote Control Panel: NEMA 1 panel. Provide indicator lights for blower, heating, 1 blocked filter, and operating switches. H. Options: I 2. Outside and return air shutoff damper, damper motor and end switch 3. Vibration isolators 4. Day-night operation 5. Fused disconnect switch I. Temperature controls shall consist of solid state electronic modulation, down to 30%of rated input, providing constant leaving air temperature. A temperature selector mounted in the control cabinet remote from unit shall permit adjustment of leaving air temperature from a convenient location. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Set downflow furnaces, installed on combustible floors, on additive non-combustible base. I END OF SECTION I 970154 I 15600-2 10/23/97 I I I SECTION 15650 IDIRECT EXPANSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL 1 A. The work under this section includes providing complete installations of direct expansion refrigeration systems. a1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections I 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055- Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15250-Mechanical Insulation 8. Section 15800-Heat Transfer Equipment 9. Section 15850-Air Handling Units and Fans I1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, piping diagram, and wiring diagram. Submit data indicating pipe sizing and pipe size calculations. I , B. Product Data: Provide data for manufactured equipment including all performance capacities. IC. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include relevant instructions, startup and shutdown information. I1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide 5-year factory parts warranty for compressors. UPART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS IA. Equipment: 1. McQuay 5. Trane 2. York 6. Carrier 3. Lennox 7. Aaon 4. Bohn 970154 • 15650-1 /1 023/ 79 1 I I B. Refrigerant specialties: 1. Alco 3. Meuller I 2. Sporlan 4. Superior 2.02 REFRIGERANT I A. Refrigerant: R-22 2.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Copper Tubing: Type L, hard drawn, wrought copper fittings, silver brazed joints, factory- degreased and sealed. 2.04 REFRIGERANT.SPECIALTIES A. Liquid-Moisture Indicators: Double port type, UL Listed, copper or brass body, solder ends, sight glass, color coded moisture indicator and cap. B. Diaphragm Packless Valves: UL Listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder ends. C. Packed Angle Valves: Forged brass, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, solder ends. D. Packed Ball Valves: Two-piece, bolted, forged brass body with Teflon ball seals and I copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals. E. Straight Line or Angle Line Type Strainers: UL Listed, brass shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge,with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass. F. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type Strainers: UL Listed, steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen. 9 G. Globe Type Check Valves: Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, Teflon seat disc. H. Straight Through Type Check Valves: Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat. I. Straight Through or Angle Type Pressure Relief Valves: Brass body and disc, neoprene r seat, factory-sealed and ASME stamped. J. Replaceable Cartridge, Angle Type Filter Driers: UL Listed, steel shell and cap, perforated brass strainer and molded desiccant filter core. K. Permanent Straight Through Type Filter Driers: UL Listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core. 111 I 970154 15650-2 10/23/97 I I I L. Solenoid Valves: 1. Valve: Direct or pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly,with solder or threaded ends. Stem shall permit manual operation in case of coil failure. 1 2. Coil Assembly: UL Listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, and Iintegral junction box. M. Expansion Valves: 1. Angle or Straight Through Type: Brass body, internal or external equalizer, adjustable, super heat setting, replaceable inlet strainer,with replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb well. 2. Selection: Select for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10°F super heat. IN. Receivers: UL Listed, steel,with tappings for inlet, outlet and pressure relief valve. O. Flexible Connectors: Corrugated bronze hose with single layer of exterior braiding, Iminimum 9" long with soldered copper tube ends. 2.05 CONDENSING UNITS I A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, starters, disconnects, and service outlets. B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish and removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners. C. Compressor: Resiliently mounted scroll compressor(s)with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, cylinder unloaders with electric solenoids, motor overload protection, service valves, and filter drier. ID. Condenser. 1. Coil: Seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins. Provide hail guards on all coils IImounted vertically or diagonally. 2. Fans: Direct drive axial fans, resiliently mounted with guard and motor. 1 3. Motors: Permanently lubricated bearings with built-in current and overload protection. IE. Controls: 1. High and low pressure cutouts for compressor, oil pressure control, non-recycling pump-down, and reset relay. I 2. Low ambient controls to permit operation down to 35 degrees F ambient temperature. 970154 15650-3 10/23/97 I I 3. Timer circuits to prevent rapid loading and unloading of compressor. I 4. Starters, disconnects, service outlets and single point electrical connection. 5. Three phase powered compressors shall be provided with overload protection I and phase failure protection in all three phases. 2.06 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT I A. Provide independent refrigerant circuits, factory supplied and piped, for each compressor. B. Provide for each refrigerant circuit as applicable to size of system: I 1. Liquid line solenoid valve 2. Filter dryer 3. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator 4. Thermal expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure 5. Shrader valve at thermal expansion valve suction connection and other locations required to test and service the system 6. Insulated suction line 7. Discharge line check valve 8. Compressor discharge service valve 9. Condenser pressure relief valve 10. Liquid receiver if required PART 3-EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Solder joints with 5% (minimum)silver solder for refrigeration piping service. Flux all I joints per manufacturer's requirements. B. Purge piping with slow stream of nitrogen during soldering. Flush piping per industry I standards and evacuate. C. Route and size piping per manufacturer's requirements. Submit piping diagrams for review prior to installation. D. Install equipment and specialties in accordance with manufacturer" instructions. E. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. F. Piping sizing and routing shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. I G. Provide stop valve, solenoid valve, liquid-moisture indicator and thermal expansion valve with thermal bulb on refrigerant liquid line. H. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. I. Install flexible piping connectors parallel to compressor shaft. I 970154 15650-4 10/23/97 I I . I J. Install permanent liquid line filter dryer on systems up to 15 tons, replaceable cartridge type on systems larger than 15 tons. I 1. Install isolation valve around replaceable filter dryer. Provide one set of replaceable cartridges for each filter dryer installed. ' K. Install receiver with 125%of system capacity with relief valve, isolation valves and sight glass where required by refrigeration equipment. iL. Install oil separators, double suction and/or double hot gas risers,where required by piping system. I M. Support hot gas piping from structure with vibration isolating hangers. N. Provide hot gas bypass on coils where indicated. Bypass to include isolation valve, Isolenoid valve to open with liquid line solenoid, and suction pressure regulating valve. O. Buried refrigerant suction lines shall be heat traced with electric heat tape as required by equipment manufacturers. Provide power supply separate from compressor. I P. Utilize flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not P PP 9 9 absorb vibration. IQ. Insulate with 0.75 inch minimum thick flexible elastomeric closed cell insulation. 3.02 TESTS A. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using leak detection. IB. Charge system with refrigerant and put into operation; test equipment performance. Provide cooling season start-up, and winter season shut-down for first year of operation. I END OF SECTION I 1 I 1 I 970154 15650-5 10/23/97 I I I SECTION 15800 IHEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION • IA. Description of system: 1. Refrigerant coils I2. Electric coils 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings I 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements I 5. Section 15050- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055-Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15250-Mechanical Insulation 8. Section 15650-Direct Expansion Refrigeration Systems I 9. Section 15950-Temperature Control (DDC) 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Product certification data: Assurance of compliance with applicable codes and standards. B. Shop drawings: Each equipment item specified; include accessories, wiring diagrams Iapplicable, and warranty. C. Product performance data ID. Samples: Color chart. E. Closeout information: Guarantee, Owner instruction report. IF. Manufacturer's installation manuals/instructions IPART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS IA. Coils: 1. McQuay 6. Aerofin I 2. Trane 7. York 3. Carrier 8. Pace 4. Temtrol 9. Dunham-Bush 5. Aaon Coil I 970154 15800-1 10/23/97 I I B. Electric coils: 1. Brasch 2. Indeeco 2.02 REFRIGERANT COILS - A. Fabrication: 1. Headers: Seamless copper or brass with silver brazed joints. 2. Tubes: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, expanded into fins, with brazed joints. 3. Fins: Aluminum or copper continuous plate type with full fin collars or individual helical finned tube type wound under tension. Maximum fin spacing: 10 fins per inch. 4. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel with mounting holes, and tube supports for long coils, minimum 16 gauge mill galvanized steel, G-90. 5. Distributor: Brass or copper venturi type with properly selected nozzles for refrigerant distribution. Suction nozzle to be fitted with 1/4"flare equalizer connection. Seamless copper distributor tubes. B. Testing: Air test under water at 350 psig for maximum working pressure of 250 psig and 300°F. Clean, dehydrate, and seal with dry nitrogen charge. C. Configuration: Brass or copper venturi type liquid distributor with seamless copper distributor tubes. D. Standards: Coils tested, rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. 2.03 ELECTRIC COILS A. Fabrication: 1. Coil: Exposed helical coil of 80% nickel 20%chrome resistance wire with floating refractory ceramic support bushings. Coils shall be machine crimped to stainless steel terminals and insulated with phenolic bushing. Coils exposed to 100% outdoor air shall be finned tubular style. 2. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel. 3. Electric coil module to mate with air handling unit. Coil casing to allow required upstream and downstream airway dimension for proper operation. B. Testing: Dielectrically tested at 2,000 volts at factory. I I 970154 15800-2 10/23/97 r I I C. Controls: I1. Control box with hinged cover and latch. 2. Disk type automatic reset thermal cutout in series with manual reset thermal Icutout. 3. Built-in individually fused contactors. I4. Fused control power transformer. 5. Air flow proving device with auxiliary contact for interlock with fan. I6. Fused disconnect switch interlocked with control panel door. I7. SCR type controller for stepless modulation. D. Standards: ANSI/UL 1096 listed and labeled. PART 3-EXECUTION I 3.01 GENERAL IA. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Do not infringe on access required by other equipment or trades as required for Imaintenance or by codes. 2. Install equipment to permit unit disassembly with minimum disturbance to Iinstalled equipment and piping. 3. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. I3.02 AIR COILS (REFRIGERANT, ELECTRIC) 1 A. Install air coils in ducts and air handling unit casings in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. B. Provide drain pan and drain connection for each cooling coil on multiple coil installations. I Fabricate drain pan from 20 gauge stainless steel coated inside with two coats of bitumastic. Extend a minimum of 3 inches from face of coil on entering air side, and a minimum of 6 inches from face of coil on leaving air side. 111 3.03 ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT A. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but not Ifactory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. END OF SECTION I I 970154 15800-3 10/23/97 I SECTION 15845 111 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION IA. This section includes providing energy recovery units. I 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification,the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15250-Mechanical Insulation 7. Section 15850-Air Handling Units and Fans I8. Section 15880-Air Distribution (Sheet Metal) 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacity of selected model clearly indicated,weights (shipping, installed and operating),furnished specialties and accessories, and installation and start-up instructions. IB. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions,weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of I components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to units. Submit manufacturer's ladder type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each energy recovery unit, ID. control, and accessory, including"troubleshooting"maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual. I1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1 1. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for energy recovery devices in accordance with ASHRAE 84"Methods of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers". I 2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate energy recovery units in accordance with ARI 1060"Standard for Air-to-Air Heat Recovery Equipment". I 970154 15845-1 10/23/97 1 I I 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Design, construct and install heat pipe heat exchangers in accordance with ASHRAE 15"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". I PART 2- PRODUCTS _ 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Rotary heat exchangers: 1. Carnes 3. Wing I 2. Semco 2.02 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGERS I A. General: Provide, as indicated, factory-assembled and tested rotary air-to-air heat exchangers, of performance as scheduled. I B. Construction: 1. Thermal transfer media shall be a uni-directional fluted configuration to permit laminar flow minimizing cross-contamination and pressure drop. Flute size shall permit the free passage of dry particulates up to 800 microns in size. Media shall be non-asbestos, water-resistant, bacteriostatic, fire-retardant, and strengthened with radial reinforcements. 2. Media shall be constructed of: a. corrugated aluminum coated with a non-migrating permanently bonded desiccant to permit sensible and latent energy transfer. Coating shall prohibit corrosion. Etched or oxidized surfaces are not acceptable. Media shall be capable of washing with steam with a negligible loss of latent effectiveness. Thermal performance shall be independently tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84-78 and ARI Standard 1060. Media shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water, or light detergent without degrading latent recovery. 3. Thermal transfer media shall be supported in a formed heavy gauge steel frame by self-aligning sealed bearings equipped with grease fittings to permit lubrication. Adjustable nylon wiping seals shall be provided at the periphery of the rotor and along the divider between supply and exhaust air streams to minimize leakage. A purge section shall be provided to limit carryover of exhaust air contaminants into the supply air to 0.04 percent by volume when the static pressure differential across the purge is 1"w.g. or greater. Provide access doors. Rotor shall be driven by a fractional horsepower, totally enclosed, electric motor through an inline speed reducer with sheave and belt around the rotor's rim. Wheel shall rotate at a constant speed (15 rpm)selected for maximum energy transfer. C. Control: Constant speed drive energized through DDC system. I 1 970154 15845-2 10/23/97 I i . • I PART 3-EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install energy recovery units where indicated, in accordance with equipment I manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. I B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. 3.02 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGERS I A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation. IB. Instali so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions. C. Provide clearance space for service and access door operation. I D. Provide access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to both sides of the heat exchanger. IE. Install control components including control panel, thermostats, and sensors. F. Start up heat exchangers in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions and in I presence of manufacturers representative. 3.03 TESTING I A. Upon completion of installation of energy recovery units, and after air-side and water-side balancing has been completed, test units to ascertain percent effectiveness of heat i transfer device. Adjust units for maximum effectiveness. I 1. Furnish test report, similar to SMACNA Form ER-1-78; include report in each copy of maintenance manual. END OF SECTION I I I I 970154 15845-3 10/23/97 I 1 i SECTION 15850 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS AND FANS ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. This section includes providing air handling units and centrifugal fans as hereinafter specified. 1 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification,the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055- Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15650-Direct Expansion Refrigeration Systems 8. Section 15800-Heat Transfer Equipment 9. Section 15880-Air Distribution (Sheet Metal) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly and construction details, sound data, and fan curves with operating point plotted. Fan class and maximum RPM shall be indicated. B. Product Data: Include catalog performance ratings and dimensions. ' C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and/or ARI 410. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430. 1.05 MOTORS ' A. Fan capacities shall meet or exceed performances specified. Fans shall be selected such that the operating brake horsepower does not exceed 85%of the nameplate motor horsepower specified. 1 1 970154 15850-1 10/23/97 1 I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERSI A. Air Handling Units: 1. Carrier 4. Trane 2. Dunham-Bush 5. York 3. McQuay 6. Temtrol B. Centrifugal Fans: 1. Acme 9. Greenheck I 2. Aerovent 10. Hartzell 3. Ammerman 11. Pace 4. Bayley 12. Peerless 5. Barry 13. Penn 6. Buffalo 14. New York Blower 7. Carnes 15. Twin City 8. Cook I 2.02 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Fabricate air handling units in configurations as shown and scheduled. I B. Casing: Galvanized steel on channel base or drain pan, welded and coated with zinc chromate paint. C. Insulation: One inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber insulation, applied to internal surfaces with adhesive and weld pins. Coat exposed edges of insulation with adhesive. I D. Finish: Zinc chromate, iron oxide, phenolic resin paint, enamel or unpainted galvanized steel. Seal fixed joints with flexible weathertight sealer. Seal removable joints with closed-cell foam gasket. E. Inspection Doors: A minimum 10 x 10 inch of galvanized steel, hinged, quick opening, surface mounted. Locate doors on side opposite of coil connections. Doors shall be in the following locations: Draw thru Outlet of all coils F. Drain Pans: Stainless steel with welded corners, cross broken and pitched to drain I connection, located under cooling coil section. G. Fan Section: I 1. Fan: Centrifugal type as indicated. 2. Bearings: 200,000 hour, self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings I with lubrication fittings extended to exterior of casing. 3. Base: Welded steel with adjustable motor slide rails. Fan and motor base shall 1 be internally isolated on two-inch deflection open spring vibration isolators. 1 970154 15850-2 10/23/97 I I I 4. Fan Accessories: As indicated. II5. Shafts: Hot rolled steel with key-way. 6. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel, fixed sheave, keyed to shaft, with matched belts. I Drive shall be rated minimum 1.5 x nameplate rating of the motor. Additional sheaves shall be provided at the time of balancing. I7. Belt Guard: Fabricate to latest edition of SMACNA and OSHA. 8. Access Panels: Removable access panels or hinged doors shall be provided to allow access to fan and motor. 1 9. Fan class and maximum RPM shall be mainly visible on nameplate or fan housing. IH. Coil Section: Coil headers and return bends shall be fully contained within casing or furnished with insulated sheet metal end covers. See Section 15800"Heat Transfer Equipment"for detailed coil requirements.' I. Filter Section: i I 1. Furnish factory fabricated flat filter section complete with filters. Filter area shall be as indicated. Furnish with hinged access doors on both ends. See Section 15880 for detailed filter requirements. 1 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Wheel: 1. Steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, back plate, blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws. I 2. Blade Configuration: As indicated. I B. Housing: 1. Steel,welded, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut-off. I 2. Factory prime coat before assembly. I 3. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll with quick opening latches and gaskets. 4. Scroll Drain: 1/2 inch steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. C. Shafts: Hot rolled steel with key-way. ID. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel, fixed sheave, keyed to shaft,with matched belts. Drive shall be rated minimum 1.5 x nameplate rating of the motor. Additional sheaves shall be provided at the time of balancing. I 970154 15850-3 10/23/97 1 1 1 E. Belt Guard: Fabricate to latest edition of SMACNA and OSHA. F. Bearings: 200,000 hour, self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings with 1 lubrication fittings extended to exterior of casing. G. Nameplate: Fan class and maximum RPM shall be clearly visible on nameplate or fan I housing. PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. , B. Install air handling units and fans on/from spring vibration isolators. C. Provide drain pans and downspouts for cooling coil banks more than one coil high. 1 D. All condensate drain piping shall contain a water seal trap sized for maximum unit operating pressure. Drain to be piped to nearest approved receptor. 1 E. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. Running fans to clean ductwork is not allowed. F. Install fans with flexible electrical leads. Install flexible connections between fan connections and ductwork. Flexible connectors shall not be in tension while running. 1 G. Provide safety screen where fan inlet or outlet is exposed. H. Verify proper fan rotation and starter overloads prior to balancing. 1 I. Provide new air filters prior to balancing. END OF SECTION i 1 1 1 1 . I 970154 15850-4 10/23/97 1 I SECTION 15880 IAIR DISTRIBUTION (SHEET METAL) IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION IA. Provide a complete air distribution system consisting of ductwork, fittings, and air distribution accessories as specified or indicated. 1 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections ' 4.5. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055=Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15250-Mechanical Insulation 8. Section 15500-Hydronic Systems 9. Section 15510-Steam Systems I 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Ductwork layout drawings: Provide for all factory manufactured and field/shop fabricated I items. Prepare ductwork and air handling system fabrication and layout drawings at minimum.1/4"= 1' scale. Prepare in coordination with structural, general, mechanical and electrical elements. Show duct elevation, ceiling heights, duct pressure class, dampers, lights, access doors, air inlet and outlet assemblies, and other sheet metal and air Idistribution items. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Material Quality: ASTM standards appropriate to materials used. B. Sheet Metal: Construct in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards I -Metal and Flexible(latest edition). Install in accordance with NFPA 90A(latest edition), local code and industry standard practice. I C. Manufactured Items: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Maintain access for inspection,test and service. 1.05 DEFINITIONS IA. Pressure-Velocity Classification for Ductwork: As defined by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible (latest edition). Pressure classification for this specification: I 970154 . 15880-1 10/23/97 I I I 1. Low Pressure: Maximum 2500 FPM velocity; maximum 2.0"WG positive or-2.0" WG negative static pressure class. I 2. Medium Pressure: Maximum 4000 FPM velocity; maximum 4"W.G. positive or- 3.0"WG or greater negative static pressure class. B. Gauge: 1 1. Steel Sheet: U.S. standard gauge. I 2. Aluminum Sheet: Brown & Sharpe schedule. 3. Steel Wire: Washburn &Moen gauge. C. Concealed Insulated Surfaces: Piping, ductwork and equipment located in walls, I partitions, floors, chases, shafts, alleyways and above ceilings. D. Exposed Insulated Surfaces: Piping, ductwork and equipment located in mechanical rooms, tunnels and rooms without suspended ceilings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Filters: I 1. Farr 3. American Air Filter 2. Continental 4. Filters, Inc. B. Fire dampers: I 1. Air Balance 6. Prefco I 2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 7. Safe Air 3. American Warming 8. Ruskin 4. Cesco 9. Vent Products 5. Greenheck C. Backdraft and volume dampers and accessories: 1. Greenheck 8. Penn 1 2. Air Control Products 9. Prefco 3. American Warming 10. Safe Air 4. Cesco 11. Ruskin I 5. Louvers& Dampers, Inc. 12. Vent Products 6. Dowco 13. Carries 7. Young Regulator I D. Air outlets: 1. Carnes 7. Metal*Aire 1 2. J &J Register 8. Titus 3. Krueger 9. Hart and Cooley 4. Reliable 10. Anemostat I 5. Price 11. Nailor Industries 6. Tuttle and Bailey I 970154 15880-2 10/23/97 1 I IE. Insulation products, adhesives and coatings: 1. Certainteed 6. Chicago Mastic 2. Owens Corning 7. Childers I 3. Knauf 8. Foster 4. Manville 9. 3-M 5. Armstrong IF. Flexible connector: 1. Ventfabrics 2. Duro-dyne IG. Polyvinyl spiral duct: Ii. PVS,Wheeling Service 4. PCD, Foremost Mfg. 2. United McGill 5. Norlock 3. Semco 1 H. Duct sealer and sealing tape: 1. United McGill, Uni-Grip 5. Hardcast P301 I 2. Durkee-Atwood, 6. Tremco 440 Permatite, Class I 7. United McGill, 3. Hardcast 601 Uni-cast Tape 4. Durkee-Atwood, 8. 3-M IInsta-Seal Class I 9. Foster I. Louvers: 1. American Warming and 5. Ruskin Ventilating 6. Aerolite 2. Dowco 7. Vent Products I 3. Louvers& Dampers, Inc. 8. Arrow 4. Airline 9. Reliable 1 J. Roof hoods(intake/relief): 1. Acme 5. Carnes 2. Greenheck 6. ILG I 3. Cook 7. Penn Ventilator 4. Louvers& Dampers, Inc. IK. Duct access doors: 1. Air Balance 6. Ventfabrics 2. American Warming 7. Cesco I 3. Prefco 8. Kees 4. Ruskin 9. Nailor Industries 5. United McGill I I 970154 15880-3 10/23/97 I I L. Manufactured duct joining products: 1. Ductmate 4. Lockformer I 2. Nexus 5. Engles 3. TDC 6. Ward M. Turning vanes: 1. Aero-dyne 3. Hart&Cooley 2. Airsan N. Pipe flashing hoods: 1. Kees 2.02 DUCTWORK FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 1 A. General: 1. Galvanized Steel: Hot rolled, pickled steel produced to ASTM A527, lock-forming I quality with G90 (.90 oz./sq.ft.) hot dipped galvanized coating. Prepare surfaces for painting where required by treating surface as follows: a. Galvanneal: Thermal treated product bonds.zinc coating to steel base to I produce spangle free surface for painting with no surface preparation; or b. Paintgrip: Standard galvanized sheet with phosphate film added to the I surface for adhering paint. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, alloy 3003 H-14. 1 B. Flexible Insulated Ductwork: Factory insulated round air duct with outer jacket enclosing 1"thick glass fiber insulation wrapped around continuous inner air barrier film reinforced with encapsulated steel, wire helix; UL 181, Class 1. C. Duct Sealant: UL classified, non-combustible, flame spread 25 or less, smoke developed rating 50 or less, resistant to water, pressure rupture rating of 16"W.G. minimum, suitable I for use alone or with tape. D. Manufactured Duct Joints: Manufactured duct joining system to consist of roll-formed angles, corner pieces, corner clips, metal cleats and gasket material. Construct and join I ductwork in accordance with latest SMACNA test data and joint reinforcement schedule corresponding to duct gauge used. Corners to be downset design, no-bolt design except bolting is required for medium pressure applications. Reinforcement requirement for I sheet metal to comply with latest SMACNA for manufactured duct joining technique appropriate to duct pressure class. E. Construct tees, bends and elbows with minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 times width of 111 duct. F. Spin-ins on ductwork shall be conical. i I 970154 • 15880-4 10/23/97 I I I 2.03 FILTERS 1 A. Extended Surface Medium Efficiency Filters: 1. Medium Efficiency Pleated Panel Filters: 25%-30% average efficiency per I ASHRAE 52-76 (90%arrestance). Non-woven cotton and synthetic fiber blend media formed in a high loft mat with pleated metal support grid enclosed in moisture-resistant beverage board with media cross grid retainer of same 1 material. 4"thickness. UL classified, Type 2. Cam-Farr 30/30. B. Filter Gauges: 1. Dwyer 2000 ASF magnahelic agnahelic au a with molded plastic vent valve s, adjustable i s nal flag, front screwpointer zero adjustment.9 9e t. Direct reading J 3-7/8" diameter dial, diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, black figures on white Ibackground, 2%of full scale accuracy. Range: 0-1.0"WG- medium efficiency filters l 2. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4"tubing, 2-way or 3-way vent valves. I2.04 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. I B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2"high x 30" maximum width. Single blade dampers to have spring end bearing regulator. Provide end brace for static Ipressure greater than 2.0"WG. Provide rod on dampers longer than 18" long. C. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern using minimum 16 gauge steel ' with maximum blade sizes 6"x 48". Where width exceeds 48", provide regulator at both ends. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in 16 gauge channel frame with suitable hardware. Blades and frame to be galvanized or prime coated steel except where indicated for special application. ID. Provide end bearings with end seals for pressure class required except in round ductwork 12"in diameter and smaller. E. Provide locking, indicating d sating quadrant regulators on all single and multi-blade dampers. Mark ends of damper shanks for open-closed indication. Damper bearings to be self- lubricating nylon or have stainless steel sleeves. Insulated ducts to have elevated dial Iregulators. 2.05 FIRE DAMPERS I A. Fire dampers to be UL 555 labeled and be 1-1/2 hour rated with 165°F fusible link except as indicated. I B. Curtain type dampers shall be Style B or C with blades stored out of air stream. Style A dampers that match the duct height are allowed only if duct free area loss is less than 5%. Dampers installed in horizontal shall have stainless steel closure springs. 1 970154 15880-5 10/23/97 I 1 C. Duct sizes 12"x 12"and smaller may have single blade dampers. , D. Dampers installed in corrosive, high temperature or high moisture laden air streams to be constructed with suitable material and be UL labeled. 2.06 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be multi-blade, parallel action, counter-balanced backdraft dampers of galvanized steel or extruded aluminum,with center pivoted blades linked together;with blade edge seals, brass or steel bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. 2.07 TURNING VANES I A. Single vane, runner type with 1"trailing edge, 2"vane radius and 1-1/2"vane spacing, minimum 24 gauge steel or aluminum construction;with individually adjustable blades and mounting straps. B. For widths over 36", install vanes in two or more sections and use tie rods to limit unbraced vane length. ' C. Where inlet and outlet dimensions are not equal, set two or more sections at 45°angle to provide optimum turning vane performance. ' 2.08 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. UL listed, fire-retardant, neoprene double-coated woven glass fiber fabric in accordance with NFPA 90A, suitable for temperatures and pressures involved; approximately 6"wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.09 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors shall be hinged and have locking hardware. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. All doors to be gasketed. Medium pressure access doors to open against air pressure. Doors installed in insulated ducts to have extension neck to clear insulation. B. Doors at heat recovery wheel to be same as above with the addition of clear double pane I wireglass windows in metal enclosing door frame to provide visual inspection of damper without shutting down the fan system. 2.10 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. General: Sizes,types and capacities shall be as indicated. Ceiling and wall frame types and dimensions shall be verified from architectural drawings. Verify ceiling frame and panel style and dimension with reflected ceiling plan, room finish schedule and material type. If final diffusers or registers have a higher sound level than those specified or if dimensions are not compatible with finished walls, ceilings, floors or architectural air cabinets(millwork), installed diffusers and registers shall be replaced at the Contractors expense. Outlets and inlets to be factory baked enamel finished with color selected by Architect/Engineer unless indicated. ' 1 . 970154 15880-6 10/23/97 1 B. Ceiling Diffusers("D"): Stamped or spun, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360° - pattern,with direction control and adjustable pattern where indicated; opposed blade 1 damper. C. Perforated Ceiling Diffusers ("D"): Perforated face plate, hinged for access to core and I duct accessories. Core shall be neck mounted, four-way deflection, fully adjustable, curved blade design; opposed blade damper. D. Registers("R")/Grilles ("G"): Streamlined blades, single or double deflection as indicated. IRegisters shall have face accessible, screwdriver adjustable, opposed blade dampers. 2.11 LOUVERS 1 A. General: Louvers to be AMCA standard 500 performance rated. Louver frame to have hidden mullions unless indicated. Vertical mullions for blade supports shall be placed at a maximum spacing of 4 feet. ' B. Galvanized steel; 20 gauge frame and blades; 4-1/2" blade spacing; 4"deep frame; drainable and stormproof blade configuration; 50% free area minimum based on 48"x 48" 1 louver size; 1.9 gauge x 1/2" galvanized mesh screen. Finish: Paint grip. Ruskin L375D. 2.12 ROOF AIR INTAKES AND OUTLETS I A. Galvanized steel construction; 19 gauge x 1/2"galvanized mesh screen; hinged top; 12" roof curb; 1"glass fiber insulation; and moisture barrier coating on underside of hood. In no case shall intake screen be less than 12" above finished roof. IB. Hoods shall be designed for intake velocity no more than 50%of neck velocity. 2.13 PIPE FLASHING HOOD A. 18 gauge housing with 5 PCF aluminum clad insulation board liner and removable insulated roof cover pitched for drainage. Piping to pass through flexible seals. Hood to have cowl to protect pipe opening from weather. Provide loose blanket fiberglass insulation to fill around piping. Provide matching size roof curb design to be compatible with roofing material. Minimum curb height to extend 8"above finished roof. Wall units to be of similar construction. 2.14 LOUVER BLANKOFF PANELS 1 I A. Double wall construction with minimum 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal and 1" rigid insulation. Paint louver side flat black. Seal weathertight to louver frame. 2.15 TYPE B GAS VENTS I A. Tested and UL listed,with inner pipe of sheet aluminum and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel. IPART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION I A. Field measure to determine exact conditions. 970154 15880-7 10/23/97 I r 1 B. Coordinate routing with all other trades to establish space requirements for each. C. Determine that equipment and ductwork will fit available space. D. Where ductwork drawings are required, show any areas where obstructions or conflicts are discovered so these can be resolved in an acceptable manner prior to the installation of any ductwork or equipment. 3.02 FABRICATION I A. Low Pressure Ductwork: Construct all ductwork using galvanized steel except as indicated. I 1. Seams and Joints(Rectangular Duct): Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock, grooved seams or button punch snap lock. Transverse joints shall be drive slip. Joints 36"size and larger shall be manufactured duct joining system with downset corners, no-bolt design, or SMACNA T-25 formed on flanges with corner and cleat. Contractor option on smaller sizes. 2. Seams and Joints (Concealed Round Duct): Transverse joints in low velocity concealed round ducts shall be slip type secured with sheet metal screws equally spaced on 6"centers maximum with a minimum of three screws per joint. Joints shall be sealed with mastic during joining. Exposed inside edge of duct at joint shall point in direction of air flow. All duct joints exposed to weather shall be caulked watertight. 3. Seams and Joints(Exposed Round Duct): Longitudinal seams shall be lock type spiral or grooved seams rolled spirally. Transverse joints shall be slip type up to 36" in diameter and shall be sealed with mastic during joining. Flanged and gasketed joints shall be used on sizes larger than 36"diameter. 4. Duct Seal Requirements: Ductwork shall be sealed per SMACNA Seal Class"C". Sealant material shall be installed following manufacturer's recommendations. ' B. Medium Pressure Ductwork: Construct all ductwork using galvanized steel except as indicated. I 1. Seams and Joints(Round or Flat Oval Ductwork): Longitudinal seams shall be lock type spiral or grooved seams rolled spirally. Transverse joints shall be slip type up to 36"in diameter and shall be sealed with mastic during joining. Flanged and gasketed joints shall be used on sizes larger than 36"diameter. 2. Seams and Joints(Rectangular Ductwork): Longitudinal seams shall be grooved seam type with sealant and center punched at 12"maximum intervals or Pittsburg lock with sealant. Transverse joints shall be flanged and gasketed manufactured duct joining system with downset, bolted corners. 3. Duct Seal Requirements: Ductwork shall be sealed per SMACNA Seal Class"B" requirements. Sealant material shall be installed following manufacturer's recommendations. I970154 15880-8 10/23/97 1 1 . I 3.03 INSTALLATION I A. General: Install all duct and devices per manufacturers' recommendations, related industry standards, and applicable codes. I 1. See paragraph"Submittals" in this specification section for submittal requirements. I 2. Verify location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Refer to reflected ceiling plans, finish schedule, material finish specification, and shop drawings. I3. Coordinate routing with all other trades to establish space requirements for each. 4. Contractor may vary route and shape of ductwork and make offsets during I progress of work if required to meet structural or other interferences. Where such changes impair the system performance, the changes will be corrected at Contractors expense. I5. All ductwork shall be substantially and neatly supported on galvanized steel straps or angles riveted or bolted to duct flanges and properly anchored to the I construction so that horizontal ducts are without sag or sway, vertical ducts are without buckle, and all ducts are free from the possibility of deformation, collapse or vibration. Supports in corrosive environments shall be stainless steel except aluminum ductwork shall have aluminum supports. I 6. See Section 15250 for acoustical duct liner requirements. Where ductwork is specified to be lined, the duct dimensions shall be increased to provide net inside Idimensions shown on drawings. 7. Openings required for ductwork through structural elements in new construction shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. Shop drawings locating such 1 openings shall be prepared in ample time to meet the construction schedule. 8. Provide sleeves at all duct penetrations through walls, floors and roofs. Openings ' through sound rated partitions shall have annular space stuffed with fiberglass insulation for full thickness of wall. VI no n-removable Volume dampers located above non removable ceilings shall be installed Ivertically with Young Regulator No. 301 or equal concealed damper regulators. 10. Provide turning vanes in all elbows and mitered duct turns. I11. Provide duct thermometers on all supply, exhaust and fresh air ducts at all air handling units. I 12. Provide 2"deep bitumastic coated drip pans on all non-ducted hoods, fans or penthouses used for relief or exhaust air service. Pans shall be 12" larger all around than roof opening with clear vertical opening between pan and structure I as indicated. Insulate pan where indicated. I 970154 15880-9 10/23/97 1 I 13. Install automatic control dampers furnished under Section 15950. Install dampers as recommended by the manufacturer. 14. Provide blank-off plates for automatic control dampers smaller than duct size. 15. Assemble multiple damper sections with interconnecting linkages. Extend shafts I through duct for external mounting of damper actuators. 16. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, neoprene gaskets, or other approved safing material. 17. Provide filter gauges across all filters. Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position, unless noted otherwise. 18. Provide openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap with 111 spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. 19. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating 1 and maintenance activities. 20. Final connections to diffusers, troffer boots, and terminal units may be made with flexible ductwork. Expanded length of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 36". Path of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 45°. 21. Flexible ductwork shall be attached to metal collars or sleeves with draw bands. Duct adhesive shall be added to connections as required per duct system sealing class. Metal collars or sleeves 12"and larger shall contain draw band holding beads. ' 22. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Keep openings covered until ready for continuing duct run or final connections. I 23. Provide fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated and where required by applicable codes. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges per NFPA 90A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions to meet UL listing requirements for damper manufacturer, damper type and application. 24. Provide flexible connections to motor driven air moving equipment. Secure fabric to duct or fan collar with 3/16"rivets spaced not more than 5"o.c. Provide thrust restraints and other devices so that connections are not in tension with equipment running or off. Air handling units with internally isolated fans need not have flexible connections. 25. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before filters, coils, fans, at automatic controls dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers and as indicated. Doors shall allow adequate access to inspect and maintain equipment and devices, minimum 12"x 12"size unless conditions do not allow; 18"x 18"for shoulder access. Do not obstruct path to access doors with piping, etc. Provide ceiling access doors in ceilings other than lay-in type. 970154 , 15880-10 10/23/97 I1 I 26. Support terminal units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent I ductwork. 27. Provide volume dampers at branch duct take-off to diffusers and registers. I28. Change duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30°(15°ideally)divergence and 45° (30° ideally)convergence. I 29. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8"and smaller and install with crimp in direction of air flow. 30. Provide closure flanges around exposed ductwork at wall and ceiling penetrations, 1-1/4"wide minimum. ii 31. Do not install ductwork in or allow to enter or pass through electrical rooms, ' elevator machine rooms or enclosed spaces containing electrical switchgear, panelboards, or distribution boards except ductwork that only serves such spaces. I 32. Install roof curbs level for equipment mounting. B. Flexible Duct Installation: ' 1 . 1. Low Pressure Ductwork: Peel back vapor barrier and fold back insulation; then secure to duct collar or sleeve with metal or nylon clamps or draw bands; then I fold over insulation and vapor barrier and secure with two stretched wraps of approved duct tape. I 2. Medium Pressure Ductwork: Peel back vapor barrier and fold back insulation; then secure to duct collar or sleeve with approved duct sealer; then secure with metal draw bands or clamps; then fold over insulation and vapor barrier and secure with two stretched wraps of approved duct tape. Take two or three tucks Iin vapor barrier while taping. 3. Support flexible ductwork following manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 3.04 FILTER REPLACEMENT 1 A. All air filters shall be replaced with new prior to balancing. END OF SECTION I I I I 970154 15880-11 10/23/97 . N I SECTION 15950 5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL I 1.01 DESCRIPTION I A. Provide a complete Electronic Microprocessor-Based Direct Digital Temperature Control System. I B. The control system shall consist of all thermostats, sensors, automatic valves, dampers, damper actuators, control panels, wiring and conduit, and all associated control specialties and accessory equipment required to fulfill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. All control equipment shall be fully proportioning, except as indicated. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I 1. Drawings I 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Section 15055- Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15650-Direct Expansion Refrigeration Systems 8. Section 15850-Air Handling Units and Fans I9. Section 15880-Air Distribution (Sheet Metal) , 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Shop Drawings. Indicate operating data, system control diagrams, wiring diagrams, and description of operating sequences. IB. Product Data. Provide data for each manufactured component including: 1. Valve and damper schedules showing size, configuration, capacity, performance data and location of all equipment. I 2. Data sheets for all control system components. I 3. Operating and maintenance instructions. Provide two (2) each: operator's manual, programmer's manual and as-built manual. As-built manual to include revised as-built documents of all materials and system configuration. I1.04 DEFINITIONS A. The word "concealed", as used in this specification, refers to piping in furred spaces, pipe I and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof,wall cavities, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and above suspended ceiling construction which hides piping from view. I 970154 15950-1 10/24/97 I I B. The word"exposed" refers to piping in all areas where piping is visible without removal of access panels and ceiling panels, and in mechanical rooms,tunnels, and rooms without ceilings. C. The word"wiring"shall mean all conduit,wire and miscellaneous materials as required for installation and connection of the electrical control devices furnished as part of the control system or furnished by equipment suppliers. PART 2-PRODUCTS 1 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. System suppliers and equipment: I 1. Johnson Controls 5. Engineered Controls 2. Control Services(Andover) 6. Honeywell 3. Enertech (Siebe) 7. Landis&Guy-Powers 4. Control Masters 8. Trane B. Automatic dampers(in addition to A): I 1. Penn 5. Air Balance 2. Ruskin 6. Mitco 3. Prefco 7. Arrow 4. Vent Products C. Electronic sensors(in addition to A): I' 1. Precon 2. ACI D. Humidity sensors(in addition to A): 1. General Eastern I E. Static pressure transmitters (in addition to A): 1. Dwyer 2. Mamac 111 F. Electric actuators: 1. Belimo 2. Delta I. G. Current status switches: 1. Hawkeye I 2.02 ELECTRICAL WIRE A. All wiring materials covered by this section shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and shall carry the UL label where applicable. All wiring running exposed in return air plenums shall be plenum cable. I I 970154 15950-2 10/24/97 II1 I I 2.03 DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be single or multiple blade as required and shall be suitable for 2000 FPM velocities. Parallel blade dampers shall be used for outside air/return air mixing applications. B. All damper frame and frames shall be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal and have corner bracing to prevent racking. C. Damper blades shall not exceed 8"in width and be a maximum of 48" in length. All damper linkage shall be concealed and all dampers over 48"shall have jack shafting. Blade face linkage is not acceptable. ' D. Outside air dampers shall.have an AMCA certified maximum leakage of 5 CFM per square foot at 1"W.G. through a 48"x 48"damper when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Dampers shall have replaceable rubber or vinyl seals along each blade edge(temperature rating: -50°to 250°). Jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type. E. Damper actuators shall be Belimo, either modulating or two-positioning control. Voltage shall be as required by the application. Spring return shall be provided on outdoor and return air dampers. F. If return air damper is used as a smoke damper, the outside air damper shall be the same design to provide similar flow characteristics. G. Where dampers are mounted with blades vertical, special bearings shall be provided to allow for vertical installation. 2.04 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor type, accurate to within ±.36°F. B. Outdoor air sensor shall be of the thermistor type, accurate to within±1°F for temperatures in the-40°to 160°F range. C. Humidity sensors shall be of the solid state type, accurate to within±3%. D. Differential pressure sensors shall be accurate to within ±1%. E. Space sensors shall be thermistor type with tamperproof screws, mountable on 2x4 electrical box, with the following features: 1. Digital zone temperature indication ' 2. Occupied/unoccupied override switch 3. Setpoint adjustment 2.05 SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. Line Voltage: Leviton model 51020-UM transient voltage surge suppressor. B. Communication and Control Wiring: General Semi-Conductor model 422E. I 970154 15950-3 10/24/97 I 1 I 2.06 CURRENT STATUS SWITCHES A. Solid state, adjustable setpoint, power and status LED's, self-induced power, non-polarity sensitive output. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Provide all the necessary relays, solenoid valves, transformers, etc., to make a complete and operable system as specified in the Sequence of Control and Point List. 2.08 SEPARABLE TEMPERATURE WELLS A. Solid brass or stainless steel, 1/2" IPS. I 2.09 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM (DDC) A. Control system shall be a user-programmable, microprocessor-based, direct digital I control system utilizing distributed processing type architecture such that the loss of the primary user terminal will not shut down entire system. The system shall be modular in design such that additional stand-alone panels may be added in the future. I B. Telephone Modem(Future). Provide 14.4K BPS modem for remote communication. The system shall be capable of auto-answer communications as well as automatic dialing of user-specified phone numbers in response to alarm conditions or time-initiated events. Telephone line to the facility shall be provided by the Owner. C. Distributed Control Panels (DCP). The distributed control shall be a user-programmable, microprocessor-based, stand-alone, direct digital controller. These units shall have their own internal RAM memory and shall continue to operate all local control loop functions in the event of a failure of the Central Operator Station. DCP shall include four-hour power backup such that, on power failure, the real time clock, memory and computation functions shall remain intact. D. Inputs/Outputs. The DDC system shall be capable of accepting information from points in the form of analog or digital signals. E. Software. The control system shall be programmed to provide control, reset, time management, and alarm functions required. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. General: 1. The control system shall be installed by mechanics and electricians regularly engaged in control system installation. The Contractor shall have at least two(2) years experience in the local area. I 2. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Verify location of room thermostats/sensors and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. 970154 I 15950-4 10/24/97 B. Incidental Work By Others: 1. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated contractor under the supervision of the Temperature Control Contractor: a. The Piping Contractor shall install automatic valves and separable wells that are specified to be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor. • b. The Air Distribution Contractor shall install all automatic dampers furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor. C. Electric Wiring: 1. All wiring and conduit shall be run parallel to, or at right angles to, the building structure and shall be concealed in finished spaces. 2. All wiring required for a complete and operating system, as herein specified, shall be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings. Wiring shall include all electrical connections required by the Sequence of Control and Point List and wiring required for interlocking equipment. 3. All electric wiring shall be done in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All wiring shall be installed in flexible conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Conduit may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or in areas where other piping is exposed. Conduit exposed in occupied spaces shall be EMT or Wiremold. 4. Low voltage wiring in equipment rooms or concealed in walls shall be in one of the metal raceways mentioned above. Final connection shall be made with exposed wiring which shall be protected by a suitable protective grommet and the ' end of the metal container shall be securely fastened. Jacketed harnesses may be used where a number of wires are run together. 5. All communication and control wiring which penetrates the building skin shall be provided with surge suppression devices. 6. All line voltage connections of the direct digital control system devices shall be provided with surge suppression devices. D. Digital differential pressure sensors or current status switches shall be provided for status indication on all fans. E. Damper actuator mounting arrangement shall be outside the airstream wherever possible. The actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either direction. F. Electric end switches on fresh and return air dampers shall prevent fan from operating unless proper combination of dampers are open to prevent excessive duct pressures. On fan shutdown,fan dampers shall close slowly (at an adjustable rate)to prevent dampers from closing tightly until fan stops spinning. Dampers shall be controlled to open when either supply or return fans are started. G. Pipe temperature sensors shall be installed in separable wells. Wells by Temperature Control Contractor. I 970154 15950-5 10/24/97 I 3.02 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE A. Contractor shall inspect and verify, in writing, the satisfactory operation of the system(s). 1 B. Contractor's technician shall be available when necessary during the systems test and balance to assure that all systems are operating properly and be available for additional adjustments during the test and balance process. 3.03 SEQUENCE OF CONTROL A. Sequence of Control indicated illustrates basic control function only. Provide all control co trot devices required for controlling air handling units, exhaust fans, and all related items. B. AHU-1 and AHU-2: 1. Systems serve Home Team and Visitor Team Clubhouses respectively. Units are identical in control function. Unit assembly consists of supply fan, DX cooling coil (two separate coils per unit), multi-stage electric heating coil, heat recovery wheel, exhaust fan,filters(upstream of heat recovery-both exhaust and outside air streams)and motorized dampers. I 2. Time schedule (through DDC program): a. Occupied: Outside air damper open, return fan runs, unit fan runs, return I air damper closed, relief damper open. b. Unoccupied (Summer): Outside air damper 20%open, relief 20%open, return 80%open. Return fan runs. Dampers modulate from space sensor with mixed air low limit(50°F). c. Unoccupied and Occupied (Winter): Outside air damper closed, relief air closed, return air open, return fan off. Unit cycles with space sensors to maintain temperature. d. Provide manual switch in groundskeeper's maintenance shop to allow groundskeeping staff to index unit operation to override DDC program. Revert to DDC program after two-hour(adjustable)override run-time expires. 3. Cooling: a. Sequence DX condensing units, open liquid line solenoid valves to each coil to maintain space setpoint. DX system to operate in sequence with mixed air control to use least energy for cooling. Dry bulb economizer to return system to minimum outside air during summer unoccupied only. b. Override space sensor control of condensing units from space humidity sensor. Stage lead condensing unit on and control space temperature by energizing stages of electric heating coil to limit humidity from exceeding 60%. I I 970154 15950-6 10/24/97 I 4. Heating:at g. a. Summer: See cooling sequence for heating control. b. Winter: Space sensor to cycle fan and energize stages of electric heat. I5. Heat Recovery Wheel: a. Wheel off between 50°-70°F. Ib. Operate wheel constant speed below 50°F and above 70°F. I c. Wheel off when supply fan is off during summer unoccupied and throughout winter mode. C. Laundry Room Combustion Air(Home Team only): I1. Open motorized damper when gas dryer(s)operate. D. Public Toilet HVAC System: 1. System consists of gas-fired duct furnace, MAU-1 supply fan, exhaust fan and motorized dampers. 1 2. Time Schedule(through DDC program): a. Occupied (Summer): Supply fan runs, exhaust fan runs, exhaust damper open, return damper closed, outside air damper open. b. Unoccupied (Summer): System off, outside air closed, return open, Iexhaust closed. c. Occupied (Winter): Cycle gas duct furnace and supply fan to maintain Ispace temperature. Outside air open, exhaust open, return closed. d. Unoccupied (Winter): Cycle gas duct furnace and supply fan to maintain space temperature. Outside air closed, exhaust closed, return closed. Ie. Prove power venter on (flow) before operating gas furnace. Interlock by Control Contractor. IEND OF SECTION I 1 970154 15950-7 10/24/97 I I SECTION 15990 ' SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) of air systems. B. Systems testing, adjusting and balancing shall be complete prior to final acceptance. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15010-General Mechanical Requirements 5. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 1 6. Section 15055-Basic Piping Materials and Methods 7. Section 15850-Air Handling Units and Fans 8. Section 15950-Temperature Control (DDC) 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. System may be balanced by the Installing Contractor having qualifications in accordance with the requirements of this specification. B. Submit name and qualifications of TAB firm to the Architect/Engineer within thirty (30) days of contract award for review. Documentation of agency certification shall be 1 provided. C. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to select the TAB firm if qualifications are not ' submitted in a timely manner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit brand name, serial number and calibration certificates showing dates of calibration for all test instruments thirty days prior to performing systems test, adjust and balance. B. Submit draft copy showing format of final test reports to Architect/Engineer for review prior to commencing work. C. Submit four copies of tabulated final reports for inclusion in operation and maintenance manuals; one copy of the report will be retained by the Engineer. Each report shall include as a minimum: ' 1. Final test reports. 2. Reduced scale plans or drawings labeling all air outlets, dampers, equipment and systems tested, adjusted and balanced. 3. Date of tests and weather conditions. 1 970154 15990-1 10/23/97 i 1 I 4. Test instrument certification data. 5. Soft cover, three-ring binder. 1.05 PRE-BALANCING COORDINATION A. Prior to commencing TAB procedures, conduct a meeting with the representatives of I installers of the mechanical systems. Coordinate and verify systems operation and readiness for testing, adjusting and balancing. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used. I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURE A. Testing, adjusting and balancing shall be in accordance with the procedures of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) and ANSI/ASHRAE 111 P. B. Systems shall be operated by the Installing Contractor for a minimum of 48 hours prior to testing, adjusting and balancing. 3.02 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 1 A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. B. Verify all renewable filter media has been replaced with new and permanent media prior I to testing, adjusting and balancing. C. Report deficiencies or abnormal conditions in systems which prevent testing, adjusting and balancing. D. Verify rotation of all rotating equipment. E. Verify hydronic systems are not air bound. • F. Beginning of work indicates acceptance of operating conditions. i G. Reported data shall represent actually measured or observed conditions. H. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers and other adjustment devices. Set and lock memory stops. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Air systems shall be adjusted and balanced to within±10%of design flows. 3.04 COORDINATION WITH CONTRACTORS I A. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing while temperature control personnel,who are capable of adjusting the control system, are present. I 970154 15990-2 10/23/97 3.05 AIR SYSTEM REPORTS A. Adjust and balance air flow quantities utilizing fan speed, inlet vanes, or replacement of sheaves and belts. Replacement sheaves and belts shall be provided and installed by the Mechanical Contractor as directed by the TAB Contractor. Adjust and balance ' terminal devices, diffusers, registers and grilles utilizing volume dampers. B. Report designed and adjusted, balanced or measured condition for each of the following ' information items: 1. Air Handling Equipment: a. Unit Data: System/Unit No. Supply fan Make/type Model No./size Serial No. ' Arrangement/class Discharge Sheave brand Sheave size/bore Distance No. belts/make/size No. filters/type/size Type of vibration isolation Motor data Make/frame HP/RPM Volts/phase/hertz F.L. amps/S.F. Sheave make ' Sheave size/bore Sheave centerline Exhaust fan Make/type Model No./size Serial No. ' Arrangement/class Discharge Sheave brand Sheave size/bore Distance No. belts/make/size No. filters/type/size Type of vibration isolation Motor data Make/frame ' HP/RPM Volts/phase/hertz F.L. amps/S.F. 970154 15990-3 10/23/97 1 1 I Sheave make Sheave size/bore Sheave centerline b. Performance Data: Air flow(CFM) per zone and total Total system static pressure Supply fan RPM Return fan RPM Supply fan suction static pressure Return fan suction static pressure Supply fan discharge static pressure Return fan discharge static pressure Filter differential static pressure Preheat coil differential static pressure Heating coil differential static pressure • Cooling coil differential static pressure Outside air flow rate Return air flow rate ' Relief air flow rate Variable speed drive Fan inlet damper position Zone air flows Zone damper positions Belt tension Percent of sheave adjustment Supply fan motor voltage, T-1 Supply fan motor voltage, T-2 Supply fan motor voltage,T-3 Return fan motor voltage, T-1 Return fan motor voltage, T-2 Return fan motor voltage, T-3 Supply fan motor amp draw, A-1 Supply fan motor amp draw, A-2 Supply fan motor amp draw, A-3 Return fan motor amp draw, A-1 • Return fan motor amp draw, A-2 Return fan motor amp draw, A-3 2. Exhaust Fans: ' a. Unit Data: System/Unit No. I Make/type Model No./size Serial No. Arrangement/class Discharge Sheave brand Sheave size/bore Distance No. belts/make/size 970154 1599 0-4 10/23/97 1 I No. filters/type/size Type of vibration isolation I Motor data Make/frame HP/RPM I Volts/phase/hertz F.L. amps/S.F. Sheave make Sheave size/bore ISheave centerline b. Performance Data: 1 Air flow(CFM) Suction static pressure Discharge static pressure ' Damper position Belt tension Percent of sheave adjustment 3. Filters: a. Unit Data: IISystem/unit No. Location/zone I Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Overall size I Filter sizes No. of each size of filters Frame construction I Gasket material Media material Filter efficiency and rating method ii Magnehelic gauge model No. II b. Performance Data: Air flow(CFM) Initial static pressure difference Face velocity Final static pressure differential 4. Air to Air Heat Exchangers: Ia. Unit Data: System/unit No. Location I Manufacturer Model No. I 970154 15990-5 10/23/97 1 1 Serial No. Construction Arrangement b. Performance Data: Air flow(CFM) Outdoor air pressure difference Exhaust air pressure difference Entering outdoor air DBMS Entering exhaust air DB/WB Leaving outdoor air DBMS Leaving exhaust air DB/WB Face velocity Efficiency Frost threshold, °F 5. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: Outlet and inlet identification/location/number Manufacturer Construction Air flow Deflector settings Slot velocity 6. Duct Traverse Reports: Each separate distribution system shall have traverse reports taken in accordance with AABC or NEBB. Each report shall include the following data: System/unit No. Location/zone • Actual air temperature Duct static pressure Duct size Duct area Duct velocity Design air flow rate Actual average velocity Actual air flow rate Barometric pressure 3.06 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION REPORT A. Provide for all test instruments or equipment. I B. Report: Instrument/make Serial No. Application Dates of use Date of latest calibration Calibration procedure 970154 15990-6 10/23/97 1 ' 3.07 EQUIPMENT QU OR SYSTEM FAILURE REPORT A. Provide for all equipment or systems which fail during testing, adjusting or balancing. B. Report: Project System ' Component Serial No. Manufacturer Model No. Date Architect/Engineer Contractor Submittal data Description and problem Field test results Probable cause Recommendations END OF SECTION 1 1 I • I 970154 15990-7 10/23/97 1 1 SECTION 16010 ' GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OL1 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 3;1;i3 L 1.01 ' DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the general electrical requirements of these specifications and shall apply to all phases of the work specified, indicated on the drawings, or required to ' provide for complete installation of electrical systems for this project. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 1.03 WARRANTIES ' A. The Contractor shall warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment against defects for a period of one year after the date of substantial completion. Certain equipment shall be warranted beginning at the time of final acceptance or for longer periods of time as ' specified in those sections of the Project Manual. The Contractor shall repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner any item which may become defective within the warranty period. Any manufacturers'warranties concerning any item installed will run to the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees not to void or impair or to allow Sub-Contractors to void or impair any warranties regarding products or items installed as part of this project. The repair of faulty workmanship shall be considered to be included in the contract. 1.04 ALTERNATES A. Alternates, if required, shall be as described in the"Alternates"section of this Project ' Manual, as described on the proposal form, or as indicated on the drawings. 1.05 QUESTIONS OF INTERPRETATION ' A. If questions arise during the bidding process regarding the meaning of any portion of the contract-documents, the prospective bidder shall submit the questions to the Architect/Engineer for clarification. Any definitive interpretation or clarification of the contract documents will be published by addenda, properly issued to each person holding documents, prior to the bid date. Verbal interpretation or explanation not issued in the form of an official addendum shall not be considered part of the bidding documents. ' When submitting questions for clarification, adequate time for issuance and delivery of addenda must be allowed. B. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge regarding interpretations of conflicts within contract documents. 970154 16010-1 10/23/97 1 1 1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENT DISCREPANCIES A. If ambiguities should appear in the contract documents, the Contractor shall request 1 clarification from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work. If the Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out the work in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. Should a conflict occur within the contract documents, the Contractor is deemed to have estimated the more expensive way of doing the work unless a written clarification from the Architect/Engineer was requested and obtained before submission of proposed methods or materials. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions shall apply throughout the contract documents: 1 1. Architect/Engineer Architect or Engineer 2. Code The National Electrical Code and all applicable national, state and local codes 3. Contractor Any Contractor performing work required by the Contract Documents 4. Electrical All electrical work required by the contract , documents 5. Furnish Supply and deliver to the site ready for installation 6. Indicated Noted, scheduled or specified 7. Mechanical All mechanical work required by the contract documents 8. Provide Furnish, install and connect, complete and ready for use 9. Selected Selected by the Architect or Engineer 1 1.08 SYMBOLS A. Items of equipment and materials are indicated on the drawings in accordance with the symbols on the plans. 1.09 ABBREVIATIONS 1 A. The following abbreviations apply throughout the contract documents: 1. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 29 111 West 39th Street, New York, NY 2. ASTM Specification Standard specifications of the American Society I for Testing Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA I 970154 16010-2 10/23/97 I I I 3. CSA Canadian Standards Association 4. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories 111 5. Factory Mutual Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation 6. NEC National Electrical Code, latest edition I7. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 8. NFPA National Fire Protection Association, 60 IBatterymarch Street, Boston, MA 9. Underwriters or UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 207 East Ohio IStreet, Chicago, IL 1.10 CODES AND STANDARDS I A. The work shall be performed by competent craftsmen skilled in the trade involved and shall be done in a manner consistent with normal industry standards. All work shall conform to all applicable sections of currently adopted editions of the codes and I standards listed below or the codes, standards and specifications published by the organizations listed below: 1. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 2. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards. 3. National Electrical Code(NEC), Latest Edition. I 4.5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). I 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 8. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). 9. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 10. Life Safety Code(NFPA#101). I11.12. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Standards(UL). Independent Testing Laboratories(ITL). 13. Electrical Testing Laboratories(ETL). 14. National Electrical Safety Code(NESC). I 15. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation or other recognized national laboratories. 16. Uniform Building Code(UBC). 17. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA). 111 18. State and local codes. B. Where there is a conflict between the code and the contract documents, the code shall have precedence only when it is more stringent than the contract documents. Items that I are allowed by the code but are less stringent than those specified shall not be substituted. I1.11 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall become familiarized with all requirements regarding all permits,fees, etc., and shall comply with them. All permits, licenses, inspections and arrangements 970154 16010-3 10/23/97 1 1 required for the work shall be obtained by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. All utilities shall be installed in accordance with the local rules and regulations and all charges shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS 111 A. The Contractor's options in selecting materials and equipment are limited by requirements of the contract documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects. Materials and equipment shall be provided in accordance with the following: 1. Primary Design Products: Primary design products are those products around which the project was designed in terms of capacity, performance, physical size and quality. Primary design products are indicated by use of a single manufacturer's name, model number or similar data on drawings or schedules or within the specifications. The Contractor shall provide primary design products I unless substitutions are made in accordance with the following paragraphs. 2. Acceptable Equivalent Substitutions: Acceptable equivalent substitutions are products of manufacturers other than those listed for the primary design products. I Equivalent acceptable substitutions shall meet each of the following requirements: a. The product shall be manufactured by one of the acceptable 1 manufacturers listed in the Project Manual, drawings or addenda. b. The product shall meet or exceed the requirements of the contract documents in terms of quality, performance, suitability, appearance and physical characteristics. c. The Contractor providing the substitution shall bear the total cost of all 1 changes due to substitutions. These costs may include additional compensation to the Architect/Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of work by the Owner or other Contractors, and similar considerations. 3. Performance Requirements. Where the contract documents list performance 111 requirements or describe a product or assembly generically, provide products that comply with the specific requirements indicated and that are recommended by the • manufacturer for the respective application. 4. Compliance with Standards, Code and Regulations: Where the specifications require only compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation, the Contractor has the option of selecting a product that complies with specification requirements, including the standards, codes and regulations. B. Proposed substitutions will be judged on the basis of quality, performance, appearance and on the governing space limitations. The reputation of the manufacturer, delivery time 111 requirements, and the availability of repair or replacement parts may also be considered. C. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole and final judge as to the suitability of substitution items. 1 970154 16010-4 10/23/97 I I 1.13 SUBMITTALS IA. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: When required by other sections of this Project Manual, the Contractor shall I1. submit shop drawings, product data or samples to the Architect/Engineer for review. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed. A completed copy of the transmittal form included with the Project Manual shall accompany each I submittal. Submittals shall be numbered consecutively. Unless otherwise noted, submit a minimum of six(6) copies of shop drawings and product data for review. A minimum of four(4)copies will be returned to the Contractor. Where samples are required, submit one(1)sample of each required item. Ia. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for this project by the Contractor, or any manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the work. 1 b. Shop drawings shall be drawn to accurate scale and of adequate size to illustrate required details. Maximum sheet size shall be 30"x 42". For I each shop drawing sheet larger than 11"x 17", submit one drawing on reproducible media and one blue-line or photocopied print. The Architect/Engineer's action shall be indicated on the reproducible drawing Iand the drawing shall be returned to the Contractor. c. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the I Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the work. d. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and to establish the standards by which the work will be performed. I 2. All submittals shall clearly indicate proposed items, capacities, characteristics and details in conformance with contract documents. All equipment items shall be marked with the same item number as used on drawings or schedules. I Capacities, dimensions and special features required shall be certified by the manufacturer. 3. Submittals shall indicate manufacturer's delivery time for the item after review by I the Architect/Engineer. 4. The Architect/Engineer shall review or take other appropriate action upon the I Contractor's submittals such as shop drawings, product data and samples, but only to determine conformance with the design concept of the work and the information given in the contract documents. II 5. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the contract documents by the Architect/Engineer's review of shop drawings, product data or samples. The Contractor shall not be relieved I from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings, product data or samples by the Architect/Engineer's review of those drawings. I 970154 16010-5 10/23/97 I 1 • 1 6. No portion of the work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product data or sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with reviewed submittals. 7. Provide submittals in accordance with the schedule at the end of this section. See individual project manual sections for additional requirements. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. The Contractor shall prepare three operating and maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished. Manuals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review and distribution to the Owner not less than 30 days prior to substantial 1 completion of the project. Manuals not meeting the following requirements may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Each manual shall be assembled in a three-ring binder with hard cover and plastic finish. Binders shall not exceed 3"thickness. Where more than one binder is required, the manuals shall be separated into a logical grouping, i.e., "Mechanical", "Electrical", "Maintenance", "Operation", "Parts", "Shop Drawings", etc. Where loose-leaf inserts are used, the sheets shall be reinforced to prevent tearing from continuous usage. Each binder shall have the following information clearly printed on its front cover: 1 • a. Project name and address. b. Portion of the work covered by each volume(if more than one volume.in the set). Where more than one volume is required, label each volume as "Volume of " c. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor and all Sub- 1 Contractors including night or emergency number. 3. Manual shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1 a. A Complete Index. Contractor may submit the index to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to submittal of complete manuals if desired. b. Names,Addresses and Telephone Numbers. This list shall include the manufacturer and local representative who stocks or furnishes repair parts for all items of equipment and shall be typed on a single page in front of the binder. c. Start-Up, Operation and Shutdown Procedures. Provide a written 1 description of procedures for start-up, operation and shutdown of each electrical item or system. This description shall include switches to operate, buttons to push, etc., in proper sequence, and location of switches and pushbuttons. Description shall include item references or labels used in the contract documents unless otherwise instructed in advance by the Owner. ' d. Equipment Accessory Schedule. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a complete equipment accessory I1 II 970154 16010-6 10/23/97 1 I I schedule listing each piece of equipment and the related size, type, Inumber required and the manufacturer of all renewable items. e. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists. I f. Emergency Procedures. Provide a written description of emergency operating procedures or a list of service organizations(including addresses and telephone numbers)capable of rendering emergency Iservices to the various parts of the system. g. One copy of all shop drawings and product data, clearly marked for each item furnished using the designation label specified or indicated on Idrawings. h. All manufacturers'warranty information. Ii. Normal Maintenance Schedule. Include a listing of work to be performed at various time intervals; i.e., 30, 90, 180 days and yearly. 1 1.14 OPERATING TRAINING A. Complete operating instructions for each system and item of equipment shall be provided I to the Owner's designated personnel. Operation and maintenance manuals must be reviewed and accepted by the Architect/Engineer and provided to the Owner prior to operating training. Training shall be scheduled at the convenience of the Owner. A minimum of two(2) hours of training shall be provided. Training shall include instructions Ion the following: 1. Startup and shutdown procedures I 2.3. Periodic maintenance Emergency operation 4. Safety I B. In addition to the instructions required above,wherever possible the Contractor shall perform the operations being described in order to fully illustrate system operation. I C. At the completion of training,the Contractor shall turn over to the Owner all required keys and special tools for installed equipment. Each key or tool shall be labeled with its use. PART 2- PRODUCTS I2.01 MATERIALS I A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new, unused and undamaged. Materials and equipment shall be the current and standard designs of manufacturers regularly engaged in their production. I2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Where materials and equipment are indicated as furnished by others and installed or I connected under this contract, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify installation details. I 970154 16010-7 10/23/97 1 1 2.03 QUANTITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS REQUIRED A. Wherever in these specifications an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings or required to complete the installation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING A. Provide temporary power and lighting throughout the construction period for the use byall trades, Contractors and Sub-Contractors. Temporary facilities shall be installed in compliance with applicable codes and in compliance with OSHA requirements. 1 B. Cost of temporary power used during construction, including the cost of setting and removing temporary service, shall be paid by the Contractor. Where existing building electrical system is used to provide temporary power and lighting, energy costs shall be paid by the Owner. 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 970154 16010-8 10/23/97 1 I I ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE I SECTION SHOP PRODUCT I NUMBER SECTION NAME DRAWINGS DATA SAMPLES WARRANTY OTHER 16140 Wiring Devices J I 16155 Motor Controls J J 16160 Lighting Panelboards J J I 16181 Fuses J 16360 Safety Switches J 16510 Lighting Fixtures J J IElectric Heating Units J IEND OF SECTION I 1 I I I I I I I I 970154 - 16010-9 10/23/97 I I I SECTION 16050 IBASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION I A. This section describes electrical materials and methods. The requirements contained in this section shall apply to all phases of the work specified, indicated on the drawings, or required to provide for complete installation of electrical systems for this project. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods I PART 2.- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL DATA I A. Unless otherwise specified, all electric motors shall operate at 60 hertz and at the voltages indicated on the drawings. B. Motor starters shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor unless otherwise specified or shown. See the"Motor Co specification. Factory pre-wired section of this controls furnished with equipment, fractional horsepower solid state speed controllers, and special starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor.I 2.02 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATION SEALANT I A. Sealant shall be UL listed, fire resistant rated foam (RTV), caulk(Dow-Corning Fire Stop) or fabricated, sheet metal encased, fire resistant insulation (Pipe Shield). Equivalent products are acceptable. IPART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL IA. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all I areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or materials are to be installed, and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies the Contractor's acceptance of the conditions as fit and proper for the execution of the Ielectrical work. B. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. I 970154 16050-1 10/23/97 I I . 3.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Each Contractor shall make provisions for the delivery and safe storage of his materials I and shall make the required arrangements with other Contractors for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Materials shall be delivered at such stages of the work as will expedite the work as a whole and shall be I marked and stored in such a way as to be easily checked and inspected. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for adequately protecting all supplies and equipment I during cold weather. All items subject to cold weather damage shall be protected by covering, insulating or storing in a heated space. 3.03 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS I A. Perform the electrical work in conformance with the construction called for by other trades and afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate the electrical work with the work of other contractors at I such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. B. Examine the contract documents for the General, Mechanical and Electrical work and the II work of other trades. Coordinate electrical work accordingly. C. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the 111 installation of the electrical work which might prevent prompt and proper installation of work required from other trades. 3.04 COORDINATION OF WORK I A. The Electrical Contractor shall plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. It shall also be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building construction for the installation of the electrical work. The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with all other contractors in furnishing material and information, in proper sequence, for the correct location of all sleeves, inserts, foundations, wiring, etc. , Provisions shall be made for all special frames, openings and conduit sleeves as required. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for all extra cutting and patching made necessary by 1 his failure to properly direct such work at the correct time. C. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors, equipment, controls, etc., shall be furnished, set in ' place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. Attached notes shall apply to the schedule. Furn. Set Power Control I Item By By Wiring Wirinq Equipment motors MC MC EC — I Unit mounted motor starters, contactors I and overload heaters MC MC EC MC I 970154 16050-2 10/23/97 I I I Furn. Set Power Control 1 Item By By Wirinq Wirinq Loose motor starters, contactors and over- tload heaters EC EC EC MC Fused and unfused dis- I connect switches, ther- mal overload and heaters EC EC EC -- I Control relays and transformers MC MC EC MC I Thermostats MC MC EC MC Temperature control panels MC MC EC MC IMotor and solenoid valves, damper motors, I PE and EP switches MC MC MC MC Pushbutton stations EC EC EC EC I Time switches EC EC EC EC DX condensing units MC MC EC EC IMC= Mechanical Contractor EC= Electrical Contractor Notes to table above:I . 1. All equipment-mounted starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor unless otherwise indicated on the preceding schedule. All starters shall conform I to the requirements of the"Motor Control"section of this specification. 2. The following description shall apply to equipment not covered by the "Temperature Control" section of these specifications: Immersion thermostats, I . remote bulb thermostats, motor valves, controls, etc.,which are an integral part of the mechanical equipment or which are directly attached to ducts, piping, equipment, etc., shall be set in place under the mechanical contract. Motor I driven units which are controlled from line voltage, manual operating or start-stop switches, or automatic controls such as line voltage thermostats, float switches or time switches which operate at line voltage, shall be wired for both power and control circuit under the electrical contract. I3. Factory prewired control panels and packaged mechanical units shall be provided with one power source connection point unless noted otherwise. I4. For split systems(systems with remote condenser or condensing units), the Electrical Contractor shall provide 3/4"conduit with a minimum of six distinctively I . 970154 16050-3 10/23/97 I I I colored or tagged#14 wires between units for control wiring. Wiring shall be connected by the Electrical Contractor. I 3.05 LAYING OUT WORK A. The Contractor shall carefully lay out all work in advance of installation using data and I measurements from the site, the appropriate architectural and structural drawings and shop drawings. Equipment layout and all system layouts shall confirm adequate clearances for installation, operation, maintenance and code required clearances from the structure or other equipment and systems. The layout shall not cause problems of operation, maintenance or clearance for items installed by other contractors. B. Prior to installation of any work, make certain the location does not conflict with other items in or near the same location. If the layouts so prepared indicate that the required conditions cannot be met in the space provided, the Contractor shall so inform the Architect/Engineer prior to installation and shall request clarification. C. Failure to properly coordinate and lay out the work will require correction by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. 3.06 DATA AND MEASUREMENTS A. The data given herein and on the drawings is as accurate as could be secured and absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall obtain exact locations, measurements, levels, etc., at the site and shall adapt his work to actual conditions. The Contractor shall examine the General Construction, Mechanical, Electrical, and other applicable drawings and the Specifications. Plans and specifications are available for examination at the office of the Architect/Engineer. Only Architectural drawings, Structural drawings, and site measurements may be utilized in calculations. Mechanical and electrical drawings are diagrammatic or schematic. i 3.07 POSITION OF OUTLETS A. Locate all outlets and devices mounted on finished surfaces with regard to paneling, 1 furring, trim, etc. Where several outlets or devices occur in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged. Outlets or devices improperly located or installed shall be replaced or relocated at the Contractors expense. Outlets and devices shall be set with vertical edges of plates plumb. Boxes or plaster rings shall extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor without projecting beyond the surface. B. Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall coordinate their respective outlets and devices so as not to destroy the aesthetic effect of the surface in which the outlets and devices are mounted. Coordinate the locations of all electrical items with work furnished by other trades to avoid interference. If the required coordination is not done, the outlets or devices shall be removed and relocated if so directed by the Architect/Engineer and the damaged surfaces repaired at the Contractors expense. C. Outlets shall be installed at the height indicated below unless otherwise noted. All heights ' of outlets are measured from finished floor to centerline of device. Heights may be adjusted as necessary to clear wall mounted cabinets, fin tube convectors, unit heaters, etc. Mounting heights shall be in compliance with ADA requirements. When devices are installed in masonry walls, mounting heights may be adjusted to correspond to block coursing. In no case shall outlets be mounted below 16"or switches above 46". 970154 I 16050-4 10/23/97 1 1 • I Wall switches 46" ' Receptacle outlet 16" (general) Receptacle outlet 46" (utility room,workbenches, etc.) Telephone outlet 16" Data outlets 16" D. The mounting heights of disconnect switches, circuit breakers, motor controllers, pushbutton stations and other similar devices and equipment may vary depending upon location and whether individually or group mounted. For convenience and safety, the center of operating levers, handles or buttons shall be mounted no more than 72"above the finished floor. Individual devices or pieces of equipment, unless otherwise specified, shall be located so the operating handle, lever or button is located approximately 5'-0" above finished floor. Lighting panels shall be mounted with the top of the panel 72"above finished floor wherever possible. Coordinate heights of all electrical items with work furnished by other trades to avoid interferences. If any item is improperly located, that item shall be relocated or replaced at the Contractor's expense. 3.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Mark each individual motor controller, switchboard, panelboard, lighting panel, disconnect switch, transformer and remote control device to identify its respective use. Provide identification in all areas. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8" high unless otherwise specified or noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic. ' Embossed plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate. B. Provide warning signs on all equipment, switchgear, transformers, or devices operating at 300 volts or more, reading "DANGER-480 VOLTS", etc. Signs may be decals or nameplates. 3.09 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS ' A. Take such precautions as necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. Failure to provide such protection to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus, equipment, etc., concerned. ' 3.10 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. All motors, valves, control devices, specialties, pull boxes, etc., shall be located to provide ' for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance; if concealed, access doors shall be provided. ' B. Access doors (AD) required for access to equipment requiring inspection or service shall be provided. This Contractor shall provide all access doors not already furnished by other Contractors but which are required for access to electrical equipment. Doors to be Milcor I 970154 16050-5 10/23/97 1 1 I or equivalent steel access doors with frame as required by construction. Doors shall be 12"x 12" unless indicated otherwise. t 3.11 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS A. Voids around penetrations through fire and/or smoke rated barriers and partitions shall be sealed. Sealant or sealing device shall be installed per manufacturer's requirements and all applicable.codes. 3.12 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES I A. The Contractor shall examine the premises and all conditions thereon and/or therein. The bid proposal shall take into consideration all such conditions which may affect the work under this contract. 3.13 ROADWAYS, CURBS AND WALKS A. The Contractor shall use every possible precaution to prevent injuries to roadways, curbs and walks on or adjacent to the site of the work. Any damage shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's own expense. This shall also include damage necessary for installation of the electrical work. 3.14 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS I A. General. All work in the existing building, indicated on the drawings or specified herein, •shall be executed with a minimum amount of interference with the normal activities of the occupants of the building. All work shall be scheduled in advance with the Owner and I shall not proceed without the Owner's written approval. B. Utilities. Utilities shall not be interrupted without the Owner's prior written approval regarding the time and duration of such interruptions. Utilities to existing facilities shall not be disconnected until new or temporary facilities are installed except for short periods of interruption which are necessary for the performance of the new work and which are approved by the Owner. Storm water may be temporarily diverted to surface drainage provided such drainage is arranged to prevent flooding of structures, basements and excavations for construction. C. Welding. The Owner shall be notified before starting welding or cutting. Fire , extinguishers shall be immediately accessible when welding or cutting with an open flame or arc. Welding or cutting with an open flame or arc shall be stopped not less than one hour before leaving the premises. D. Owner's Right to Direct Work. The Owner shall have the right to direct the places of beginning work, its prosecution, and the manner in which all work under this contract is to be conducted, insofar as may be necessary to secure the safe and proper progress and quality of the work. E. Cutting and Patching. Each Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching required for the work. Patching shall be done by craftsmen skilled in the trade involved and shall be prepared to receive paint. Conduit openings through floors may be drilled up to 1"but shall be core drilled over 1". Whenever the building surfaces(walls, floors, etc.) and openings are modified, removed and/or replaced to accommodate the new work or to introduce into or remove items from the building, such surfaces or openings shall be I 970154 • 16050-6 10/23/97 1 I carefully reinstalled in conformance with the applicable code to protect the integrity of the building. IF. Existing Conduits or Electrical Equipment. If any existing conduit or electrical equipment is encountered which would interfere with the proper installation of new work, it shall be I removed or relocated as required or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Where existing work is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with these specifications. Materials used shall be the same as for new work unless otherwise specified. 3.15 DEMOLITION AND REMODEL A. The Electrical Contractor shall remove all existing lights, receptacles, switches, etc., indicated on plans or which are not indicated but must be removed to accommodate I demolition or new remodeling. B. Where equipment,fixtures or wiring devices are to be removed, all associated conduit, I wire,fittings, supports and all other associated appurtenances shall be completely removed. Such removal shall include equipment and raceways located in accessible ceiling, floor and wall spaces. Where conduits are embedded in concrete floors or plaster I walls, the conduits shall be cut back and capped below surface. Refinish surface in a workmanlike manner to match existing. C. Where existing walls are shown to be removed, power to all electrical devices and associated appurtenances relating to the walls shall be disconnected by the Electrical Contractor and removed by the General Contractor. Circuit continuity shall be maintained up and down stream from removed outlets. Extend circuiting to up and downstream I devices and reconnect as required. Where existing site lighting fixtures are removed, the Contractor shall verify the routing of existing circuits. Circuit continuity shall be maintained between existing fixtures which remain. ID. In areas which are remodeled, existing wire shall be replaced with new wire. No existing wire is permitted to remain unless noted. Existing concealed conduit and boxes may be reused. IE. Verify existing conditions in field prior to bid date. 3.16 TESTS I A. The Electrical Contractor shall make all necessary tests to insure that the entire installation is free from improper grounds and from shorted and/or open circuits. Voltage I and current tests shall be made before any motors are placed in operation. All loads must be balanced across phases. Check to see that all lights burn and are controlled by switches or breakers indicated on drawing. I B. The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to insure safety to building occupants and operating personnel, conformity to code authorities and contract documents. IC. If the above tests are inadequate and upon request the following field tests shall be performed and reports submitted to the Engineer: 1. Resistance tests of the ground system and all new cables and bus work to ground. 11 970154 16050-7 10/23/97 I 2. All feeders and branch circuits rated below 600 volts shall be megger tested between phase conductors and between phase conductor and ground, using a 1 1000 volt megger. Tests shall be made upon completion of all connection and splices and insertion of all overcurrent devices. Tests shall indicate freedom from short circuits and grounds. 3. All circuits,which under any circumstances could be paralleled, shall be tested for proper phasing using hot phasing or other approved techniques. 4. The full lo ad running current of all motors shall be recorded. Overload heaters shall be inspected to verify that they are properly sized. 5. Full load currents of all feeders serving single phase loads shall be measured. If necessary, branch circuits shall be reconnected to achieve a load balance on each phase. 6. Proper operation of all control and alarm circuits shall be demonstrated. 1 7. Outlets: a. Outlets shall be checked for proper voltage and polarity. b. For all three phase outlets, phase rotation shall be checked to verify the same rotation for all outlets. 3.17 TEST REPORTS A. Submit three(3)copies of all specified tests to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to date of substantial completion. B. All equipment, systems and wiring defects shall be corrected prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION I 1 970154 16050-8 10/23/97 1 I • SECTION 16110 CONDUIT RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers conduit raceway systems. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 5. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16130-Boxes and Fittings 7. Section 16450-Grounding PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All raceways shall be UL listed and shall be no smaller than 1/2 inch. B. Provide raceways as follows: 1. All raceways embedded in earth or embedded in concrete slabs on grade shall be polyvinyl chloride(PVC)conduit. 2. Raceways exposed to weather and raceways subject to damage shall be rigid steel conduit(RGS). 3. All other raceways may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) unless otherwise noted. Flexible metal conduit may be used where conditions warrant. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connections to equipment, for all connections to vibrating equipment, and in damp or wet locations. 2.02 CONDUIT TYPES A. Rigid steel conduit(RGS)and steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be hot dipped galvanized type. • 111 B. Flexible metal conduit for general use shall be galvanized steel, heavy duty single strip type. Aluminum flexible conduit may be used for connection to light fixtures. C. Rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC)conduit shall be Schedule 40. D. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall have a galvanized steel core with an overall thermoplastic cover. 970154 16110-1 10/23/97 Ma I 2.03 MANUFACTURERS A. All metallic conduit shall be manufactured byAllied Tube and Conduit Corporation equivalent. or B. Non-metallic conduit shall be manufactured by Carton or equivalent. C. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be American Brass"Sealtite"or equivalent. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All wiring shall be installed in raceways.. Raceways shall be concealed except where indicated on plans. B. Raceways shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to stru ctural members of the building. Raceways run below a slab on grade may be run point to point only if the raceway routing does not interfere with other building elements. C. Where conduit is installed exposed on a ceiling or other surface, it shall be routed in such a manner that it does not conflict with light fixtures, equipment, diffusers, grilles or other openings. Conduit shall not be installed on floor surfaces and shall not be supported from floor surfaces in a manner which impedes access to spaces or equipment or which causes a tripping hazard. D. All conduits passing through floors shall be installed in sleeves. 1. Sleeves shall be black steel pipe sized to accommodate the conduit. Sheet metal sleeves shall not be used. 2. Sleeves through floors in mechanical spaces or unfinished spaces shall extend 1" above finished floor. 1 3. Sleeves through exterior walls shall be filled with water-tight caulking after installation of conduit. E. Conduits passing through fire-rated construction shall be firestopped to maintain the fire rating of the construction. See Section 16010"General Electrical Requirements". F. Conduits shall be supported from structural members using approved hangers spaced as required by code. Conduits shall not be supported from mechanical piping, ductwork or equipment. 1. Hangers shall be adjustable band or snap-ontype p fastened to hanger rods, trapezes or to structure. r 2. Expansion anchors shall be used for fastening to concrete or masonry. 111 3. Approved wire hangers or clips may be used to support single conduits 3/4"or smaller where permitted by local codes. Attachment to ceiling system support wires is not permitted. 970154 16110-2 10/23/97 I _ G. Openings in conduits shall be capped or plugged throughout the duration of work. a H. Raceways shall not be placed in plain concrete, such as cement toppings on structural floors,without special permission. Reinforcing steel shall not be displaced to accommodate raceway installation in reinforced concrete. In general, all embedded con- duits shall be located in the physical center of the particular section of concrete. Particular attention is called to the fact that there are many extenuating conditions where the Contractor may be instructed during the course of the project not to place embedded conduits in certain areas, generally due to the possibility of unsightly cracking or for structural reasons. Being so instructed shall not entitle the Contractor to extra ,� compensation. Any raceway installation in reinforced concrete not covered by the following table shall require special permission: ILocation Maximum Concrete Displacement Floors and Walls Displacement of 1/3 of thickness of concrete. Conduits I shall be spaced not less than three diameters on centers. I Sleeves through Sleeves shall be spaced not less than three diameters Floors and Walls on centers. III. Conduits penetrating roofs shall be installed in a manner approved by the roofing system . : manufacturer. Where mechanical piping and electrical conduits serve roof-mounted equipment, electrical conduit shall penetrate the roof in the same location as the piping. Provide pitch pockets or flashing as required to maintain a watertight seal. J. Permitted conduit fill shall be based on type THW insulated conductors for sizes#14 through#8, regardless of the type of insulation used. A maximum of 5#12 current I carrying conductors may be installed in 1/2"conduit(9#12 current carrying conductors in 3/4"conduit)to allow for possible additional wires in the future unless otherwise indicated on drawings. • K. Insulated ground conductors shall be run in all raceways including all branch circuits and feeders. L. Exterior conduits shall be pushed beneath paved areas where possible. Where concrete must be removed, it shall be neatly sawcut. 3.02 METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION I_ A. When rigid steel conduit is used, all connections shall be threaded. Threadless fittings may be used only when specific acceptance is given. Conduits terminating at raintight enclosures shall terminate in raintight hubs. B. 3/8"flexible metal conduit in lengths not less than 48"and not exceeding 72"shall be used for connection of light fixtures recessed in suspended ceilings. Larger sizes of 1-1 flexible metal conduit may be used where conditions dictate. 3.03 PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION IA. Installation of PVC conduit shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Ground wires shall be installed in all PVC conduits except service entrance conduits. 970154 16110-3 10/23/97 I I B. PVC conduit shall not be buried in interior structural floor slabs, beams or columns. PVC conduit, both for interior and exterior use, shall not be run exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. PVC conduit shall not be concealed in interior walls or ceiling spaces, except that PVC conduit stub-ups to a maximum of 14"above finished floor will be permitted where concealed in wall spaces. PVC conduit may be installed where exposed to view only if indicated on plans. C. Where PVC conduits are installed directly in earth, they shall be buried a minimum of 24" below finished grade unless encased in not less than 2"of concrete. All conduits for ' exterior branch circuits shall be run adjacent to curbs to avoid interference with planting of shrubs and trees. END OF SECTION I I 1I I I 1 I Ii I 970154 16110-4 10/23/97 I I SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLT) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers 600 volt conductors. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 15. . Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL Aa. All conductors shall be copper. I2.02 INSULATION TYPE A. Conductor insulations shall be of the following types unless otherwise indicated: 1. THHN/THWN thermoplastic for branch circuit work(#10 or smaller) 2. THHN/THWN or XHHW(#8 and larger) 2.03 CONDUCTOR SIZE • A. Conductor sizes are based on copper conductors unless otherwise noted. B. The minimum conductor size shall be#12 AWG unless otherwise noted. Larger conductors shall be installed where indicated. C. Conductors for signal and control circuits may be#14 AWG. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION S ELATION A. Install conductors in raceways after the interior of the building has been physically protected from weather and after all work likely to injure the conductors has been completed. 1 B. Install insulated ground conductor in all raceways including all branch circuits and feeders. I 970154 16120-1 10/23/97 1 C. Maximum number of current carrying conductors permitted per raceway is 9 unless otherwise noted. 111 D. Neatly arrange all wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. E. Pro vide the required quantities of conductors for all circuits. 111 3.02 CIRCUIT CONTINUITY A. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. Splices shall be made only within I outlet or junction boxes. 3.03 SPLICES AND TAPS A. Splices and taps for#8 AWG and smaller conductors shall be made with 3M, Ideal or equivalent twist-on pre-insulated connectors. Connectors of the porcelain cup type, with or without metal inserts, shall not be used. 111 B. Splices and taps for conductors#6 AWG and larger shall be made with mechanical set- screw power distribution blocks; Burndy BPD or BPD2 series, or equivalent,with insulating cover. C. Connectors other than those specified above shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to use. 3.04 COLOR CODING A. All conductors shall be provided with color coded insulation for conductor sizes where color coding is commercially available. Phase wires of multi-wire circuits shall be distinctly colored to provide circuit identification. Color coding shall be as follows unless otherwise noted. • 120/208V, 3 ph., 4W Phase Wires A-Black, B-Red, C-Blue Neutral White Ground Green Isolated Ground Green with stripe 277/480V, 3 ph.,4W Phase Wires A-Brown, B-Orange, C-Yellow Neutral White with colored (not green)stripe Ground Green I B. Conductors in sizes which are not commercially available with color coded insulation shall be marked with color coded tape corresponding to the above table. Color coding shall occur at all termination points and in all pullboxes,wireways, gutters, etc. All conductors which do not conform to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 1 970154 16120-2 10/23/97 I I SECTION 16130 IBOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers all required junction boxes, outlet boxes, pull boxes and conduit fittings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS 11 A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 5. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16110-Cond uit 7. Section 16450-Grounding PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.01 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Interior boxes shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. Minimum box size shall be 4" I (octagon or square)except that boxes for outlets installed flush with exposed masonry walls may be single or more gangs as required. Boxes in masonry walls shall be square cornered masonry boxes. Extension and plaster rings shall be installed where required. Box size shall comply with the NEC. 11 B. Exterior surface mounted boxes shall be cast boxes with threaded hubs. Exterior boxes shall be provided with weatherproof cover plates. IC. Boxes shall be manufactured by Raco, Steel City or equivalent. 2.02 PULLBOXES 1 A. Pullboxes shall be galvanized or painted sheet metal sized as required by the NEC. Each pullbox shall have a removable cover on the largest accessible side of the box unless otherwise required. fg, 2.03 FITTINGS 111 A. All fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be threaded. Fittings for EMT conduit may be steel or cast, compression or set screw type. B. Bushings shall be O.Z. Type"A"thermosetting phenolic. Grounding bushings shall be I O.Z. Type"BLG". Equivalent bushings are acceptable. !' 970154 16130-1 10/23/97 1 ' . 1 1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 BOXES A. All junction boxes and outlet boxes shall be securely attached to the surface on which they are mounted. Boxes shall not be supported solely by conduits. Where a box is attached on one side to a metal stud, provide a support bracket on the side of the box opposite the stud to prevent box from twisting. B. Boxes installed above an accessible ceiling shall be oriented with the box opening facing down or to the side. C. Covers on boxes in accessible ceiling spaces or boxes exposed in unfinished areas shall be identified as follows: 1. Labeling. Each box containing branch circuit conductors shall be labeled with the branch panel name and circuit numbers. Labeling shall be performed using a black permanent ink marker. 3.02 FITTINGS A. All fittings shall be installed wrench-tight. Where set screw type fittings are used, the screws shall be sufficiently tightened so that the conduit does not move. B. Insulating bushings shall be installed on all box connectors 1"or larger and on all conduits stubbed above accessible ceilings. Grounding bushings shall be installed as indicated and as required by code. C. Expansion joints shall be installed where conduits cross a structural expansion joint or wherever a conduit is connected to two separate structures. O.Z. Type"AX"expansion joints shall be used for rigid conduit. O.Z. Type"TX"expansion joints shall be used for 111 thin wall conduit. D. Where conduits with tapered threads cannot be coupled with standard conduit couplings, I split couplings shall be used. Running threads will not be permitted. O.Z. Type"SP"split couplings shall be used for interior installations. O.Z. Type"SSP"concrete type split couplings shall be used for exterior work and for conduits installed in concrete. I E. Fittings shall be manufactured by O.Z.,T& B, Raco or equivalent. 3.03 PULLBOXES I' A. Provide all pullboxes shown on plans and additional pullboxes wherever necessary to meet code requirements for maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends. Size all pullboxes as required by code. B. Pullboxes shall be supported independently of conduits. 111 C. It is the intent of the drawings to illustrate the interconnection of electrical equipment in diagrammatic form. The Contractor shall be responsible for routing of conduits and for providing all required pullboxes whether or not pullboxes are shown on plans. 970154 I 5 16130-2 10/23/97 1 3.04 CONDUIT SEALS A. . Provide moisture-tight seals in all conduits penetrating exterior building walls. END OF SECTION • • I I I 970154 16130-3 10/23/97 1 I 111 SECTION C ON 16140 i, WRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION. 1 A. This section covers wiring devices, plates, floor boxes and poke-thru fittings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE IA. When included as a part of this specification, the following sections contain related requirements: 1. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 2. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 16130-Boxes and Fittings 4. Section 16450-Grounding 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the"General Conditions"of this specification. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's literature illustrating the following: 11. Switches Description (single pole, three-way, etc.), ampere rating, • voltage rating, grade, color, catalog number I 2. Receptacles Description (surge suppression, isolated ground, etc.), ampere rating, voltage rating, NEMA configuration, grade, color, catalog number I3. Plates Color, finish, catalog number PART 2-PRODUCTS I2.01 SWITCHES A. General use switches shall be specification grade, rated 20 amps, 120/277 volts AC. Switch color shall be ivory. B. Switches shall be as scheduled below: I P & S Single pole 20AC1 Double pole 20AC2 Three way 20AC3 Four way 20AC4 1-1 Single pole, keyed 20AC1-L Single pole with pilot light in toggle(120 volt) 20AC1-RPL 970154 16140-1 10/23/97 I I 1 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex receptacles shall be self-grounding type, specification 9 9 P on grade, rated 20 amps, 125 volts AC. Receptacle color shall be ivory. B. Specialty receptacles shall be as noted on drawings. Receptacles dedicated to specific equipment shall have a configuration matching the equipment plug. C. Receptacles shall be as scheduled below: I P& S Simplex receptacle, 20A-125V 5351 _ Duplex receptacles, 20A-125V 5342 Ground fault interrupter duplex receptacle, 20A-125V 2091 2.03 PLATES A. Plates shall be provided for all devices. Multiple gang plates shall be provided for devices mounted side by side. Blank plates shall be provided for all boxes without devices and for all data and communication outlets unless otherwise noted. B. Plates on flush devices shall be Type 302 satin finished stainless steel. Blank plates shall match the finish of other plates installed on the same surface or in the same area. C. Where devices are installed in exposed boxes or fittings, plates shall be galvanized steel and shall be designed to fit the box used. Plates for flush mounted devices shall not be installed on exposed boxes. D. Plates for weatherproof devices shall be gasketed and shall have hinged covers. All I weatherproof plates shall be metal. 2.08 MANUFACTURERS • A. Wring devices or plates manufactured by Bryant, Eagle, General Electric, Hubbell, Leviton or Slater which are equivalent to those specified above may be substituted. All devices shall be products of a single manufacturer unless special permission is given by the Architect/Engineer. If installed devices or plates are not as specified, they shall be removed and replaced with the specified device or plate at the Contractor's expense. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Wiring devices shall be securely mounted to their respective outlet boxes. Device plates shall fit tight to the mounting surface on all sides. Switches and receptacles installed side-by-side shall be installed in a multiple gang box and shall be provided with a single plate. B. Conductors shall be connected to devices using screw terminals on the devices. Push-in type connections are not acceptable. 970154 16140-2 10/23/97 I II 1 C. Back-to-back mounting of outlets is prohibited. Offset all outlet boxes a minimum of 6 inches to reduce sound transmission. Offset 24"in fire-rated partitions. END OF SECTION • 1 1 • • • • • I I I I I 970154 • 16140-3 10/23/97 I I SECTION 16155 • MOTOR CONTROL IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers motor starters. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Drawings 9 12. General and Supplementary pp ry Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements II 5. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16181 -Fuses 7. Section 15950-Temperature Control 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the"General Conditions"of this Ispecification. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature showing starter type(FVNR, two-speed, etc.), starter size, horsepower rating, overload type, and all accessories. 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Furnish and install NEMA rated magnetic motor starters where indicated on drawings. All I starters shall be Design E motor rated with a horsepower rating not less than 1.4 times the standard motor rating through 100 HP; see the following table for the maximum motor horsepower allowed for each NEMA size starter. All three phase starters shall include NEMA Class 20 solid state overload relays with integral single phase protection. Where a I combination starter is indicated on plans, provide a starter with an integral disconnect and Motor Circuit Protector(MCP). 200V 3-phase 460V 3-phase Il NEMA Size Max. Motor HP Max. Motor HP 0 2 3 1 5 5 2 7.5 15 3 15 30 I 4 25 60 5 40 150 6 100 300 I 970154 16155-1 10/23/97 I 1 I B. Each starter shall have a minimum of one normally-open and one normally-closed auxiliary contact for control interlocks. Additional contacts shall be provided as required for temperature control or safety control sequence. Provide an integral 120 volt control transformer with each three phase starter unless otherwise noted. Each starter shall be provided with a Hand-Off-Auto switch and a reset button mounted in the cover of the starter enclosure. A pilot light shall be provided to indicate motor running (red). I 2.02 SINGLE PHASE MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Single phase manual motor starters shall be standard type horsepower rated manual 1 switches with thermal element overload protection. Each switch shall have an integral pilot light or mechanical"ON"indicator. B. Switch and fustat assemblies shall be horsepower rated. Provide a fustat sized for 115% of motor full load current. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Manufacturer shall be Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, Furnas, General Electric, Siemens, Square"D"or Westinghouse. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All motor starters shall be installed per NEC and industry standards. Coordinate starter locations with Mechanical Contractor and with equipment supplied. B. Provide overload heaters or thermal elements for each starter based on the nameplate full load amps of its respective motor. C. Provide control wiring and interlocks as specified in Section 16010"General Requirements". Any control wiring which is not included in the"Temperature Control" specification shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. • END OF SECTION I I 1 1 I 970154 I 16155-2 10/23/97 I SECTION 16160 LIGHTING PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1 A. This section covers lighting panelboards. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. When included as a part of this specification, the following sections contain related requirements: 1. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 2. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 16450-Grounding 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the"General Conditions"of this specification. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's literature detailing the following: 1. Panel designation(same as on drawings) 2. Voltage and ampere rating 3. Main device(breaker or lugs) 4. Bus material 5. Short circuit interrupting rating 6. Quantity and ratings of branch overcurrent devices 7. Accessories(ground bar, special lugs, split bus, contactor, door lock, etc.) 8. Panelboard dimensions 9. Mounting (flush or surface) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated on the drawings. All panelboards shall include an equipment ground bar. The ground bar shall be bonded to the panelboard enclosure unless otherwise noted. Provide branch breakers in quantities and sizes as scheduled. Provide all scheduled accessories. 2.02 BUSING A. Bus bars shall be copper or electrical grade aluminum. 2.03 OVERCURRENT DEVICES A. The minimum interrupting rating of overcurrent devices shall be 10,000 amps symmetrical or as indicated on the drawings. 970154 16160-1 10/23/97 I 1 B. Branch circuit protective devices shall be bolt-on type, thermal magnetic circuit breakers for alternating current. All 20A breakers shall be"SWD"type. All breakers serving air conditioning and refrigeration equipment shall be HACR rated. Multipole breakers shall be single handle, common trip. Tandem or half-size circuit breakers will not be permitted. Load center type construction will not be permitted unless specifically indicated on the 111 drawings. 2.04 CABINETS A. Cabinets shall be made of zinc-coated sheet steel. They shall conform to the , requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and bear their inspection label. Cabinets shall be provided with not less than 4"wiring gutters on the top, sides and bottom. Minimum cabinet width shall be 20"unless otherwise noted. Minimum cabinet depth shall III be 5-1/2". Trims shall be fitted with hinged doors having a latch and a keyed lock. All panelboards shall be keyed alike. Doors and trims shall have flush hardware. All beads or similar projections required shall be on the inside of the cabinet. Trims and doors shall have a suitable primer coat and finish coat of the manufacturer's standard color. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be Challenger, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, Square"D" or Westinghouse. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MOUNTING A. Provide panelboards suitable for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. Panelboards and their covers shall be installed square and plumb. Provide unistrut supports as necessary for panel installation. B. Covers on flush mounted panels shall fit tightly to the surrounding wall surfaces on all sides. Provide five(5) spare 3/4"conduits stubbed into the closest accessible ceiling space from all flush mounted panelboards. C. Provide code required working space in front of and above all panels. 3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS A. Connect all branch circuits to 20 amp 1-pole breakers unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 3.03 CIRCUIT NUMBERING A. Circuit numbering is based on pole position within the panelboard. For multipole 1 breakers, the circuit number corresponds to the first pole position occupied by the breaker. 3.04 PHASE ROTATION A. Connect all panelboards in the following rotation: Phase A left bus; phase B center bus; phase C right bus(front viewing). I 970154 16160-2 10/23/97 I 1 3.05 LABELING A. Provide a typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard identifying the loads served by each circuit. Each circuit shall be identified by an appropriate reference, i.e., room name, area, location, or equipment name. B. If the overcurrent protection for a panelboard feeder is less than the nameplate rating of the panelboard, provide a phenolic nameplate indicating the ampacity of the feeder circuit. Attach nameplate to the inside of the panelboard so it is visible when the panelboard door 1 is opened. C. Provide additional labels as described in Section 16050"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". END OF SECTION 1 I 1 I I I 970154 16160-3 10/23/97 1 • r SECTION 16170 ' EQUIPMENT CONNECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers the connection of all equipment furnished under other Divisions of this specification and connection of Owner-furnished equipment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 5. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16110-Conduit Raceways. 7. Section 16120-Conductors(600 Volt) 8. Section 16130- Boxes and Fittings 9. Section 16140-Wiring Devices 10. Section 16155-Motor Control I 11. Section 16181 - Fuses 12. Section 16360-Safety Switches 13. Section 16450-Grounding PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Products, not specified in this section, may be needed to satisfy the requirements of this specification. All such products shall comply with the requirements of their respective specification sections. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide final power and control connections for all equipment furnished under other Divisions of this specification and for all owner-furnished equipment. Where not specified in the Mechanical Division of this specification, connect all motor controls and associated mechanical equipment as required for a complete and functional control system. B. All interlocks and wiring to and between controls for pumps, air handling units, fans, make-up air units, condensing units, hoods, heat reclaim system, energy management system, energy system control panel, Owner-furnished equipment, etc. shall be furnished by the electrical contractor. I 970154 16170-1 10/23/97 1 C. VerifyI all control wiring requirements with manufacturer certified shop drawings for each piece of equipment or control system and install accordingly. All control wiring shall be installed in conduit. 3.02 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Locate receptacle for each electric water cooler so that cord and plug are concealed inside or behind cooler. 3.03 TEMPERATURE CONTROL/ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PANELS r A. Provide a dedicated power circuit from the nearest 120 volt general purpose panel to each temperature control, energy management system, or data gathering panel. B. Coordinate panel quantities and locations with Installing Contractor. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 111. I • 111 t 1 I I r 970154 I 16170-2 10/23/97 I I SECTION 16181 I FUSES IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK IA. This section covers fuses rated 600V and less. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. When included as a part of this specification, the following sections contain related I requirements: I1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections I 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 5. Section 16050- Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16360-Safety Switches 7. Section 16450-Grounding I 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the"General Conditions"of this specification. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's data illustrating the fuse class, ampere rating and catalog number. 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL IA. Fuses with standard ratings shall be UL listed. Fuses with non-standard ratings shall be UL listed where possible. I2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Provide cartridge fuses for all fusible switches and motor starters as indicated on I drawings. Fuses rated 600A and less shall be dual element time delay Class"RK-5" Bussman Fusetron unless otherwise noted. Fuse sizes indicated for equipment having label indicating maximum fuse size shall be adjusted in size if necessary so that installed fuse matches size indicated on equipment label. Equivalent fuses as manufactured by I Gould Shawmut or Littelfuse are acceptable. 2.03 PLUG FUSES IA. Provide Bussman switch and Fustat assemblies where indicated on drawings. Fustats shall be sized at 125%of the full load current of the motor protected. 2.04 SPARE FUSES A. Provide three spare fuses for each size of cartridge fuse used. 970154 _ 16181 1 10/23/97 I 1 1 B. Provide four spare Fustats for each size of Fustat used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Cartridge fuses shall be installed so that the fuse size and rating is visible without removing the fuse. I 3.02 LABELING A. For each fusible switch, provide an adhesive-backed label indicating the size and type of I replacement fuse to be used. Labels shall be on the inside of the door to the switch. END OF SECTION / I I 1 I 1 1 I 970154 I 16181-2 10/23/97 1 I SECTION 16360 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers safety switches. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Where included as a part of this specification, the following sections contain related requirements: I1. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 2. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 16181 -Fuses 4. Section 16450-Grounding 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the"General Conditions"of this specification. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's data illustrating the following: I 1.2. Ampere rating and quantity of poles Accessories (solid neutral, ground lugs, etc.) 3. Dimensions PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide safety switches as a disconnecting means where indicated on the drawings and/or where required by code. B. All safety switches shall be heavy duty fusible type unless otherwise noted. Fuse clips for switches rated 600A and less shall be Class"R". 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Safety switches shall be manufactured by Challenger, Cutler-Hammer, General Electrical, Siemens, Square"D"or Westinghouse. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 MOUNTING A. All safety switches shall be installed square and plumb. Securely attach switches to the 1 surfaces on which they are mounted. B. All exterior grade level safety switches shall be bolted closed. 970154 16360-1 10/23/97 1 I 3.02 LABELING I A. Provide labeling as required by Section 16050"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". '1 END OF SECTION 1 I I I 1 I I I 970154 1 16360-2 10/23/97 I 1 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION �{ A. This section covers grounding of all electrical equipment as indicated on drawings and as i required by code. B. It is the intent of this section to include all code required grounding whether or not such grounding is specifically indicated on plans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Where included as a part of this specification, the followingcontain related requirements: 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 5. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16110-Conduit Raceways 7. Section 16120-Conductors, 600V PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used PART 3-EXECUTION 111, 3.01 GENERAL A. All metallic conduits, supports, cabinets and equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and all local codes and ordinances. Grounding methods indicated on the drawings or specified herein which exceed the code ' requirements shall take precedence over the code. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. Ground all non-current-carrying metal parts of the wiring system and of all electrical equipment. 1 B. Where metallic conduits terminate by means of lock nut and bushings without a mechanical connection to a metallic housing of electrical equipment, provide ground bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. C. Provide equipment grounding conductors sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95 for 1 all feeders and for all branch circuits. Equipment grounding conductors shall be installed in all non-metallic conduits and in all flexible conduits. In all cases, equipment grounding conductors shall be installed in the same raceway as the associated branch circuit or feeder conductors. Where parallel conductors are installed in separate conduits, a 970154 16450-1 10/23/97 1 I ground conductor shall be installed in each conduit. Ground wires are not required for low voltage signalling circuits or for data and communication circuits unless otherwise noted. D. Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated bonding conductor from the grounding terminal of each wiring device to its respective outlet or junction box. E. Clean all surfaces thoroughly before attaching ground lugs or clamps. Coated or painted surfaces shall be cleaned to bare metal. Apply a non-corrosive compound to cleaned surfaces prior to installing grounding lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed, the metal shall be painted or touched up with"Galvanox"after installation of grounding lugs or clamps. 3.03 TESTS I A. Test the completed grounding system. END OF SECTION 111 • I I I 1 1 I 1 I I 970154 1 16450-2 10/23/97 I SECTION 16510 ILIGHTING FIXTURES IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK IA. This section covers lighting fixtures and accessories. 1 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: I 1. Drawings 2. General and Supplementary Conditions 3. Other Division 0 and Division 1 sections 4. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements I 5. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 6. Section 16450-Grounding 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the"General Conditions"of this specification. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's literature detailing the Ifollowing for each fixture: 1. Fixture type(same as on drawings) I 2. Manufacturer and catalog number 3. Fixture construction including dimensions 4. Lens material and thickness I 5. Fixture mounting information and required clearances 6. Photometrics 7. Ballast type and voltage • 8. Accessories(emergency battery pack,wire guard, cord and plug,fuses, etc.) III PART 2-PRODUCTS I 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide all lighting fixtures and accessories as indicated on the drawings or specified I herein. All lighting fixtures and their electrical components shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label of approval. B. Fixtures indicated on the drawings represent the minimum acceptable construction and I photometric performance. Fixtures which are products of manufacturers other than those listed shall not be used without prior acceptance by the Architect/Engineer. C. Sockets for straight, bipin, rapid start fluorescent lamps shall be quarter-turn type. Snap- in sockets shall not be used. I 970154 16510-1 10/23/97 1 2.02 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent ballasts for rapid start lamps shall be UL Listed, high power factor, Class P, energy saving,, sound level A type. Ballasts must be compatible with the switching arrangements indicated on plans. B. H.I.D. ballasts shall be high power factor type and shall be as recommended by the fixture 1 manufacturer. Each H.I.D. ballast shall be individually fused. 2.03 LAMPS 1 A. Lamp wattage and type shall be as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, all lamps shall conform with the following: 1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall be T12 premium energy efficient type with a minimum light output of 2650 lumens for 4-foot lamps. 2. H.I.D. lamps shall be suitable for burning in the position required by the fixtures in which they are used. High output lamps which require non-standard ballasts shall not be used. H.I.D. lamps shall be coated where possible. I 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories as indicated on the drawings or as otherwise required for a I complete and functional installation. B. Plaster frames shall be designed and finished to preclude the possibility of rust stains on surrounding surfaces. C. ' Provide polycarbonate lamp jackets over lamps in industrial fixtures and in exposed strip fixtures. Lamp jackets shall be sized to match the lamps used. 111 D. Pre-manufactured flexible fixture whips,where used, shall consist of phase, neutral and grounding conductors(minimum size 18 AWG). The maximum fixture whip length shall be six(6)feet unless otherwise noted. Minimum length shall be four(4)feet. E. Where fluorescent emergency ballasts are indicated in the fixture schedule or by note on the drawing,they shall be provided as an integral part of the fixture unless otherwise shown. Emergency ballasts shall be compatible with standard, energy-saving, dimming and electronic AC ballasts. Units shall be of the high lumen output type (minimum of 1350 lumens for 2'-4'T8 lamps). Input voltage shall be 120/277. The emergency ballasts shall maintain rated lumen output for 90 minutes and shall recharge within 24 hours. Power consumption shall be no greater than 4.0 watts. Battery shall be high temperature nickel cadmium with a five-year warranty, except battery for compact lamps shall have minimum of two-year warranty. The electronic components shall be warranted for one year. Ballasts shall be UL listed under standards of UL 924. Emergency ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps shall be similar to T8 lamp emergency ballasts and shall have 525 lumen output for 2-18W lamps, 725 lumen output for 2-26W lamps, and proportional output for other voltage lamps.. Where emergency lighting fixtures are indicated to be switched with other lights, a separate hot wire connected ahead of the local lighting switch shall be provided and connected to each emergency ballast. 1 970154 16510-2 10/23/97 i I 2.05 SPARE LAMPS AND BALLASTS IA. Provide the Owner with spare lamps for each type of lamp used. The quantities of spare lamps for each lamp type shall be as follows: IQuantity of Quantity of Lamps Installed Spare Lamps I 1 - 5 2 6- 10 4 11 - 20 8 1 21 &over 12 2.06 MANUFACTURERS IA. Magnetic ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Magnetek, or Universal. B. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric, Osram, Phillips, Sylvania or Venture. IAll fluorescent lamps of a given color shall be the product of a single manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 1 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall verify all ceiling and wall details from the general construction I documents prior to ordering fixtures. All fixtures shall be furnished complete with the proper mounting accessories for the intended installation. I B. All lighting fixtures shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Fixtures shall be installed square and plumb with respect to building construction. C. All reflectors and lenses shall be clean and without fingerprints. ID. Recessed fixtures shall be installed such that there are no light leaks between the fixtures and the surrounding ceiling. Fixture trims shall fit tight to surrounding surfaces. Fixtures I supported by suspended ceiling systems shall be fastened to framing members using earthquake clips. E. Surface mounted fixtures shall fit tight to surrounding surfaces. Outlet boxes for surface Imounted fixtures in finished areas shall be completely concealed by the fixture. 3.02 FIXTURE WHIPS I A. Fixture whips shall be used for all recessed fixtures installed in an accessible ceiling. All fixture whips,whether pre-manufactured or custom made, shall include a grounding conductor. Anchor all whips according to code. I B. Fixture whips shall connect each fixture to a junction box above the ceiling. Fixture whips and other conduits may be installed between individual fixtures only when tandem ballasts IIare used. I 970154 16510-3 10/23/97 1 1 1 3.03 EXTERIOR LIGHTING A. All conduits for exterior lighting and signage shall be installed adjacent curbs or sidewalks I to avoid conflicts with plantings. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I 1 I 1 I I 1 i 1 I 970154 16510-4 10/23/97 1 1 I SECTION 16726 1 AUTOMATIC FAN SHUTDOWN SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section covers the provision and installation of an automatic fan shutdown system. It is the intent of this specification to require furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials and performance of all operations required in conjunction with the installation of a complete and functional electrically supervised, closed loop, 24 volt DC system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. When included as a part of this specification,the following sections contain related ' requirements: 1. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 2. Section 16050- Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 16110-Conduit Raceways 4. Section 16130-Boxes and Fittings 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wherever possible, all equipment shall be the product of a single fire alarm manufacturer. The system shall meet the requirements of all applicable NFPA Standards. Fire alarm equipment shall not be modified or installed in a method which alters or voids the Underwriters' Laboratories label or listing. B. The equipment supplier shall provide the services of a factory trained representative to ' supervise the system installation and final connections to the equipment and to provide testing to assure that the system is in proper operating condition. A complete functional test of the system shall be performed and a written report shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer attesting to the proper operation of the completed system. The system test shall be performed in the presence of the Owner's representative and the authority having jurisdiction. The manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of all parties that the system meets the specification requirements. All changes, modifications and adjustments to the installed system needed to meet the specification requirements shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. I C. The manufacturer shall provide an authorized representative to instruct and train the Fire Department and the Owner's personnel in the operation of the system. Training shall consist of a minimum of two one-hour sessions at times scheduled by the Owner. ' D. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization. The name and phone number of this organization shall be affixed to the inside of the doors of all control panels. As a part of this contract, the service organization shall provide a maintenance ' contract beginning on the date of final acceptance and remaining in force throughout the warranty period. The contract shall include a minimum of two preventative maintenance service calls per year at times scheduled by the Owner. I 970154 16726-1 10/29/97 • 111 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions of this , specification. Each copy of the shop drawing shall bear the approval stamp and signature of the authority having jurisdiction. Shop drawings without the approval of the authority having jurisdiction will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Complete descriptive product data consisting of detailed manufacturer's drawings on the fan shutdown control panel, initiating devices, control devices and wire. 2. Floor plan(s)showing the exact location of all fan shutdown equipment and the interconnection between the devices. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, upon final acceptance of the system, operation and maintenance instructions in accordance with the General Conditions of this specification. The manual shall contain procedures to be followed for troubleshooting, resetting the system, and other functions normal to, and inherent in, the fan shutdown system. 1.05 WARRANTY A. All fan shutdown system components shall be warranted by the system manufacturer for a period of one year beginning at the time of final acceptance. During the warranty period, all defective components shall be replaced without charge. PART 2-PRODUCTS , 2.01 . CONTROL PANEL A. The control panel shall consist of solid-state electronic modules. Trouble and alarm I conditions shall be indicated by LED's. Keyboards or keypads external to the control panel shall not be required to operate the system during alarm conditions. The control panel shall be in an enclosed metal surface mounted cabinet specifically designed for public areas. It shall have a locked, hinged front door with two master keys that also fit all other system apparatus utilizing keys for access. B. Initiating zones shall be wired as Class"B". Quantities of active and spare zones are I indicated on the drawings. C. The control panel shall monitor each initiating zone for trouble and alarm conditions. There shall be no limit to the number of zones which may be in alarm simultaneously. D. The control module for the system shall include annunciator supervision circuitry, earth ground detection, low or no battery voltage trouble monitoring and reporting and adjustable alarm silence inhibit capability as well as reset, alarm silence, trouble silence switches and audible and visual trouble indicators. Relays shall be provided to accomplish the various control functions as specified in the system operation section and shall be capable of being bypassed for testing purpose. E. The control panel shall provide on/off/auto switches for control of the air handling units allowing fire fighter personnel to have full control of the systems. , I 970154 16726-2 10/29/97 1 1 1 F. Standby power for the system shall be provided by low maintenance, sealed, lead acid ' batteries specifically designed for fire alarm use. Batteries shall be kept fully charged by an automatic charger. Automotive type construction wet cell storage batteries or other non-fire alarm type batteries are not acceptable. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120V AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of time as required by code with five(5) minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging 1 operations shall be automatic. G. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24V DC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. 2.02 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. The locations of alarm initiating devices indicated on the drawings are approximate. The equipment supplier shall verify device requirements and spacings and shall add devices as required to satisfy governing authorities. B. Provide duct type smoke detectors in the supply ductwork of all air handling equipment with a flow rate of 2000 cubic feet per minute(CFM)or higher and in the supply and return ductwork of all air handling equipment with a flow rate of 15,000 CFM or higher. Duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type with sampling tubes. Each detector. shall consist of a mounting base with twist-lock detecting head. Detector status shall be communicated to the control panel over two wires. The same two wires shall also provide power to the base and detector. Removal of the detector head shall cause a trouble signal at the control panel. Detector design shall provide full solid-state construction. Duct housing couplings shall be slotted to insure proper alignment of the sampling and exhaust tubes. Detector shall have an alarm LED visible through the front cover. Installation shall comply with NFPA 90A. C. Remote alarm LED indicators shall be provided for each duct smoke detector which is not readily visible or which is located above a ceiling or on a roof. Indicators shall be ' mounted in an easily accessible and visible location. Each indicator shall be labeled with the name of the unit served by the detector. The label shall also indicate whether the detector is installed in the supply or return ductwork. ' 2.03 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Activation of any duct-mounted smoke detector shall provide the following automatic operation: 1. The system alarm LED at the control panel shall flash and an audible alarm device at the control panel shall sound until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED and re-sound the audible alarm. 2. Light an alarm indicator lamp on smoke detectors which have initiated an alarm. 3.11 air handling units over 2000 CFM shall deactivate. i 970154 16726-3 10/29/97 1 1 2.04 SUPERVISION A. When trouble of any nature is detected, an audible trouble signal shall sound at the 1 control panel until the trouble is corrected or until it is manually silenced. In addition, a "System Trouble" LED shall be illuminated and shall remain"on" until the trouble condition is corrected. I B. A subsequent trouble condition received after manually silencing shall cause the audible trouble signal to resound. Each independently supervised circuit shall include an LED to indicate disarrangement condition in that circuit. If the trouble condition is not corrected within a pre-programmed time interval, the trouble alarm shall resound to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100%operational. C. The system shall contain independently supervised initiating circuits so that a fault in any one zone shall not affect any other zone. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. I D. The alarm indicating device circuits shall be independently supervised and fused so that disarrangement of any circuit shall not affect the operation of the other circuits. E. All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble. F. The power supply for the system shall be supervised so that loss of the incoming power, a low battery voltage condition or a battery disconnection will cause a trouble condition in the system. A"power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. I 2.05 REMOTE ALARM DEVICES A. Provide remote audible/visual devices for duct detector trouble and duct detector alarm. 1 Each device shall consist of a horn or buzzer and an indicator light. Each device shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting and shall be labeled according to its function. 2.06 MANUFACTURERS A. The fan shutdown system shall be manufactured by Fire Alarm and Systems Technology, Inc. (FAST), Fire-Lite, Gamewell, Honeywell, Johnson Controls, Notifier, Pyrotronics, Simplex or Spectronics. PART 3-EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The entire system shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring I diagrams. The Contractor shall furnish all conduit,wiring, outlet boxes,junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for a complete installation. B. The fan shutdown power supply disconnecting means shall be painted red and shall be ' labeled"Fan Shutdown System". Locking means shall be provided. C. All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the I local authority having jurisdiction and shall be installed in conduit. Conduits shall be concealed in finished spaces. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled "Fan i 970154 16726-4 10/29/97 1 1 I Shutdown System". Wring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. All ' wiring shall be of the following types unless otherwise recommended by the system manufacturer: 120V AC and power supply connections #12 (minimum) ' Alarm initiating circuits #18 solid Auxiliary control circuits #14 solid ' D. Cover all smoke detection devices with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness, if field conditions so require. E. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to the work of other trades shall be coordinated with the appropriate contractors. F. The Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris for the inside and the outside of the fan shutdown equipment after completion of the installation. G. Install remote audible/visual devices in a normally-occupied portion of the building or in the location indicated on plans. ' END OF SECTION • I 1 1 1 I 970154 16726-5 10/29/97 1 SECTION 16740 ' VOICE AND DATA CABLING PATHWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK rA. This section covers voice and data cabling pathways. Pathways are defined as items in which voice and data cables are placed. 111 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSWHERE A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: ' 1. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 2. Section 16050- Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 16110-Conduit Raceways 4. Section 16130-Boxes and Fittings 5. Section 16450-Grounding PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' 1. Outlet boxes: a. Wall outlets: 4-inch square, 2-1/8"deep with single gang ring i2. Plates: Single gang, blank, finish to match other plates in the same area ' 3. Conduit: a. Interior, 3/4 inch, minimum: ' 1) EMT for conduits in walls or ceilings and for exposed work 2) PVC for underground conduits and conduits in floor slabs. See drawings and Part 3 of this specification section for areas where conduits may be run underground or in floor slabs. PART 3-EXECUTION 111 3.01 OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Provide an outlet box for each voice, data or combination outlet indicated on drawings. B. Provide a blank plate for each outlet. • ' C. Where a voice or data outlet is indicated adjacent to a receptacle, locate the centerline of the outlet no more than 8 inches horizontally from the centerline of the receptacle. Support the outlet from the same framing member supporting the receptacle or provide additional framing members as required. 970154 16740-1 10/23/97 1 1 1 3.02 CONDUIT I A. Provide conduit for each outlet as indicated below: 1. Voice Outlet: Conduit stubbed to the nearest accessible ceiling space. I 2. Data Outlet: Conduit stubbed to the nearest accessible ceiling space. 3. Combination Voice and Data Outlet: Conduit stubbed to the nearest accessible r ceiling space. B. Install each conduit with the minimum quantity of bends possible. I C. Provide an insulating bushing at the free end of each conduit. F. Provide a pullstring in each conduit. ' END OF SECTION ' I I 1 1 r 1 . I 1 970154 16740-2 10/23/97 I I SECTION 16749 VOICE CABLE SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. This section covers voice cables and termination equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. When included as a part of this specification, the following contain related requirements: 1. Section 16010-General Electrical Requirements 2. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 16450-Grounding ' 4. Section 16740-Voice and Data Cabling Pathways 5. Drawings 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Cables and equipment required by this specification shall be installed by a Contractor with a minimum of five years experience in installing and certifying similar systems. The Contractor shall provide references upon request. B. Equipment and installation shall be in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces ' 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications ' 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB 67 Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems. 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Color Coding, Labeling and Documentation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the General Conditions of this specification. Submittals shall include the following: ' 1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature describing the following: a. Cables b. Equipment racks c. Punch-down blocks I 970154 16749-1 10/24/97 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. System components shall be the product of a single manufacturer where possible. Where products of multiple manufacturers are used, all similar products (all cables, etc.) shall be the product of a single manufacturer. All components shall meet or exceed category performance requirements. Completed systems shall be tested to insure compliance with performance specifications. ' 2.02 BACKBONE CABLES (RISER CABLES) A. Category 3 I 1. Type: UL Listed, Category 3 2. Conductors: 24 AWG, copper 3. Quantity of Pairs: 100 4. Shielding: overall grounding shield 5. Manufacturer. AT&T type ARMM or equivalent 2.03 PUNCH-DOWN BLOCKS A. Wiring Block: AT&T 110A(100 pair) or equivalent , B. Connector Block: 1. Four-pair. AT&T 110C-4 , 2. Five-pair: AT&T 110C-5 C. Jumper Trough: AT&T 110A2 ' 2.04 CABLE MANAGEMENT PRODUCTS A. Distribution Rings: , • 1. Wall Mounted (D-Rings): Graybar No. GB10B or equivalent 2. Pendant Mounted: Newton No. 5045 or equivalent 3. Post Type: Graybar No. GB20 or equivalent PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 BACKBONE CABLES A. Provide Category 3 cables to interconnect communication cabinets as indicated on drawings. 3.02 CABLE TERMINATION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. Terminate cables in accordance with TIA/EIA standards. Terminate both ends of each cable. At the communication closet, terminate Category 3 cables on punch-down blocks. B. Cut cables to the proper length to allow termination at punch-down blocks without , unnecessary slack. I 970154 16749-2 10/24/97 1 C. Test all Category 3 cables for continuity. Cables shall be installed and terminated prior to testing. Test riser cables from punch-down block to punch-down block. Reterminate and retest cables which fail. Replace cables which fail the second test. 3.03 DOCUMENTATION A. Labeling 1. Label each riser cable or cable bundle in each communication closet to indicate the floor or area served. 2. Label each punch-down block and patch panel to indicate the destination of each ' station cable. 3. Provide commercially manufactured labels with mechanically printed text. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 970154 16749-3 10/24/97 1 .1, "c 25A _ CITY OF OMAHA 4 LEGISLATIVE CHAMBER Omaha,Nebr 19 RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF OMAHA: WHEREAS, bids were received on November 19, 1997 for S.P. 97-20,Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restrooms Renovation, 13th and Bert Murphy Drive; and, WHEREAS,Hawkins Construction Co. submitted a low bid of$1,118,000.00 being the lowest and best bid received for S.P. 97-20, Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovation, 13th and Bert Murphy Drive; and, WHEREAS, Hawkins Construction Co. has complied with the City's Contract Compliance Ordinance No. 28885 in relation to Civil Rights- Human Relations. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF OMAHA: THAT, the bid of$1,118,000.00 from Hawkins Construction Co. for S.P. 97-20, Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovation, 13th and Bert Murphy Drive,being the lowest and best bid received,be accepted and the contract awarded. BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED: THAT,the contract with Hawkins Construction Co., as recommended by the Mayor, in the amount of$1,118,000.00 is hereby approved. BE IT ALSO FURTHER RESOLVED: THAT,the Finance Department is authorized to pay the cost of S.P. 97-20,Rosenblatt Stadium 1998 Clubhouse/Restroom Renovation, 13th and Bert Murphy Drive in the amount of $1,118,000.00 from the Rosenblatt Stadium Expansion Fund No. 307. P:\PLN2\5761.SAP APPRO AS FORM: %TAZThE By.. _ ouncilmember • Adopted DEC e 1997 •� City Cl Approved. � Mayor011 • z rI E. eruua ! uu 1 J O CD O O O CD O' c 0 �j ►y 4444,(S.4' d < y C/ A, b • CD g a. CT g O . G O CD yG O �' A - n 2\4. . y GrD0. Og 8C7O a G � G pO • y N � G . O 3 O sa W :—. co s. cr tin /, O O0AG .] WO n WnC vO OO . o " CO ' P O bd vo QO � PQ' . 4 00 C C 9t, tc .-. d 5 5 2 ?.i . • • * \ - \ • :1 . •